Home

354 267-24 - heidenhain

1. S Oo 20 40 60 80 100120 O Fe 72 773 degr ICP contour pattern cir ax 10 2f2 oo djo 06 sm O xl o Jo o Ho af wif 900 Qf oo to sf80 F 0 08 OO T 40 Teach in X 139 871 a Z 49 13 e a u ee ee ee ee ee ee ee AN Toot managenent Organization U4 mm F fal 10 000 mmr 0 m min S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 Beispiel Fraesen Stirnflaeche H1 T40 Rap tray positioning H2 T40 ICP contour pattern cir ax N3 T40 ICP contour pattern cir ax H4 T40 Tool change point Program Renumber Change Erase Copy Edit Add Back list text cycle cycle cycle cycle of 00 2 3 degr Roughing cycles lon trans 515 _ Example Milling Cycle 9 6 DIN Programming Example Threaded Stud This example illustrates how to machine a threaded stud using the DIN programming feature The individual working steps that are defined In the DIN program are based on the workpiece drawing Required tools 20 Le ae x b meas gt Roughing tool Position T1 WO 1 Tool orientation A 93 Setting angle B 55 Nose angle R 0 8 Tool radius Example Threaded Stud Finishing tool Position T2 WO 1 Tool orientation A 93 Setting angle B 55 Nose angle R 0 5 Tool radius Threading tool Position 3 WO 1 Tool orientation Sequence of work
2. 9 3 ICP Example Matrix i il 9 3 ICP Example Matrix ICP cutting transverse The procedure presupposes that the machine has been set up and the control is in Teach in mode The infeed depth and the allowances for roughing are programmed in the ICP cutting cycle The number of the ICP contour is entered before calling the ICP editor see figure to the top right Switch to the ICP programming function with Edit ICP In this example the first two contour elements of the contour ICP example Matrix ICP contour number 777 have already been entered First you enter the rough contour Then you use the superimposition function to define the roundings You can now switch to the input mode of the ICP editor by pressing Insert element see figure at lower right ce Since MANUALplus determines the cutting direction from the contour direction the ICP contour must be described in the negative Z direction 484 Teach in Toot adninistration Organisation _ X 62 00 T1 23m 2 2 000 FE eM S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S o 150 m min adanbodantndnnananinnnnindini 0 100 3 688 degr ICP cut transy Start pt Teach in Toot adninistration Organisation _ Xi 62 000 T14 3m 2 2 000 FE e S Q 20 40 60 80100120 S ol 150 m min inanin 0 9 ASA ocx 3 888 degr neg Cnr LJ Q Herons
3. 10 Thread diameter M10 F 1 5 Thread pitch H O0O The tool is not a driven tool HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in X 12 i ax moo T1 az 0 000 Z 52 00 z H F fel fel 10 000 on r eee D 5000 r min so E D53 denr 0 043 degr lt B2 O pe aa 25 LULU EE k wl OSU yjz Wo soo F 0 1 Start point Teach in Toot managenent organization X 12 002 s T1 az 0 000 Z 52 00 az F fel ae EEPE AE 20 40 60 80 100120 185 m min Summit D 5000 r min ans sa o oox 0 043 degr degr Start point Pattern Pattern Tool Take over S F from Input Back linear circular list position tool finished 199 cles A i vr Deep hole drilling X 22 E ax T1 az 0 000 Z 52 00 42 E F fel fe OS Sint reee 20 40 60 80 pen oR B 165 m min D 5000 r min El oox 0 043 degr E zj 2 E x1 21 x2 22 55 Pyiollti lt ti BL STC E2 _ rrr T 50 5800 F o 2 Start point cles IILILIL Sa os 4 7 Drillin A hole is to be bored through the workpiece outside the turning center with the cycle Deep hole drilling axial This machining operation requires a traversable Teach in To01 management e Organization spindle and driven tools 72 002 ax 0 000 X 72 002 T 1 dz 0 000 The parameters 1st hole dep
4. Ti N e Circular arc face G102 G103 Geometry command G102 G103 defines a circular arc in a contour on the face Machining command The tool moves on a circular arc at feed rate to the end point The direction of rotation is shown in the graphic support window Parameters X end point diameter value C end angle for angle direction see graphic support window XK end point Cartesian coordinates YK end point Cartesian coordinates gt R radius gt I center point Cartesian coordinates gt K center point Cartesian coordinates gt Q point of intersection default Q 0 If entered data permit two possible solutions for the end point O defines the end point gt B chamfer rounding arc Transition to the next contour element When entering a chamfer rounding program the theoretical end point of the contour element E B no input Tangential transition B 0 No tangential transition B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer Z end point KE Define the end point either in polar or Cartesian coordinates End point in the coordinate origin Program XK 0 YK 0 Program either center or radius f you do not program the center MANUALplus automatically calculates the possible solutions for the center and chooses that point as the center which results in the shortest arc Permitted as geometry command only for G102 G103 Parameters O B Per
5. 4 6 Thread and vneereumagre es j il 4 6 Thread and Undercullfilctes Undercut DIN 509 E Call the thread cutting menu Select the Undercut DIN 509 E cycle With With return soft key Off When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position see figures at right On Tool returns to the starting point see figures on next page The cycle machines a thread undercut according to DIN 509 type E a cylinder start chamfer then the adjoining cylinder and finishes with the plane surface You can define a finishing oversize for the area of the cylinder The cylinder start chamfer is executed when you enter at least one of the parameters B or RB Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 starting point of cylinder X2 Z2 end point on plane surface E reduced feed rate for the plunge cut and the thread chamfer default Feed rate F T tool number spindle speed cutting speed feed per revolution undercut depth default Value from standard table undercut length default Value from standard table undercut angle default Value from standard table R undercut radius on both sides of the undercut default Value from standard table B cylinder start chamfer default No start chamfer WB 1st cut angle default 45 RB chamfer radius default No chamfer radius U finishing oversize for the area of the cylinder default O Z A mT V All parameters that you enter will b
6. DIN macros You can integrate DIN macros in cycle programs Make sure that the DIN macros do not contain any zero point shifts att Danger of collision Cycle programming With DIN macros the zero point shift is reset at the end of the cycle Therefore do not use any DIN macros with zero point shifts in cycle programming Graphical test run simulation Before executing a cycle you can graphically test the contour details and the machining sequence see Graphic Simulation on page 68 Cycle keys A programmed cycle is not executed until Cycle START is pressed Cycle STOP interrupts a running program With thread cutting the current cut will be completed before cycle execution is interrupted During a cycle interruption you can Resume cycle execution with Cycle START The control will always resume execution of the cycle at the point of interruption even If you have moved the axes In the meantime Move the axes using the jog keys or handwheels Terminate the machining process with the Cancel soft key HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 cles ing wi 4 1 Work Switching functions M functions T O Whether switching functions are triggered automatically or must be commanded manually depends on your specific machine MANUALplus generates all switching functions that are necessary for running a cycle ing wi The direction of spindle rotation must be defined in the tool parameters Using the too
7. x 62 000 Z 2 000 ao S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 ae eee ee ee eee ee eee a dx 0 000 T 1 dz 0 000 F fol 0 400 on r S o 150 m min 0 100 3 886 degr 1 Lines 9 Examples il Contour element 4 The next connecting contour element is a horizontal line After you have entered the target point Z the line is unambiguously defined MANUALplus draws the contour elements in the graphics window HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 feach in toot administration organisation A 62 000 as T1 00 gt 2000 FEL S Q 20 40 60 80 100120 5 o 150 m min inn 0 9 REA oo 3 888 degr xs 40 2s 35 2 ES ae Example Threaded Stud teach in __ uiToansannt Sra on rant sae oR x 62 000 T 1 ae 0 000 l 2 000 A2 FE 0 400 mmr S omiominiain S o 150 m min AAOOAOAORARARRAR R 0 WD oo 3 888 degr k il Example Threaded Stud Contour element 5 The next connecting contour element is a rounding You only need to enter rounding radius B When the rounding is programmed the control does not yet know the next connecting contour element The rounding and the preceding linear element are therefore considered unsolved elements MANUALplus displays the symbols for these elements below the graphics window and depicts the preceding horizontal line in gray 476 x 62 000 1 T 1 az 0 000
8. 43 T T display 47 Tangential transition 245 Tapered thread Cycle programming 168 DIN cycle G353 343 Tapping tools 424 Teach in 62 Terms used 39 Thread Cycle programming API thread 170 API thread recutting 178 Tapered thread 168 Tapered thread recutting 176 Tapping axial radial 195 Thread and undercut cycles 162 Thread chamfer 180 Thread cycle 165 Thread cycle expanded 166 Thread depth 163 Thread milling axial 197 Thread position 162 Thread recutting 172 Thread recutting expanded 174 Thread run in thread run out 163 DIN programming API thread G352 342 Extended longitudinal multi start thread G351 341 Metric ISO thread G35 339 Simple longitudinal single start thread G350 340 Single path G33 338 Tapered thread G353 343 Tapping G36 357 Thread cycle simple G32 337 Thread milling axial G799 358 Universal thread cycle G31 335 Thread angle thread cycle 163 Thread cutter 413 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Thread undercut DIN 76 Cycle programming Thread undercut DIN 76 180 DIN programming Undercut contour G25 344 Undercut cycle G85 345 With cylinder machining G858 349 ICP programming Thread undercut DIN 76 265 Thread cutting tools 422 Time calculation Simulation 74 Time calculation parameter 438 Tool change point Approach the tool change pos
9. 6 9 Zero ii Shifts Additive zero point shift G56 G56 shifts the workpiece zero point by Z or X The shift is referenced to the currently active workpiece zero point If you shift the workpiece zero point more than once with G56 the shift is always added to the currently active zero point Parameters gt X shift diameter value gt Z shift G51 or G59 cancel additive zero point shifts 6 9 Zero a Shifts att Danger of collision Cycle programming With DIN macros the zero point shift is reset at the end of the cycle Therefore do not use any DIN macros with zero point shifts in cycle programming m x D 3 o G o1 306 6 DIN Programming il Absolute zero point shift G59 G59 sets the workpiece zero point to the position X Z The new zero point remains in effect to the end of the program Parameters X zero point shift diameter value Z zero point shift rc G59 cancels all previous zero point shifts with G51 G56 or G59 alt Danger of collision Cycle programming With DIN macros the zero point shift is reset at the end of the cycle Therefore do not use any DIN macros with zero point shifts in cycle programming HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 9 Zero ii Shifts m x D 3 D G cl i i T T os 6 1 6 10 Oversizes Axis parallel oversize G57 G57 defines different oversizes for X and Z G57 is programmed before the re
10. Amount of data already transferred is shown in the progress window E When receiving parameters and tool data the previous data are overwritten When you start Network MANUALplus reads the program names and program descriptions of the remote station This process can take several minutes and is indicated in the progress display above the soft key row 446 Transfer Network Manualplus ok02069 bis auf n5 FH Mannheir Schlichten ok 10 07 97 Manualplus zyklenprog Manualplus 2yklenprog Manualplus 2yklenprog SINTEF T NR 202 06 KOMPLET SINTEF T NR 202 06 KOMPLET Manualplus 2yklenprog Manualplus 2yklenprog 005 006 00 006 009 0090 0091 01 010 011 us 2yklenprog n55 ok02069 eim Huelse Mat POM en funktioniert ni ok 10 07 97 Manualplus zyklenprog Manualplus 2yklenprog Manualplus 2yklenprog SINTEF T NR 202 06 KOMPLET SINTEF T NR 202 06 KOMPLET Manualplus 2yklenprog Manualplus 2yklenprog Size 984 Byte Last change 13 06 2003 13 44 8 Organization Mode of Operation E Program Press Program ARa l U U U U a a a r eana e 2005 Example Beispiel Fraesen 00 Wkz Test 7 Pilzukz 222 ICP Excample Beispiel M j a 2222 ICP Excample Beispiel M 223 E 333 ICP Beispiel Stechzyklus 0001 Manualplus 2yklenprog ae Program Press Program selection 4242
11. E Q 3 Triangle Q 4 Rectangle square E Q gt 4 Polygon gt P maximum infeed default Total depth in one infeed U overlap factor default 0 5 Minimum overlap of milling paths U milling diameter I oversize contour parallel gt K oversize Z in infeed direction gt F feed rate for infeed default Active feed rate E reduced feed rate for circular elements default Active feed rate H cutting direction default 0 The cutting direction see graphic support window can be changed with H and the direction of tool rotation E H 0 Up cut milling E H 1 Climb milling m x O 2 D G N NI 366 6 DIN Programming il 0 roughing finishing default O O 0 Roughing O 1 Finishing J milling direction For polygons without chamfers roundings J defines whether a unidirectional or bidirectional milling operation is to be executed J 0 Unidirectional J 1 Bidirectional Notes With Q 0 one of the following figures is programmed in the subsequent command A G80 is programmed after the command G304 circle G305 rectangle G307 polygon A polygon that has been defined with G797 Q gt 0 is in the center A figure defined in the subsequent command can be outside the center The cycle calculates the milling depth from Z and ZE taking the oversizes into account HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 a T Ti N j il T
12. ICP cut longitud Rap trav positioning ICP finish longit Rap trav positioning Thread cycle Rap trav positioning T 1 ooo F fo 0 400 mn r 100 Q 20 40 60 80 100120 o 150 m min AOOROOCRDOOCROOCROOORIORINMIN 100x 3 888 degr Program Renumber Change Erase Copy Edit Add Back list text cycle cycle cycle cycle 9 Examples il 9 3 ICP Example Matrix This example illustrates how to machine a matrix using the ICP programming feature The individual working steps for machining the ICP contour and integrating the contour into ICP cycles are based on the workpiece drawing In the process described below you create an ICP contour description and a cycle program for parts production The machining operation is performed with the ICP cutting transverse cycle Required tools Roughing tool Position T1 WO 1 Tool orientation A 93 Setting angle B 55 Nose angle R 0 8 Tool radius Finishing tool Position T2 WO 1 Tool orientation A 93 Setting angle B 55 Nose angle R 0 5 Tool radius Sequence of working steps Clamp a workpiece blank diameter 95 mm length 100 mm Machine setup Define the workpiece zero point Measure the tool dimensions Switch to Teach in mode Enter the positioning cycles for tool change ICP contour programming Integrate the ICP contour in the roughing and finishing cycles HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110
13. K diameter Pattern diameter default The current X position is transferred A starting angle position of the first hole figure gt W end angle position of the last hole figure Wi end angle distance to the next position Q number of holes figures default 1 gt V direction of rotation default 0 Position of holes figures required if W is defined E V 0 Holes are placed on the longer arc V 1 Holes are arranged clockwise starting at A E V 2 Holes are arranged counterclockwise starting at A Parameter combinations for defining the center of the pattern and the pattern positions E Center of pattern EX C XK YK Pattern positions A W and Q A Wi and Q HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 c hm T E A N N o i 6 22 Pattern Pe ining m x lt 9D g D h e e 3 9D Q D 2 S D O D n W 86 6 DIN Programming il Linear pattern lateral surface G744 With cycle G744 you can machine linear hole patterns or figure patterns in which the individual features are arranged at a regular spacing on the lateral surface Parameter combinations for defining the starting point and the pattern positions E Starting point of pattern Z and C Pattern positions E W and Q E Wi and Q If XE has not been defined the drilling milling cycle or the figure definition of the next NC block is used as a refer
14. Li N Te Example G304 Figure definition Full circle face G304 G304 defines a full circle on the face Program this figure in conjunction with G793 or G797 Parameters XK center YK center R radius of circle 368 6 DIN Programming il Figure definition Rectangle face G305 G305 defines a rectangle on the face Program this figure in conjunction with G793 or G797 Parameters XK center YK center A angle reference see graphic support window gt K length of rectangle B height of rectangle gt R chamfer rounding E R lt 0 Chamfer length R gt 0 Rounding arc HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Ing n 6 20 Face _ m x D 3 J G w a o i 6 20 Face ee ining m x D 3 J o G w J Figure definition Eccentric polygon face G307 G307 defines a polygon on the face Program this figure in conjunction with G793 or G797 Parameters gt XK center YK center gt Q number of edges Range 3 lt Q lt 127 A angle reference see graphic support window K width across flats SW length m K lt 0 Width across flats inside diameter E K gt 0 Edge length R chamfer rounding E R lt 0 Chamfer length m R gt 0 Rounding arc 370 6 DIN Programming il 6 21 Lateral Surface Machining Reference diameter G120 G120 determines the reference diameter of the unrolled lateral surface Program G120 if you use CY for G110
15. P 1st hole depth no input Hole will be drilled in one pass I reduction value default 0 With each subsequent pass the drilling depth is reduced by I however without falling below J B return distance default Retract to starting point of hole J minimum hole depth default 1 10 of P A drilling lengths default 0 gt E dwell time for chip breaking at end of hole default 0 gt V drilling variants Feed rate reduced by 50 during both pre drilling and through boring 0 No feed rate reduction E 1 Feed reduction for through boring E 2 Feed reduction for pre drilling E 3 Feed reduction for pre drilling and through boring gt K drilling depth radial holes radius E K is defined The starting point of the hole is calculated from the hole end point and K E K is not defined K is calculated from the hole end point and the current tool position gt D retreat retraction speed and infeed within the hole default O E 0 Rapid traverse E 1 Feed rate HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 18 Cycles m X D 3 G N 5 i 6 18 Cycles Notes The control starts execution of the cycle at the current tool and spindle position The starting point is approached at rapid traverse Axial hole Do not program X Define Z Radial hole Define X Do not program Z X and Z are programmed The control uses the tool orientation to
16. To influence recess turning operations use the following parameters Recessing feed rate O Feed rate for recessing movement Turning operation unidirectional bidirectional U You can perform a unidirectional or bidirectional turning operation With radial recess turning cycles unidirectional turning operations are always performed in the direction of the spindle With axial ICP recess turning cycles the machining direction corresponds to the direction of contour definition Offset width B After the second infeed movement during the transition from turning to recessing the path to be machined is reduced by offset width B Each time the system switches from turning to recessing on this side the path is reduced by B in addition to the previous offset The total offset is limited to 80 of the effective cutting width effective cutting width cutting width 2 cutting radius If required the MANUALplus reduces the programmed offset width After precutting the remaining material is removed with a single cut Depth compensation RB Depending on factors such as workpiece material or feed rate the tool tip is displaced during a turning operation The resulting infeed error can be compensated with depth compensation RB during finishing The depth compensation factor is usually determined empirically KE These cycles require the use of recess turning tools HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 5 nevessinagre es b il 4
17. decide whether a radial or an axial hole is machined see Drilling tools on page 423 356 6 DIN Programming il Tapping G36 You can use cycle G36 with stationary tools for cutting axial threads in the turning center and with driven tools for cutting axial and radial threads Meaning of retraction length J Use this parameter for floating tap holders The cycle calculates a new nominal pitch on the basis of the thread depth the programmed pitch and the retract length The nominal pitch is somewhat smaller than the pitch of the tap During tapping the drill is pulled away from the chuck by the retraction length With this method you can achieve higher service life from the taps Parameters X end point of thread for axial machining diameter value Z end point of thread for radial machining gt F feed per revolution Thread pitch gt B run in length default 2 thread pitch F1 Distance for reaching the programmed spindle speed and feed rate Q number of spindle Q 0 Master spindle stationary tool Q 1 Driven tool gt H reference direction for thread pitch default O H 0 Feed rate on the Z axis H 1 Feed rate on the X axis S retraction speed default Same spindle speed as for tapping gt K drilling depth radial holes radius K is defined The starting point of the hole is calculated from the hole end point and K K is not defined K is calculated from the ho
18. lt W lt 45 C starting angle Position of the spindle at the thread start default 0 gt H type of tool offset default 0 13 H 0 Without offset E H 1 Offset from the left toward the thread base 1 H 2 Offset from the right toward the thread base H 3 Tool is offset alternately from the right and left zigzag Internal or external threads See algebraic sign of U Infeeds f the division U I provides a remainder the first feed is reduced The last cut is divided into four partial cuts 1 2 1 4 1 8 and 1 8 GF Transverse threads are machined with recessing tools Cycle STOP becomes effective at the end of a thread Cut The feed rate and spindle speed overrides are not effective during cycle execution Feedforward control is switched off HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 337 il Cycles 6 15 Threac Thread single path G33 G33 cuts threads in any desired direction and position with variable pitch longitudinal tapered or transverse threads internal or external threads The thread starts at the current tool position and ends at the end point X Z Parameters gt X end point of thread diameter value Z end point of thread F thread pitch B run in length default 0 Distance required to accelerate to the programmed feed rate gt P run out length default 0 Distance required to decelerate the slide C starting angle Position of the spindle at the thread start
19. 100 m NC programming as per DIN 66025 ISO 6983 DIN programming HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Creation of DIN programs or DIN macros Programming with roughing recessing recess turning drilling and milling cycles Simple geometry programming calculation of missing data Programming variables Subprograms 10 3 Technical Information f il 10 3 Technical Information Position data Tool compensation Nominal positions in Cartesian or polar coordinates Absolute or incremental dimensions Inout and display in the metric or inch system Distance to go display Compensation of tool tip position in the X Z plane Tool table Automatic recognition of tool tip position Precision compensation via handwheel with transfer of compensation values to the tool table Tool tip milling cutter radius compensation Tool table for 99 tools with tool descriptions Graphically supported tool entry Tool life monitoring or monitoring of number of parts produced Test run graphics Graphic simulation of individual cycles cycles programmed in teach in mode or DIN programs Two dimensional wire frame or cutting path graphics Turning view face view or depiction of unrolled lateral surface Zoom function for magnifying or reducing isolated details Machining time analysis 530 Calculation of machining times and idle times Consideration of switching commands triggered by CNC Representation of single times per cycle or per to
20. 194 4 Cycle Programming il Tapping axial radial Call the drilling menu Select the Tapping axial cycle Select the Tapping radial cycle With this cycle you can tap a thread on the face lateral surface of a workpiece Meaning of retraction length L Use this parameter for floating tap holders The cycle calculates a new nominal pitch on the basis of the thread depth the programmed pitch and the retract length The nominal pitch is somewhat smaller than the pitch of the tap During tapping the drill is pulled away from the chuck by the retraction length With this method you can achieve higher service life from the taps Cycle parameters X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle Fl thread pitch feed rate default Feed rate from tool definition B run in length default 2 thread pitch F1 to reach the programmed spindle speed and feed rate SR return speed default Same spindle speed as for tapping for enabling the tap to retract rapidly Retraction length L default 0 when using floating tap holders T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed Drilling axial Z1 starting point of hole default Drilling starts from position Z Z2 end point of hole Drilling radial X1 starting point of hole default Drilling starts from position X X2 end point of hole IE MANUALplus uses the tool parameter driven tool to determine whether the pro
21. 2 Move on paraxial path from X Z to starting point of chamfer 3 Move to end point of chamfer at programmed feed rate 4 Retract and return to starting point on paraxial path HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 3 Single wares 4 3 Single cull ctes Rounding Call the single cut menu Select the Rounding cycle With With return soft key return Off When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position On Tool returns to the starting point Rounding The cycle produces a rounding that Is dimensioned relative to the corner of the workpiece contour When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position Contour rounding With return The tool approaches the workpiece machines the rounding that is dimensioned relative to the corner of the workpiece contour and returns to the starting point at the end of cycle Cutter radius compensation is taken into account see figures at right Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour corner R rounding Radius of rounding I K chamfer width in X Z J element position see graphic support window default 1 Position is relative to X1 Z1 Algebraic sign determines cutting direction T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Cycle run if With return is active 1 Calculate starting point and end point of rounding 2 Move on paraxial path from X Z to starting point of roundi
22. Circle Q 0 RE gt 0 L and B No input HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 211 il T O 4 8 Millin Cycle parameters first input window X C Z starting point spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle C1 angle of figure center default Spindle angle C X1 diameter of figure center Z1 milling top edge default Starting point Z X2 limiting diameter Z2 milling floor L edge length Rectangle Length of rectangle Square polygon Edge length Circle No input width across flats For Q 1 Q 2 Remaining thickness remaining material Rectangle Width of rectangle Square polygon Q gt 4 Width across flats use only for even number of surfaces program B as an alternative to L Circle No input RE rounding radius default 0 T N 212 Polygon Q gt 2 Rounding radius Circle Q 0 Radius of circle angle to X axis default O Polygon Q gt 2 Position of figure Circle No input number of edges default O O 0 Circle 1 One surface 2 Two surfaces offset by 180 3 Triangle 4 Rectangle square Q gt 4 Polygon tool number spindle speed cutting speed feed per revolution 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle parameters second input window T O P infeed depth default Total depth in one infeed U overlap factor No input Contour milling U gt 0 Pocket milling minimum overlap of milling paths U milling diameter I conto
23. Dimension line with arrow head on one side Directional dimension the algebraic sign defines the direction Dimension line with arrow head on both sides Absolute dimension the algebraic sign is of no importance 278 817 nc a 6817 6818 1614 Q 0 2 T2 695 FO 4 G96 195 M3 3 GO X120 22 4 6818 5 H2 I1 K0 3 5 GO X60 22 6 G1 2 15 7 G1 X82 B2 a Max approach mm 6 DIN Programming il Program and block structure Program structure E Program number starting with the character followed by up to eight characters and the extension nc for main programs or ncs for subprograms E Program designation definition in the second program line E NC blocks or comment blocks E The term END with main programs or RETURN with macros and subprograms The first and last lines of an NC program cannot be edited The program designation can be edited but not deleted The program designation can be displayed in the program list and edited with the program selection functions NC blocks begin with an N followed by a block number with up to four digits The block numbers do not affect the sequence in which the program blocks are executed They are intended for identifying the individual blocks An NC block comprises NC commands These are traversing switching or organizational commands Traversing and switching commands start with a letter followed by a number such as G
24. EAEN 20 40 60 80 aaa Q minnvinntnivindtninininnin 0 so 185 m min D 5000 aa o 0 043 degr Recessing radial finishing E Start point Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back list position tool speed finished 161 45 vr 4 6 Thread and Undercullfilctes 4 6 Thread and Undercut Cycles These cycles machine single or multi start longitudinal and tapered threads as well as thread undercuts In Manual mode you can Repeat the last cut to compensate for tool inaccuracies Use the function Recut to rework damaged threads Threads are cut with constant speed Cycle STOP becomes effective at the end of a thread cut The feed rate and spindle speed overrides are not effective during cycle execution Thread position MANUALplus determines the direction of the thread from the parameters for starting point Z or current tool position in Manual mode and end point Z2 You select internal or external thread by soft key Undercut position MANUALplus determines the position of an undercut from the parameters for starting point X Z current tool position in Manual mode and cylinder starting point X1 end point Z2 on plane surface GF An undercut may only be machined in a right angled paraxial contour corner in the linear axis 162 Teach in X 12 002 s Toot management organization _ T1 S o DD Z 32 001 2 FE 10
25. K center point absolute gt Q point of intersection default Q 0 Specifies the end point if two solutions are possible See graphic support window B chamfer rounding At the end of the circular arc you can program a chamfer rounding or a tangential transition to the next contour element E No entry Tangential transition B 0 No tangential transition E B gt 0 Radius of rounding m B lt 0 Width of chamfer E special feed rate for chamfer rounding default Active feed rate ce f you do not program the center MANUALplus automatically calculates the possible solutions for the center and chooses that point as the center which results in the shortest arc E The direction of rotation of G12 G13 is shown in the graphic support window 296 1 m xx fet 3 a D G N G ow 6 DIN Programming il 6 6 Feed Rate and Spindle Speed Speed limitation G26 G126 m x lt 3 3 D G N G N 1 G26 Speed limitation for spindle G126 Speed limitation for spindle 1 driven tool The speed limit remains in effect until a new value is programmed for G26 G126 Parameters gt S speed Maximum speed GF The speed limitation remains in effect even after concluding the DIN program and exiting Program run mode You can define a new speed limit in the F S T menu or via parameters f the speed programmed with G26 G126 is greater than
26. N6 T6 Rap tray positioning H T45 Thread cycle H8 T45 Tool change point Add correction number 65 3 8 Program m Mode MANUALplus manages 16 additive compensation values as parameters You can edit the additive compensation values in the Organization mode of operation Current parameters Additive compensation values need to be activated with G149 in a DIN program or a DIN macro Setting compensation values with the handwheel cc The Compensation values via handwheel function is only available if bit 13 of the configuration code MP 18 control configuration is set fol Interrupt program run with Cycle Stop Tool Press Tool correct offset offset Select X offset for tool or Z offset for tool f tool The compensation values that you determine per handwheel are now shown in the Distance to go display Cave Transfer the compensation value to the tool table The T display shows the new compensation value The distance to go display is cancelled fol Interrupt program run with Cycle Stop O _ Tool Select Tool correct offset Epos Select Erase X offset or Erase Z offset for the offset entered compensation value to be deleted 6 3 Machine Mode of Operation il Program execution in dry run mode The dry run mode is used for fast program execution up to a point at which machining is to resume The prerequ
27. Program Block Delete Change Extend Insert Back list function block block no block block G function Traversing commands cycles and other G commands M function Switching functions for machine components and program control functions see M Functions on page 408 Machine data Entry of F S T see Set T S F on page 392 Comment Entry of comments see Editing DIN Programs on page 281 Program variable functions Switch to the Program variable menu see Programming Variables on page 396 Machine variable functions Switch to the Machine variable menu intended for special cases and of no importance to the DIN programmer Subprogram call Program a subprogram call see Subprograms on page 406 286 6 DIN Programming il H Bees EE Programming G functions Select G function el Enter the G number Select Call the G function Enter the parameters Gave Transfer the G function If you do not know the number of the G function you can select it from the list of G functions Select G function e Emne Call the G function list list Select the G function Take over G funct Select Transfer the G function Call the G functions Enter the parameters Gaye Transfer the G function HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Machine S81 ne 6817 6818 J 1 G14 Q0 3 GO X120 22 4 6818 P5 H2 I1 K
28. Range 60 lt A lt 60 A lt 0 Infeed on left thread flank A gt 0 Infeed on right thread flank W taper angle Range 45 lt W lt 45 WE run out angle Range 0 lt WE lt 90 J remaining cutting depth default 1 100 mm T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed D number of thread starts default 1 single start thread Parameter combinations for taper angle X1 Z1 X2 Z2 X1 Z1 Z2 W Z1 X2 Z2 W 170 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run 1 2 3 Ol Calculate the proportioning of cuts Move to thread starting point X1 Z1 Move to end point Z2 at programmed feed rate taking the run out angle WE into account Return on paraxial path and approach for next thread groove Repeat 3 and 4 for all thread grooves Approach for next pass taking the reduced cutting depth and the feed angle A into account Repeat 3 to 6 until no threads D and depth U are reached HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 6 Thread and neereumgre es k il 4 6 Thread and Undercullfilctes Recut longitudinal thread Call the thread cutting menu Select the Thread cycle Re Press the Recut soft key Inner Inner thread soft key thread On Internal thread Off External thread The cycle reworks a single start thread Since you have already unclamped the workpiece MANUALplus needs to know the exact position of the thread For this place the cutting edge of the tap drill
29. Repeat 3 and 4 for all thread grooves Approach for next pass taking the reduced cutting depth and the feed angle A into account Repeat 3 to 6 until no threads D and depth U are reached ooh WN HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 6 Thread and neereumgre es i il 4 6 Thread and Undercullfilctes Tapered thread Call the thread cutting menu Select Tapered thread Inner Inner thread soft key thread On Internal thread Off External thread This cycle cuts a single or multi start tapered external or internal thread Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 starting point of thread without run in X2 Z2 end point of thread without run out Fl thread pitch feed rate U thread depth No input Depth is calculated External thread U 0 6134 F1 Internal thread U 0 5413 F1 Ist cutting depth I lt U First cut with cutting depth I further cuts Reduction of cutting depth down to J I U One cut No input Calculation from U and F1 A feed angle default 30 Range 60 lt A lt 60 A lt 0 Infeed on left thread flank A gt 0 Infeed on right thread flank mi taper angle Range 60 lt A lt 60 remaining cutting depth default 1 100 mm tool number spindle speed cutting speed number of thread starts default 1 single start thread incremental gradient default O E 0 Constant pitch E gt 0 Increase the pitch per revolution by E E lt 0 De
30. Select form elements AL ST EE Ee Select undercut DIN 509 F DIN 509 F Parameters that are not entered are automatically calculated from the standard table see DIN 509 E DIN 509 F undercut parameters on page 527 Parameters XS ZS starting point in X Z Starting point of undercut X Z target point in X Z End point of undercut I undercut diameter default Value trom standard table undercut length default Value from standard table undercut angle default Value from standard table undercut radius default Value from standard table transverse depth default Value from standard table transverse angle default Value from standard table gt UT TD AK Finishing oversize default No finishing oversize J element position default 1 J 1 Undercut starts with the longitudinal element and ends with the transverse element J 1 Undercut starts with the transverse element and ends with the longitudinal element F special feed cc The element position J cannot be entered when superimposing the undercut and cannot be changed when programming changes to ICP contours The contour corner has already been clearly defined HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 C 5 n J LLI Se O J am Q Q 0 a LO j il 5 6 ICP Contour Elements ont Face 5 6 ICP Contour Elements on the Face Enter the dimensions of the contour elements on face and later
31. Speed override Utilization display for spindle and S display of maximum speed Utilization display for spindle S for X axis x for Z axis 0 Empty field 8 Organization Mode of Operation il a 10 000 mm r Fa o mmr value of slide F ie KOl none Overview of ee a EE enabled elements r ABZ 2 Feed rate and F 100 S100 Oo 20 40 60 g 100 120 winnaninnnndnnindnn ananin D 5000 U min ox Oo 20 40 60 80 100 120 ADNANA 0 Utilization display Oo 40 80 120 160 200 R ES Utilization display 40 a s0 lt 120 150 20 200 minmininiintiritaianiniini 0 8 3 Transfer The Transfer mode is used for data backup and data exchange with PCs When we speak of Tiles in the following we mean programs parameters and tool data The following file types can be transferred Programs cycle programs DIN programs DIN macros and ICP contour descriptions Parameters Tool data Data backup HEIDENHAIN recommends backing up the tool data and programs created on MANUALplus on a PC at regular intervals You should also back up the parameters Since the parameters are not changed very often however you only need to back up the parameters from time to time as required CS For security reasons parameters are only transferred after logon as system manager see Access authorization on page 453 Once you have logged on as system manager you can also transfer and prin
32. X target point in X Xi target point in X incremental Distance from starting point to target point L length of line 5 5 ICP Contour Elements Turnin F special feed Parameters for horizontal line XS ZS starting point in X Z end point of last element Z target point in Z Zi target point in Z incremental Distance from starting point to target point L length of line F special feed 260 5 ICP Programming il ntour Z Select the line direction You enter absolute or polar dimensions for the line and then define the transition to the next contour element The direction of the angle is shown in the graphic support window Parameters gt XS ZS starting point in X Z end point of last element gt X Z target point in X Z gt Xi Zi target point in X Z incremental Distance from starting point to target point gt L length of line A angle to Z axis F special feed S m ma am e LLI thes Oo Pw c Oo Q 0 S L LO HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 261 il ntour 5 n J LLI O lt J a Q Q A O ai LO Entering circular arcs turning contour Arc with center and radius TA TA Arc with radius Arc with center You enter the dimensions of the arc and then define the transition to the next contour element Parameters for Arc with radius the center is not requested For Arc with ce
33. feed rate The values for feed rate and spindle speed that are programmed with Set T S F always refer to the spindle MANUALoplus then transfers the parameters to the DIN program together with the identification letters or G functions my T E S G96 G97 S E F G94 G95 F Select Set T S F oh Select the soft keys enter the parameters mT tool number S cutting speed or spindle speed selected by soft key EF feed per revolution or feed rate selected by soft key Conclude data input with Save 392 eochne Toor management organization 2722 E X90 Zi 12 B1 zi x100 A80 B 1 2 4 Tool number Variable Minutes Constant Cancel Feed _ _ Example T S F 6 DIN Programming il 6 25 Data Input and Data Output INPUT Ea Press Program variable function INPUT Define the input text Enter the Variable number for request see figure at top right Select Input function see top right figure on next page When programming the INPUT command you define the input text and number of the variable for request The input text explains the input During the interpretation of this command MANUALplus displays a screen window with the input text and the input field for the variable see figure to the bottom right Program interpretation continues after you have entered the data The value entered is assigned to the va
34. select the Recess turning cycle Select the Recess turning radial cycle see figures at right Select Recess turning axial see figures on the following page Press the Expanded soft key Finishing Press the Finishing run soft key run The cycle finishes the contour area from X1 Z1 to X2 Z2 see also Recess turning on page 143 Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour starting point X2 Z2 contour end point 0 recessing feed rate default Active feed rate A starting angle Range 0 lt A lt 90 W end angle Range 0 lt W lt 90 R rounding B1 B2 chamfer rounding B1 contour start B2 contour end B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer RB depth compensation T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution I K workpiece blank oversize X Z 150 4 Cycle Programming il By setting the following optional parameters you can define additional contour elements mA Oblique cut at contour start SW Oblique cut at contour end BR Rounding in both corners of the contour valley B1 Chamfer Rounding at contour start Chamfer Rounding at contour end 45 Recessingigyeies Cycle run 1 Approach contour area from X Z 2 Finish first side taking optional contour elements into account then finish contour valley up to position just before contour end point Z2 X2 3 Approach workpiece for finishing the secon
35. 0 E V 0 Constant cross section for all cuts E V 1 Constant feed E V 2 With distribution of remaining cut I V 3 Without distribution of remaining cut type of tool offset default 0 H 0 Without offset E H 1 Offset from the left toward the thread base E H 2 Offset from the right toward the thread base E H 3 Tool is offset alternately from the right and left zigzag gt Q number of air cuts after the last cut default 0 C starting angle Position of the spindle at the thread start default 0 G31 without contour definition X Z is programmed The thread starts at the current tool position and ends at the end point X Z HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 15 Phr Cycles k i G31 with contour definition X Z is not programmed G31 is followed by NC blocks defining up to 6 contour elements on which the thread is to be machined Contour definition is completed with G80 Transverse threads or successive threads are programmed with contour definition Internal or external threads See algebraic sign of U The infeeds are calculated on the basis of V V 0 Constant cross section for all cuts defines the first maximum infeed All further infeeds are executed in such a way that the same cross section as for the first cut is used V 1 The thread is machined with constant infeeds lt l V 2 If the division U I provides a remainder the first feed is reduced The last cut is divided in
36. 260 Entering lines turning contour 260 Entering circular arcs turning contour 262 Entering form elements 263 Chamfer rounding turning contour 264 Undercuts turning contour 265 5 6 ICP Contour Elements on the Face 268 Entering lines on the face 269 Entering circular arcs on the face 270 Entering chamfers roundings on the face 271 5 7 ICP Contour Elements on the Lateral Surface 272 Entering lines on the lateral surface 213 Entering circular arcs on the lateral surface 274 Entering chamfers roundings on the lateral surface 275 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 1 DIN Programming 278 Program and block structure 279 6 2 Editing DIN Programs 281 Block functions 281 Word functions 283 Address parameters 283 Comments 284 Block functions 285 Menu structure 286 Programming G functions 287 6 3 Definition of Workpiece Blank 288 Chuck part cylinder tube G20 288 Workpiece blank contour G21 289 6 4 Tool Positioning without Machining 290 Rapid traverse GO 290 Tool change point G14 291 6 5 Simple Linear and Circular Movements 292 Linear path G1 292 Circular path G2 G3 incremental center coordinates 293 Circular path G12 G13 absolute center coordinates 295 6 6 Feed Rate and Spindle Speed 297 Speed limitation G26 G126 297 Interrupted feed
37. 3 6868 degr Q 20 49 60 80 190120 o Pe A 00 Teach in Xx 62 000 T4 em Z 2 000 ao eee 150 m min 3 6868 degr Form elements a aan Chanfer a e S S A E E 9 Examples il Defining a rounding To define the rounding enter Rounding radius B feaeh in Tool administration organisation MANUALplus inserts the rounding in the existing ICP ain ooi contour and draws the perfected contour x 62 000 Ax T 1 dz 0 000 If the contour contains further corners MANUALplus Z 2 000 FE toll 0 400 mn r offers the next contour corner for selection see figure aE i 0 20 40 60 80 100120 150 m TO NE DO EONA wimini 0 B 3 888 9 3 ICP Example Matrix x 62 000 T 1 ae 0 000 l 2 000 A2 FE 0 400 mmr S ro 20 40 60 80 190 120 S o 150 m min AAOOAOAORARARRARR i 0 WD oo 3 888 degr E aan Rounding a ae a E HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 491 il 9 3 ICP Example Matrix The ICP contour has been completely defined Back concludes ICP programming and Input finished concludes the ICP cycle Checking the ICP cutting cycle After the cutting operation has been completed it is checked with the Simulation function The simulation function is called with the Graphics soft key You can then transfer the cycle to the cycle program with the Save or Overwrite 492 Teach in Sey ee ey
38. 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 10 2 Undercut Parameters j il N D 4a 3 E 4 A re 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 N q 526 D 4 4 D 5 D 5 7 D 6 4 D 7 D 7 7 D 8 3 10 5 12 14 16 17 5 19 21 1 6 1 6 2 2 2 5 ou 3 2 30 30 30 30 ou 30 30 3 Che 4 4 5 D 0 5 D 0 5 D 0 5 D 0 5 D 0 5 D 0 5 D 0 5 15 2 E7 20 23 26 28 30 10 Tables and Overviews il 1 6 1 6 2 2 2 5 3 2 3 2 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 DIN 509 E DIN 509 F undercut parameters MANUALplus determines the parameters from the diameter Designations according to the following table undercut depth E K undercut length R undercut radius We undercut angle undercut depth E A transverse angle 0 5 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 6 15 Lo 197 19 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 8 8 10 2 Undercut Parameters 8 8 lt 1 6 0 1 0 5 0 1 To lt 1 6 0 1 gt 1 6 3 0 1 1 0 2 15 gt 1 6 3 0 1 gt 3 10 0 2 2 0 2 LS gt 3 10 0 2 gt 10 18 0 2 2 0 6 157 gt 10 18 0 2 gt 18 80 0 3 25 0 6 15 gt 18 80 0 3 gt 80 0 4 4 1 197 gt 80 0 4 l HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 2 5 0 6 1 197 157 0 2 0 3 8 8 i 10 3 Technical Information 10 3 Technical Information Control design Display Program memory Input resolution and display s
39. 30 1 condition WHILE TT noc oag Addition prog Y mach Math Calcul Comparis Free Save Back Yariable variable function operation operator entry term Less than Less or equal Not equal Greater than Greater or equal Equal Logical AND operation Logical OR operation 6 DIN Programming il 6 28 Variables as Address Parameters Select the input parameters see figure to the top right Press Variable prog Press program variable Yariable Select Program variable Enter the variable number Enter a mathematical expression if required Transfer the variable number Math Mathematical function function or Select the Calculating operation see figure to the lower right Calcul operation Save tern Ce Transfer the variable variable calculation as address parameter In the input field the letter V appears The control however transfers the complete variable designation or mathematical expression to the DIN program see figures at right A mathematical expression should be enclosed in brackets example G1 X 3 SIN 30 Z 31 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Machine 2 689 a 29 GO 13 20 30 G61 K 30 BC 3 SINC 31 G1 2 30 32 G25 H 11 15 K5 2 RO 6 W30 FP1 5 33 G1 R20 34 G1 R40 2 35 35 G1 2 55 B4 bi oo _ Linear movement G1 xv A Al B Machine 2 689 28 G42 29 GO X13 20 30 G
40. 9 Examples il Finishing cycle 1 Xx 4 7 ax E T 2 a Z 35 191 Fe S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S 220 m min 0 a 03 B 1750 r min th MANUALplus ing wi ork The three following finishing cycles finish the contour Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back area shown in the graphic p A list loi la tool speed j EnA The expanded mode is used for all finishing cycles so that contour elements such as oblique cuts roundings or chamfers can be machined In expanded mode the tool stops at the end of the cycle This is necessary to be able to finish the contour area in a single cut Finishing cycle 2 Xx 55 a ax 2 l 57 293 az Fie oom S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 220 m min Tes S ccs 293 rain Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back list position tool speed finished HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 465 il Finishing cycle 3 orking with MANUALplus Positioning the tool for tool change Before you can replace the finishing tool by the threading tool you must move It to a safe position Sth Pe CUT 466 9 Examples il Thread cycle x 16 ae DS a l 2 000 E a aa th MANUALplus ing wi ork This cycle produces a single start thread with a thread pitch of 1 5 mm The depth of thread and the proportioning of cuts is calculated automatically by MANUALplus Expanded Re Tool Take over S F from Inner Input Back cut list position tool thread
41. Current parameters menu item cur Para PEJ 2 verete file M nachine direct 2 machine list 2 controt direct 4 cont rot list sljpte 1ist ih rameters Tool measurement MP 6 Machine dimensions MP 7 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 This parameter defines how to determine the tool set up dimensions in setup mode Type of tool measurement 0 Touch oft 1 Touch probe 2 Optical gauge Measuring feed Feed rate for approaching the touch probe Measuring range Measuring range The tool stops when it has traversed to the maximum measuring range without reaching the touch probe Within the framework of variable programming machine dimensions can be used in NC programs Dimension 1 in X mm Dimension 1 in Z mm il Ay rameters Display setting MP 17 Control configuration MP 18 Feed rates MP 204 Thread cutting MP 208 Position of the touch probe or optical gauge MP 211 436 The data is displayed in the Actual value display fields machine window Actual display tyoe the numbers have the following meaning 0 Actual value Following error Distance of traverse Tool tio referenced to machine zero point Slide position Distance between reference cams reference pulse Nominal position Difference between tool tip slide position Nominal IPO position CON OOA OUN gt PLC is to perform counting of workpieces 0 not active 1 activ
42. E N1 Remove the material roughing N2 Position the tool for tool change E N3 Finish machine the workpiece E N4 Position the tool for removing the workpiece 494 9 Examples il 9 4 ICP Example Recessing Cycle This example illustrates the use of an ICP recessing cycle The individual working steps for machining the ICP contour and integrating the contour into ICP cycles are based on the workpiece drawing In the process described below you create an ICP contour description and a cycle program for parts production The machining operation is performed with the ICP recessing radial cycle Required tool Recessing tool Position 14 WO 1 Tool orientation R 0 2 Tool radius K 5 Cutting width Sequence of working steps Clamp a workpiece blank diameter 60 mm length 65 mm Machine setup Define the workpiece zero point Measure the tool dimensions Switch to Teach in mode Enter the positioning cycles for tool change Call the ICP cut radial cycle ICP contour programming Integrate the ICP contour in the recessing finishing cycle HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Q gt Oo O I V N Q or Q z X LLI S il ICP recessing radial The procedure presupposes that the machine has been set up and the control is in Teach in mode The allowances for pre cutting are programmed in the ICP rece
43. Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 Right Left Left Right Right Left Left Right Right Left Or 4 Cycle Programming il Left J 3 Right J 3 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Mx03 Mx04 Left Right 4 8 i Roughing Finishing Roughing Finishing Roughing Roughing Roughing Finishing Roughing Finishing Roughing Roughing Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Climb milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Up cut milling H 1 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 From inside towards outside J 0 From inside towards outside J 0 From outside towards inside J 1 From outside towards inside J 1 From inside towards outside J 0 From inside towards outside J 0 From outside towards inside J 1 From outside towards inside J 1 Mx03 Mx03 Mx04 Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 Mx03 Mx03 Mx04 Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 j i T O 4 8 Millin Examples of milling cycles Milling on the face In this example a pocket is milled The milling example in 9 8 ICP Example Milling Cycle illustrates
44. PCDIRECT directory Path of directory offered and indicated for data transfer with PCDIRECT NETWORK directory Path of directory offered and indicated for data transfer with NETWORK Display type 1 manual control SP 301 With these parameters you can configure your machine display The arrangement of the machine display fields and code numbers of the display symbols are described in the following tables symbol for field 1 Enter the code number of the symbol Slide spindle Enter 0 Component group Enter 0 Symbol for field 2 Field 1 Field 4 Field 7 Field 2 Field 5 Field 8 Field 3 Field 6 Field 9 0 Special code no display 60 Actual nominal Tete Ch value of spindle S a E 1 Actual X position 61 Spindle and speed EAr display x information S Elo oo degr ih rameters HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 439 il Ay rameters Sadeumibeami ire nedin deeem ambe Zo 2 10 Actual value A 124 984 Z 22 492 21 Tool display with 23 440 Actual Z position display Actual C position display Distance to go in Z and protection zone status display displays for X Z and C compensation values DX DZ Additive compensation Distance to go in X ARD oo AZ AC AZ Distance to go in Z Distance to go in C 0 000 TO az D 200 0 000 69 70 31 82 87 91 92 93 99 Slide and feed rate information Actual nominal
45. Pepe penne ei 9 Examples il Contour element 3 The next connecting contour element is an oblique cut Only the angle of the linear element is known MANUALplus displays the symbol for an unsolved element below the graphics window and depicts the unsolved line in gray color for unsolved elements HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 x 62 000 T 1 aston l 2 000 E F il 0 400 mn r S sauicmciea S g 150 m min DUNUAUANENOVOVONONONONOENEVEL 07 Aoo 3 888 degr RS 90 251 1 e W SC foo Angle to Z axis Teach in Toot administration 9200 Tt i 2 2 00 Fe S ya el tr eh S o 150 m min E F i00 3 888 degr 485 9 3 ICP Example Matrix 9 3 ICP Example Matrix Contour element 4 The next connecting contour element is a circular arc whose center and radius are known MANUALplus displays the possible solutions for selection see figure to the bottom right and on the next page to the top right 486 Teach in Toot adninistration Organisation _ x 62 000 T1 fe e 000 Z oe 000 Te F fol 0 400 on r vidii SE o Arc with MP and R gj ects Fah a Save Back Toot adninistration Organisation _ x 62 000 T 1 az 0 000 l 2 000 ao Taj 0 400 nn r n 100 S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 M O ee N ee ee ee ee ee ee Gp z
46. Select Tapered thread He Press the Recut soft key Inner Inner thread soft key thread On Internal thread Off External thread The cycle recuts a single or multi start tapered external or internal thread Since you have already unclamped the workpiece MANUALplus needs to know the exact position of the thread For this place the cutting edge of the tap drill in the center of a groove and transfer the positions to the parameters C and ZC by pressing the Take over position soft key From these values the cycle then calculates the angle of the spindle at the starting point Z Cycle parameters X1 Z1 starting point of thread without run in X2 Z2 end point of thread without run out C measured angle ZC measured position Fl thread pitch feed rate U thread depth No input Depth is calculated External thread U 0 6134 F1 Internal thread U 0 5413 F1 I 1st cutting depth I lt U First cut with cutting depth I further cuts Reduction of cutting depth down to J l U One cut No input Calculation from U and F1 A feed angle default 30 Range 60 lt A lt 60 A lt 0O Infeed on left thread flank A gt 0 Infeed on right thread flank W taper angle Range 60 lt A lt 60 J remaining cutting depth default 1 100 mm 176 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run 1 2 3 A Pre position threading tool to center of thread groove Transfer the tool position ZC and the spindle angle
47. Transfer the program designation Add Start programming the cycle cycle Beispielwerkstueck Program Renunber Change Erase Copy Edit Add Back list text cycle cycle cycle cycle 460 9 Examples il Creating a cycle program The individual cycles for machining workpieces are described below The current working step Is displayed in the workpiece graphic the cycles and the cycle parameters are displayed in the graphics to the right The machine data display indicates the status after execution of the cycle Sequence of working steps for each cycle Select the cycle Program the cycle th MANUALplus Check the cycle by running a graphical simulation gt gt Run the cycle O gt Save the cycle Roughing cycle 1 x 62 on ax T 1 iz 0 000 l 2 000 az Fe S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 150 m min 100 770 r min First insert the roughing tool Finishing Take over S F from Constant Input The cycle machines the area marked in the drawing run J list position S Pe Expanded mode is selected for defining the allowances The starting point X Z is defined such that it is located shortly before the area to be machined It is approached at rapid traverse With roughing cycles the tool returns to the starting point at the end of the cycle HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 461 il Roughing cycle 2 K 55 a ax T 1 20 000 l 2 000 i nal Fig oom S O 20 40 60 80 1001
48. X2 Z2 contour end point P recessing width Infeeds lt P No input P 0 8 cutting width of the tool A starting angle Range 0 lt A lt 90 W end angle Range 0 lt W lt 90 R rounding B1 B2 chamfer rounding B1 contour start B2 contour end B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution I K oversize X Z DX DZ distance to subsequent recess with respect to the preceding recess Q number of recess cycles default 1 By setting the following optional parameters you can define additional contour elements A Oblique cut at contour start W Oblique cut at contour end R Rounding in both corners of the contour valley B1 Chamfer Rounding at contour start B2 Chamfer Rounding at contour end HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 nevessinagre es k il 4 5 Recessiniffvcles Cycle run 1 Calculate the recess positions and the proportioning of cuts 2 Approach workpiece for next recess from starting point or from last recess on paraxial path 3 Move to contour end point X2 or contour end point Z2 or if defined to one of the optional contour elements at programmed teed rate 4 Remain at this position for a dwell time of two revolutions 5 Retract and approach for next pass 6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the complete recess has been machined 7 Repeat 2 to 6 until all recesses have been machined 8 Return to starting point on p
49. Z MP 1166 Misalignment compensation in linear axis X MP 1120 linear axis Z MP 1170 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 If you use tool holders in different quadrants the additional tool holder is defined as mirrored see Tools in different quadrants on page 48 The distance between the additional tool holder and the principal tool holder is usually defined in compensation X Z Compensation in X mm Compensation in Z mm Type of tool holder 0 Standard 1 Mirrored ih rameters Zero point shift M19 The parameter determines the offset in position between the spindle reference point and the reference point of the angle encoder rotary encoder After receiving the reference pulse from the rotary encoder the current actual position is overwritten by the parameter value Number of revolutions for chip breaking Number of additional spindle revolutions for disengaging the tool during spindle stop M5 M19 Angle usually set with Set T S F Speed value VConstant G96 usually set with Set T S F Speed value NConstant G97 usually set with Set T S F Speed limit G26 usually set with Set T S F Configuration parameters The backlash compensation takes into account the value of backlash compensation for every change of direction This enables you to compensate for backlash between the speed encoder and the table when the drive and encoder are connected directly Type of backlash
50. Z 52 001 10 000 mmr 7 fe al raed 100 EEPE AE 20 40 60 80 100120 eee D 5000 r min So E 185 m min 0 043 degr Start point Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back list position tool speed finished 125 cles O 5 O cc gt Roughing and finishing an inside contour ea Sa X 72 002 ne T 1 az 0 000 Z 52 001 az Fe Sm pintutmniniiniitiit 20 40 60 80 ney aR so 165 n min 5000 r min o 0 043 degr _ 22 xf 40 o afo x2 20 22 15 P3 iwawf i oe af 2 ifo 3 ko z a oo sheo rsa ooo Start point T O 4 4 Roughin The shaded area from AP starting point of contour to EP contour end point is first rough machined with the cycle Cut longitudinal Expanded taking Teach in To01 management organization oversizes into account see figure at upper right This a contour area is to be finished subsequently with the X 12 00 ax fo T 1 dz 0 000 cycle Finishing cut longitudinal Expanded see F fol 10 000 mn r 100 figure at lower right Z 52 001 az Pinivnnutnniuininitit 20 40 60 80 vii TT 165 m min 0 The rounding and the chamfer at the contour end are also machined in expanded mode The parameters for contour starting point X1 Z1 and contour end point X2 Z2 determine the cutting and
51. are programming cycles or traversing commands G functions the function and the parameters are illustrated in the graphic support window Place the cursor at the beginning of the block to select block functions HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 2 Editing a leah Insert a new NC block with the next block number below the highlighted lock The Function selection menu can be used to add further NC commands The block at which the cursor is located is deleted The number of the block at which the cursor is located can now be edited o i 6 2 Editing DINA rams Position the cursor on the NC block TOD OOO EEE eee Press Change block no Position the cursor on any NC block UO EE EE EEO Press Change block no Press Renumber Define the block number increment Press Renumber again IE The block number increment you defined is also effective for automatic block numbering 282 6 DIN Programming il Word functions The functions Delete word Change word etc refer to the word at which the cursor is located What is actually deleted or changed Softkeysforwordfunctions depends on the meaning of the word Examples Del The NC command or parameter The cursor is located on a G command word iar a a Change word First the command and then the associated Ee eee parameters can be edited o Pr o or jaa p er word at which the cursor is locate citi alas The command and the associ
52. default 0 gt Q number of spindle default O master spindle gt H reference direction for thread pitch default 3 H 0 Feed rate on the Z axis for longitudinal and taper threads up to a max angle of 45 45 to the Z axis E H 1 Feed rate on the X axis for transverse and taper threads up to a max angle of 45 45 to the X axis m H 3 Contouring feed rate gt E variable pitch default O E E gt 0 Increase the pitch per revolution by E E lt 0 Decrease the pitch per revolution by E C E Cycle STOP becomes effective at the end of a thread Cut Feed rate override is not effective during cycle execution Feed forward control is switched on 338 m x O 3 v D G Ww W 6 DIN Programming il Metric ISO thread G35 G35 cuts a longitudinal thread internal or external thread The thread starts at the current tool position and ends at the end point X Z From the tool position relative to the end point of the thread MANUALplus automatically determines whether an internal or external thread is to be cut Parameters X end point of thread diameter value Z end point of thread F thread pitch default F is determined from the diameter in the standard table see Thread Pitch on page 524 I maximum infeed no input is calculated from the thread pitch and the thread depth gt Q number of air cuts default O after the last cut gt B remai
53. finished Tool positioning The workpiece is completely machined To remove Teach in Tool administration organisation _ the finished workpiece you must move the tool to a a oodi X 16 000 a T3 ie om safe position l 50 000 sz t Fig 0m S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 150 m min mininin 0 O BBD ocx 2985 r min i Fy With Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back return list position tool speed finished HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 467 il Program list The figure to the right shows the resulting cycle ere Tool adninistration organisation Pre AKN dx 0 000 x 16 000 Ax T 3 dz 0 000 l 50 000 A Z F El S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S ry 150 m min DNUUANGNAUVGNAUGOAOUGNONN 0 1oox 3 888 degr Beispieluerkstueck N1 T1 Rap tray positioning H2 T1 Cut longitud E H3 T1 Cut longitud E N4 T1 Cut longitud E NS T1 Cut longitud E H6 T2 Rap tray positioning H T2 Undercut DIN 6 Finishing cut longitud E H9 T2 Finishing cut longitud E H10 T2 Finishing cut longitud E H11 T2 Rap tray positioning H12 T3 Thread cycle H13 T3 Rap tray positioning th MANUALplus ing wi Sn Setup Sunt ene un prsdianynn Progran run Tool administration Organisation The program is simulated in the Program run mode y 16 000 ag T 3 dx 0 000 dz 0 000 Press the Menu key to return to the main menu and 0 400
54. infeed directions in this example internal machining and infeed in negative X axis direction xaf 20 _ A u aee Tool data a Lathe tool for internal machining TE WO 7 Tool orientation sfieo FOS A 93 Tool angle B 55 Point angle Start point Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back list position tool speed finished 126 4 Cycle Programming il Roughing recess clearance with plunge cycle a ce a a X 2 002 s T1 T Z 52 001 2 E Fas ninn tninnininnininninininnin 20 40 60 80 100120 s o G uote 185 m min 0 So D 5000 r min o 0 043 degr T O 4 4 Roughin Start point Finishing Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back run list position tool speed finished The tool to be used cannot plunge at the required angle of 15 The roughing process for the area therefore requires two steps First step The shaded area from AP starting point of contour to EP contour end point is rough machined with the cycle Plunge longitudinal Expanded taking oversizes into account The starting angle A is defined with 15 as specified in the workpiece drawing From the tool parameters MANUALplus automatically calculates the maximum plunging angle that can be achieved with the programmed tool The resulting contour will not be complete and will be reworked in the second step The rounding arcs in the contour valley are also mac
55. program C only To position the workpiece to a defined angle use G110 C Define the contour starting point or end point either in polar or Cartesian coordinates Permitted as machining command only for G100 Parameter Z m x O D G mh 360 6 DIN Programming il Linear segment face G101 O Geometry command G101 defines a linear segment in a contour on the face Machining command The tool moves on a linear path at feed rate to the end point Parameters X end point diameter value C end angle for angle direction see graphic support window XK end point Cartesian coordinates YK end point Cartesian coordinates Z end point A angle to positive XK axis Q point of intersection default Q 0 If entered data permit two possible solutions for the end point O defines the end point Example G101 B chamfer rounding arc Transition to the next contour element When entering a chamfer rounding program the theoretical end point of the contour element B no input Tangential transition B 0 No tangential transition B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer Z end point T Ti N CS Define the end point either in polar or Cartesian coordinates Permitted as geometry command only for G101 Parameters O B Permitted as machining command only for G101 Parameter Z HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 36 Q O
56. the last active ICP contour number is transferred to the cycle For copying or deleting ICP contours see Program Management on page 75 Edit Press Edit ICP ICP Define a new ICP contour number or select an existing ICP contour number Press Select You can now use the ICP editor to enter a new contour or display the selected existing contour for subsequent editing HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in Toot management organization X 12 00 AK fo Se T 1 E 0 000 Z 52 00 AZ po HI F fel eer enna 0 m min ee D 5000 r min r SE o 043 0 043 degr ICP cut longitud EALA 2 52 001 O K n 9000 im sftes Fo Start point Teach in 70 002 aooo T4 Som Z 52 001 FE e 185 m min Oooo Si oo D 5000 r min e SE 0 043 degr Select ICP contours ICP Beispiel Gewindezapfen ICP Beispiel Matritze ICP contour AUE 243 5 2 Editing ICP i 5 2 Editing ICP tours Programming and adding to ICP contours After selecting a contour element you enter the known parameters MANUALplus automatically calculates parameters that have not been defined from the adjoining contour elements You can usually program the contour elements with the dimensions given in the production drawing You can toggle between the lines and arcs menus by soft key Form elements chamfers roundings and undercuts are selec
57. 0 Infeed on left thread flank A gt 0O Infeed on right thread flank W taper angle Range 45 lt W lt 45 WE run out angle Range 0 lt WE lt 90 J remaining cutting depth default 1 100 mm 178 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run 1 2 3 A Pre position threading tool to center of thread groove Transfer the tool position ZC and the spindle angle C with Take over position Move the tool manually out of the thread groove Position the tool in front of the workpiece Start cycle with Input finished then press Cycle START HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 6 Thread and neereumgre es k il 4 6 Thread and Undercullfilctes Undercut DIN 76 Call the thread cutting menu Select the Undercut DIN 76 cycle With With return soft key Off When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position see figures at right On Tool returns to the starting point see figures on next page The cycle machines a thread undercut according to DIN76 a thread chamfer then the cylinder and finishes with the plane surface The thread chamfer is executed when you enter at least one of the parameters B or RB Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 starting point of cylinder X2 Z2 end point on plane surface FP thread pitch default Value from standard table E reduced feed rate for the plunge cut and the thread chamfer default Feed rate F T tool numbe
58. 00 S 328 6 DIN Programming il Recessing finishing axial G867 radial G868 The cycles axially radially finish the contour area described by the tool position and X Z Tool position at the end of the cycle Cycle starting point Parameters X base corner X diameter value Z base corner Z E finishing feed default Active feed rate Note on the execution of the cycle Tool position at the end of the cycle Cycle starting point KE Cutting radius compensation Active HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 32 m m X x O O 3 3 cs D G G 00 O0 D 60 NI co a 6 13 Neves Cycles 6 13 neces Cycles Simple recessing cycle G86 G86 machines simple radial axial inside and outside recesses with chamfers From the tool orientation the control determines the type of recess radial axial inside outside see Lathe tools on page 419 Parameters X base corner X diameter value Z base corner Z I oversize Radial recess Oversize for precutting Axial recess Recess width no input A single cut is machined recess width tool width K width Radial recess Recess width no input A single cut is machined recess width tool width E Axial recess Oversize for precutting gt E dwell time for finishing default length of time for one revolution Note on the execution of the cycle E f you program an oversize the contro
59. 4 Cycle Programming il Slot axial Call the milling menu Select the Slot axial cycle This cycle mills a slot on the face of the workpiece The slot width equals the diameter of the milling cutter Cycle parameters X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle C1 angle of slot target point default Spindle angle C X1 slot target point in X diameter value Z1 milling top edge default Starting point Z Z2 milling floor L slot length A angle to X axis default 0 P infeed depth default Total depth in one infeed FZ infeed rate default Active feed rate T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Parameter combinations for the position and orientation of the slot See graphic support window Cycle run 1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid traverse only in Teach in mode Calculate the proportioning of cuts Approach to safety clearance Approach at infeed rate FZ Machine to end point of slot Approach at infeed rate FZ Machine to starting point of slot Repeat 4 to 7 until the milling depth is reached Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis O ON OD OF BP W N HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 8 Millin i il T O 4 8 Millin Figure axial Call the milling menu Select the Figure axial cycle Depending on the parameters the cycle mills one of
60. 5 Recessinffvcles Recess turning radial axial Call the recessing menu select the Recess turning cycle Select the Recess turning radial cycle see figures at right Select Recess turning axial see figures on the following page The cycle machines the rectangular area defined by X Z and X2 Z2 see also Recess turning on page 143 Cycle parameters X Z starting point X2 Z2 contour end point P infeed depth Maximum infeed depth 0 recessing feed rate default Active feed rate B offset width default 0 U unidirectional turning default O U 0 bidirectional U 1 unidirectional direction see graphic support window tool number spindle speed cutting speed feed per revolution T N 144 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run Calculate the proportioning of cuts Approach workpiece for first pass from X Z Execute the first cut recessing Machine perpendicularly to recessing direction turning Repeat 3 to 4 until contour end point Z2 X2 is reached Return to starting point on paraxial path ona fF WN HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 Nevessinggye es b i 4 5 Recessinffvcles Recess turning radial axial Expanded Call the recessing menu select the Recess turning cycle Select the Recess turning radial cycle see figures at right Select Recess turning axial see figures on the following page Press the Expanded so
61. 5 Simple Linear and Circular Movements Linear path G1 Geometry command G1 defines a linear segment in a contour Machining command The tool moves on a linear path at feed rate to the end point X Z Parameters gt X end point diameter value Z end point A angle for angle direction see graphic support window gt B chamfer rounding At the end of the linear path you can program a chamfer rounding or a tangential transition to the next contour element E No entry Tangential transition E B 0 No tangential transition E B gt 0 Radius of rounding E B lt 0 Width of chamfer E special feed rate for chamfer rounding default Active feed rate gt Q point of intersection default Q 0 Specifies the end point if two solutions are possible see graphic support window 292 6 DIN Programming il Circular path G2 G3 incremental center coordinates Geometry command G2 G3 defines a circular arc in a contour Machining command The tool moves on a circular arc at feed rate to the end point The direction of rotation is shown in the graphic support window e i Q a ol V I HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 293 il vements 6 5 Simple Linear and Circular Parameters G2 G3 gt X end point diameter value Z end point gt R radius I center point incremental distance from starting point to center point diameter value g
62. C with Take over position Move the tool manually out of the thread groove Position the tool in front of the workpiece Start cycle with Input finished then press Cycle START HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 6 Thread and neereumgre es k il 4 6 Thread and Undercullfilctes Recut API thread Call the thread cutting menu Select API thread Re Press the Recut soft key cut Inner Inner thread soft key thread On Internal thread Off External thread The cycle recuts a single or multi start API external or internal thread Since you have already unclamped the workpiece MANUALplus needs to know the exact position of the thread For this place the cutting edge of the tap drill in the center of a groove and transfer the positions to the parameters C and ZC by pressing the Take over position soft key From these values the cycle then calculates the angle of the spindle at the starting point Z Cycle parameters X1 Z1 starting point of thread without run in X2 Z2 end point of thread without run out C measured angle ZC measured position F1 thread pitch feed rate U thread depth No input Depth is calculated External thread U 0 6134 F1 Internal thread U 0 5413 F1 I 1st cutting depth I lt U First cut with cutting depth I further cuts Reduction of cutting depth down to J I U One cut No input Calculation from U and F1 A feed angle default 30 Range 60 lt A lt 60 A lt
63. F oc 0 400 mn r 150 m min 100 3 888 degr S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 M O ee N ee ee ee ee ee ee Gp 9 Examples il To transfer the correct solution press Select solution The preceding circular arc and the oblique cut are now unambiguously defined MANUALplus draws the contour elements and clears the symbols for the unsolved elements The rough contour has been completely defined You can now exit the input mode with Back HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in x 62 00 1 sm l 2 000 az2t F fel 0 400 mm r E S g l 150 m min MROOOCAOOROOOOCOOROOOODMANIMINI OD 100 3 888 degr Teach in R 62 000 a T4 gom l 2 000 kal Fa 0 400 mn r 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S g 150 m min 0 1 100 3 886 degr a a a ee a ee ee ee 489 9 3 ICP Example Matrix 9 3 ICP Example Matrix Rounding the corners The rounding arcs are superimposed on the existing contour This is done by selecting the individual contour corners and defining the corresponding rounding radii You call the function for superimposing elements with the superposition soft key represented by a symbol see figure at upper right You can then select the position of the rounding with Previous corner Next corner see figure at lower right 490 Teach in x 62 000 Zo 2 000 S T 1 is F OR 0 400 on r 150 m min
64. I K is not programmed After the cycle has been executed the oversizes are canceled Safety clearance after each step Parameter Current parameters Machining Safety distances att Danger of collision If the tool angle and the tool point angle have not been defined the tool plunge cuts at the plunging angle If the tool and point angles have been defined the tool plunge cuts at the maximum possible plunging angle In this case the resulting contour will not be completely finished and may need to be reworked 316 6 DIN Programming il Contour parallel roughing G836 G836 machines the workpiece sections parallel to the contour The starting point of the contour is defined either in the cycle with X Z or in the GO block after the cycle call The blocks following G836 describe the contour area G80 concludes the contour description Parameters X starting point diameter value Z starting point gt P maximum infeed The infeed depth is determined taking J into account The proportioning of cuts is calculated so that an abrasive cut is avoided E J 0 P is the maximum infeed depth The cycle reduces the infeed depth if the programmed infeed is not possible in the transverse or longitudinal direction due to the cutting geometry E J gt 0 P is the infeed depth This infeed is used in the longitudinal and transverse directions gt I oversize X diameter value default O gt K oversize Z defaul
65. MANUALplus differentiates between the following operating modes Machine with the submodes Manual mode display Machine Teach in Program run Tool administration tool management Organization You can switch between the different operating modes using the Process key Press the Process key once to activate the operating mode bar Select the desired mode of operation using the arrow keys and press the Process key again to activate It CS The Process key can only be used when the main menu of the current operating mode Is active You reach the main menu with Back or with the Menu key Menu selection The numerical keypad is used for activating a menu and for entering data The menu items are presented as a 9 field box Each field of this symbol corresponds to the numerical key that is located at the same position on the numerical keypad The functions cycles tools etc are displayed as symbols The meaning of the selected symbol menu item is described in the footer Press the corresponding numerical key or move the highlight with the arrow keys to the symbol on the screen and press the ENTER key Soft keys With some system functions the available functions are arranged on several soft key levels Some soft keys work like toggle switches A function Is active when the associated field in the soft key row is highlighted in color The setting remains in effect until the function is disabled again With funct
66. NC program several G functions include the interpreter stop 400 Slide 1 X Z C axis V901 V902 V919 6 DIN Programming il 6 27 Program Branches Program Repeats IF conditional program branch a Enter the variable condition see figure to the top right Press Program variable function Select Conditional program branch You can use both Mathematical functions and Calculating operations in the same mathematical expression The mathematical functions are arranged on two menu levels To switch to the next menu level press gt gt The condition includes a variable or mathematical expression on either side of the relational operator see figure to the top right A conditional branch consists of the elements F followed by a condition comparison THEN if the condition is fulfilled the THEN branch is executed ELSE if the condition is not fulfilled the ELSE branch is executed ENDIF concludes the conditional program branch After entering the conditional program branch program the NC blocks to be executed The ELSE branch can be omitted HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Machine 74 G96 5150 M3 75 T2 si 76 GO X60 2 70 77 GO X62 250 78 697 S800 695 FO 4 T3 79 GO X16 22 80 G350 2 29 F1 5 U 999 81 F 30 31 100 SINC30 a 82 THEN E IF Yariable condition 30 31 100 SINC 30 lt Less
67. O0 The compensation values defined with G148 remain in effect until the next T command or the end of the program Before you can use G148 you must assign the compensation values DX DZ and DS to the cutting edges of the recessing tool tip with the tool orientation function see Recessing and recess turning tools on page 421 Parameters 0 selection default 0 O 0 DX DZ active DS Inactive E O 1 DS DZ active DxX inactive E O 2 DX DS active DZ Inactive 6 8 compensati Values m x O D G om f gt 00 C The recessing cycles G861 to G868 automatically take the correct wear compensation into account 302 6 DIN Programming il Additive compensation G149 MANUALplus manages 16 tool independent compensation values which are assigned the designations D901 to D916 These compensation values are added to the active wear compensation values of the tools Additive compensations are effective from the block in which they are programmed with G149 and remain in effect up to the E Next G149 D900 Next tool change Program end Parameters D additive compensation default D900 D900 deactivates the additive compensation D901 to D916 activates the additive compensation HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 8 compensata Values m x DQ 3 2 o G A j i 6 8 compensati Values Compensation of right hand tool nose G150 Com
68. Select Recessing axial See figures on the following page Press the Expanded soft key Press the Finishing run soft key Finishing run The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in Q The parameters X Z to X2 Z2 define the first recess position recess depth and recess width Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour starting point X2 Z2 contour end point A starting angle Range 0 lt A lt 90 W end angle Range 0 lt W lt 90 R rounding B1 B2 chamfer rounding B1 contour start B2 contour end B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution DX DZ distance to subsequent recess with respect to the preceding recess Q number of recess cycles default 1 By setting the following optional parameters you can define additional contour elements A Oblique cut at contour start W Oblique cut at contour end R Rounding in both corners of the contour valley B1 Chamfer Rounding at contour start B2 Chamfer Rounding at contour end HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 nevessinagre es o il 45 Recessingfiljcles Cycle run 1 Calculate the recess positions 2 Approach workpiece for next recess from starting point or from last recess on paraxial path 3 Finish first side taking optional contour elements into account then finish contour valley up to position just before recess end
69. With On Tool returns to the cycle start point q Off Tool remains at cycle end position a Pattern Linear hole pattern on face or lateral surface linear Pattern Circular hole pattern on face or lateral surface circular Re On Rework existing thread cut Off Cut new thread Last Repeat the last thread cut cut Taal Call the Tool list You can transfer the T number from et the tool list Take over ransfer the actual position X Z position amp fron ansfer the spindle speed and feed rate from the tool i tool data Constant On Constant speed rpm speed Off Constant cutting speed m min Tae On Internal thread thread Off External thread Input Transfer entered changed values finished Back Cancel the current dialog ae 4 Cycle Programming il 4 2 Workpiece Blank Cycles The workpiece blank cycles describe the workpiece blank and the setup used The workpiece blank cycles do not influence the machining process This information is evaluated during the simulation of the machining process HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 x 72 002 T4 ew Z 52 001 Fre 0 20 40 60 80 100120 enna cz 185 m min 0 a ar Blank bar tube Define the standard blank ICP workpc blank contour Define workpiece blank contours with ICP 4 2 Workpiece on 4 2 Workpiece sian cles Blank bar tube Select the function for defining a workpiece blank Select Blank
70. X Compensation 902 in Z Rapid traverse contouring speed for manual control Feed rate contouring speed for manual control usually set with SER aF Feed per revolution for manual control Feed rate for rapid traverse in X Feed rate for rapid traverse in Z 8 Organization Mode of Operation il Speeds 2 For spindle 1 main spindle and spindle 2 driven tool Zero point shift M19 The parameter determines the offset in position between the spindle reference point and the reference point of the angle encoder rotary encoder After receiving the reference pulse from the rotary encoder the current actual position is overwritten by the parameter value Number of revolutions for chip breaking Number of additional spindle revolutions for disengaging the tool during spindle stop M5 M19 Angle usually set with Set T S F Speed value VConstant G96 usually set with Set T S F Speed value NConstant G97 usually set with Set T S F Speed limit G26 usually set with Set T S F NC switches 3 menu item Display type 1 The data is displayed in the Actual value display fields machine window Actual display type the numbers have the following meaning 0 Actual value Following error Distance of traverse Tool tip referenced to machine zero point Slide position Distance between reference cams reference pulse Nominal position Difference between tool tip slide position
71. a 3 9 Graphic Views Machining operations with traversable spindle or a C axis can be controlled in the face view or surface view under Extra functions The Lathe Face or Surface view can be displayed as an alternative Lathe view Representation in the X Z plane Face view Representation in the XK YK plane The coordinate system Is based on Cartesian coordinates The origin is located in the turning center with the angle C 0 positioned on the positive XK axis see figure at top right Surface view Representation of the unrolled lateral surface Z CY plane The coordinate system is based on Cartesian coordinates The horizontal line gives the Z axis the vertical line the CY axis coordinates see figure at bottom right The upper and lower lines of this workpiece correspond to the angular positions C 180 180 respectively All drilling and milling operations are within the range 180 to 180 Cycle program or DIN program Workpiece simulation is based on the parameter values for standard blank Current parameters Graphic parameters Standard blank Individual cycle or Teach in Workpiece simulation is based on the workpiece section defined by the respective cycle expansion in Z and limiting diameter X ce The soft keys Face view Surface view are only available when a cycle cycle program with drilling milling functions or a DIN program is active You can check the depth of
72. are referenced to the zero point of the C axis see bottom right figure Positions can be programmed to an accuracy of 1 um 0 001 mm This is also the accuracy with which they are displayed HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 1 4 Axis Designations and Coordinate i 1 4 Axis Designations and Coordinate syst Absolute coordinates If the coordinates of a position are referenced to the workpiece zero point they are referred to as absolute coordinates Each position on a workpiece is clearly defined by its absolute coordinates see figure at Upper right Incremental coordinates Incremental coordinates are always referenced to the last programmed position They specify the distance from the last active position and the subsequent position Each position on a workpiece is clearly defined by its incremental coordinates see figure at center right Polar coordinates Positions located on the face or lateral surface can either be entered in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates When programming with polar coordinates a position on the workpiece is clearly defined by the entries for diameter and angle see figure at bottom right 26 1 Introduction and Fundamentals il 1 5 Machine Reference Points Machine zero point The point of intersection of the X and Z axes is called the machine zero point On a lathe the machine zero point is usually the point of intersection of the spindle axis and the spin
73. arrow keys These functions are always available during simulation With operation 1 you can isolate and display a precise detail while operation 2 allows you to pan magnify or reduce the graphic spontaneously It may require several steps until the desired detail is displayed in the correct size HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 X 2 002 a T 1 az 0 000 FE 10 000 mn r 0 S ol 185 m min 1 100 0 043 degr 2 a amp 0 20 40 60 80 100120 a ee ee ee ee a D 5000 r min G36 3 9 Graphic 36 815 2 else Q Jend PL 3 10 Time Calculation c a a During simulation the machining and idle machine times are calculated MANUALplus shows the machining times under the menu item Extra functions Process times machining times The machining times idle times and total times are shown in the table Time calculation green machining times yellow idle times If you are working with cycle programs each cycle is shown in a separate line In DIN programs each line represents the use of a new tool for each tool call with T If there are more table entries than fit on a screen page you can call further time data with the arrow keys and PgUp PgDn The arrow symbols in the title bar indicate that more entries are available 3 10 Time Ca It is also possible to print the time calculation 74 Program run Toot management organization X 72
74. at programmed feed rate Depending on algebraic sign of P P gt 0 Machine contour outline P lt 0O Retract at angle of 45 Retract and approach for next pass Repeat steps 3 to 5 until X1 or Z1 Is reached Return to starting point on paraxial path 4 Cycle Programming il Finishing cut longitudinal transverse Call the Roughing longitudinal transverse cycles Select Cut longitudinal see figures at right Select Cut transverse see figures on the following page Finishing Press the Finishing run soft key run The cycle Finishing cut longitudinal finishes the contour area from X1 to Z2 The cycle Finishing cut transverse finishes the contour area from Z1 to X2 At the end of cycle the tool returns to the starting point Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 contour starting point finishing cut longitudinal Z2 end point of contour finishing longitudinal Z1 contour starting point finishing transverse X2 end point of contour finishing transverse T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Execution of Finishing cut longitudinal cycle 1 Move in transverse direction from X Z to contour starting point X1 2 Finish first in longitudinal direction then in transverse direction 3 Return in longitudinal direction to starting point HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 4 Roughin o il Execution of Finishi
75. be edited element Previous element Change Display the contour element for editing Make the changes ver Transfer the changes write The contour or if applicable the possible solutions are displayed for inspection With form elements and unsolved elements the changes are transferred immediately Celect Transfer the desired solution solution N 54 5 ICP Programming il Editing an unsolved contour element If a contour contains unsolved contour elements the solved elements cannot be changed You can however set or delete the tangential transition for the contour element located directly before the unsolved contour area ce If the element to be edited is an unsolved element the associated symbol is marked selected The element type and the direction of rotation of a circular arc cannot be changed Should it be necessary to change the element type direction of rotation you must delete the contour element and then add it again HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 255 5 4 Programming Changes to ICP 5 4 Programming Changes to ICP BB tours Shifting a contour You can shift a contour if it is not at the desired position Select a suitable contour element reference element For shifting you enter the new position of the starting point of the reference element he entire contour is shifted when function is completed Change Press Change element a contour element elemen
76. be programmed in the block containing G41 G42 or after the block containing G41 G42 m The TRC MCRC is taken into account from the next path of traverse G41 Internal machining with traverse in negative Z direction compensation of the tool tip cutter radius to the left of the contour in traverse direction G42 External machining with traverse in negative Z direction compensation of the tool tip cutter radius to the right of the contour in traverse direction Parameters gt Q plane default 0 m Q 0 TRC on the turning plane XZ plane m Q 1 MCRC on the face XC plane m Q 2 MCRC on the lateral surface ZC plane gt H output default 0 m H 0 Intersecting areas which are programmed in directly successive contour elements are not machined m H 1 The complete contour is machined even if certain areas are intersecting 0 feed rate reduction default 0 O 0 Feed rate reduction active E O 1 No feed rate reduction HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 L LA m x lt 9 D Q A Q Q p gt N 30 6 7 Tool Tip Milling Cutter Radius i aiii 6 8 Compensation Values Changing the cutter compensation G148 MANUALplus manages three wear compensation values for recessing tools DX DZ and DS The parameter O allows you to define which wear compensation values are to be taken into account DX DZ become effective after program start and after a T command G148
77. called DIN programming MANUALplus supports DIN programs and DIN macros DIN programs are independent NC programs In other words they contain all traversing and switching commands that are necessary for producing the desired workpiece DIN macros are integrated into cycle programs They are not independent but only define a specific machining operation within a cycle program How you apply DIN macros depends entirely on the job at hand DIN macros use the complete range of commands that are available for DIN programs A distinction between programs and macros is not necessary in this chapter They are therefore simply referred to as DIN programs or NC programs Test running DIN programs and DIN macros You can test DIN programs and DIN macros with the graphic simulation function With DIN macros this feature is available in the cycle programming mode With DIN programs you switch to the Program run mode and call the simulation function Help graphics The functionalities and parameters of the traverse commands and cycles are illustrated in the graphic support window These graphics usually show an external machining operation The Circle key allows you to switch to the help graphics for internal machining and to switch between the help graphics ww for internal and external machining 1 Notes on the elements used in the graphic support window Broken line Rapid traverse path Continuous line Feed path
78. closed contour Inside milling Q 1 open contour Left in machining direction Q 2 closed contour Outside milling Q 2 open contour Right in machining direction Q 3 open contour Milling location depends on H and the direction of tool rotation see graphic support window Pocket milling U gt 0 Q 0 From the inside toward the outside O 1 From the outside toward the inside So roughing finishing default O O 0 Roughing O 1 Finishing tirst the edge of the pocket is machined then the pocket floor is machined Notes Milling depth The cycle calculates the depth trom Z and ZE taking the oversizes into account Milling cutter radius compensation effective except for contour milling with Q 0 Approach and departure For closed contours the point of the surface normal from the tool position to the first contour element is the point of approach and departure If no surface normal intersects the tool position the starting point of the first element is the point of approach and departure For contour milling and finishing pocket milling define with R whether the tool is to approach directly or in an arc Oversizes are taken into account if I K are not programmed G57 Oversize in X Z direction G58 The oversize expands or contracts the contour to be milled depending on your definition of the cycle type The outside milling cycle type expands the contour For open con
79. contour starting point X1 Z1 2 Move in circular arc to contour end point X2 Z2 at programmed teed rate 3 Retract and return to starting point on paraxial path 94 4 Cycle Programming Chamfer Call the single cut menu Select the Chamfer cycle With With return soft key return Off When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position On Tool returns to the starting point Chamfer The cycle produces a chamfer that is dimensioned relative to the corner of the workpiece contour When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position Contour chamfer With return The tool approaches the workpiece machines the chamfer that is dimensioned relative to the corner of the workpiece contour and returns to the starting point at the end of cycle Cutter radius compensation is taken into account see figures at right Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour corner A starting angle Angle of the chamfer range 0 lt A lt 90 I K chamfer width in X Z J element position see graphic support window default 1 Position is relative to X1 Z1 Algebraic sign determines cutting direction T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Parameter combinations for defining the chamfer 45 chamfer K 45 chamfer I K LA K A Cycle run if With return is active 1 Calculate starting point and end point of chamfer
80. data Graphic The simulation is resumed Continue Switch on machining simulation Switch to the soft key row with the soft keys for extra functions Extra func BAe On The tool paths are displayed in the cutting path graphics Off The tool paths are displayed in the wire frame graphics Track Clide On The tool tip is displayed Off The light dot represents the tool tip Displays the workpiece blank contour if programmed in Teach in mode and the contours defined in every cycle from the beginning of the program to the cursor position HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 71 il Contour yieu Displays beneath the graphics window Field N Block number of the simulated block Fields X and Z Target coordinates of the simulated rapid traverse or feed path Field C 2 a as Field T Simulated tool programmed T number Input box For cycle programs the cycle designation and the parameters are displayed 3 9 Graphic Warnings The simulation feature checks cycle and DIN programs Warnings that have occurred are displayed with the soft key to the extreme left see Error Messages on page 36 To read the warnings press the soft key 72 Spindle angle for positioned spindle M19 or C axis Process times Face ieU Surface ieu Call the Time calculation see Time Calculation on page 74 Switch to Face view if you have programmed drilling milling cycles
81. data defined in the subsequent blocks see Contour definition on page 310 Parameters P recessing width P is not defined Infeeds lt 0 8 cutting width of tool P is defined Infeeds lt P oversize X default 0 oversize Z default 0 roughing finishing Q 0 Only roughing Q 1 The recess is first rough machined with consideration of the oversizes and then finish machined at finishing feed E O AW m finishing feed default Active feed rate 324 6 DIN Programming il Note on the execution of the cycle E MANUALplus determines the cutting direction from the current tool position relative to the starting point end point of the contour area E Tool position at the end of the cycle Cycle starting point _ Cutting radius compensation Active G57 G58 oversizes are taken into account if I K is not programmed After the cycle has been executed the oversizes are canceled HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 32 m m x x 3 3 3 3 R G G 00 00 N Ol 6 13 Neves Cycles 6 13 Recessing Cycles Contour recessing cycle finishing axial G863 radial G864 The cycles axially radially finish the contour area defined in the subsequent blocks see Contour definition on page 310 Parameters E finishing feed rate 326 6 DIN Programming il Note on the execution of the cycle E Tool position at the end of the c
82. deleting and adding to parameters commands etc within programs tool data or parameters Default value f the parameters of cycles or DIN commands are preassigned values these values are referred to as default values These values are used if you do not enter the parameters Byte he capacity of a storage disk is indicated in bytes Since MANUALplus features a hard disk the individual program lengths are expressed in bytes Extension File names consist of the actual name and the extension The name part and the extension part are separated by The extension indicates the type of file Examples NC DIN programs NCS DIN subprograms DIN macros MAS Machine parameters HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 2 4 Explanation ie 3 1 Machine Mode of Pe ation 3 1 Machine Mode of Operation The Machine mode of operation includes all functions for machine setup workpiece machining and cycle and DIN program definition Machine setup For preparations like setting axis values defining workpiece zero point measuring tools or setting the protection zone Manual operation Machine a workpiece manually or semi automatically Teach in Teach in a new cycle program change an existing program or graphically simulate cycles DIN programming Creating editing deleting DIN programs Program run Graphically simulate existing cycle programs or DIN programs and use them for the production of parts With MA
83. displayed in the input window The soft keys allow you to influence the program run see table 64 Single block Tool fAdd correct D Base blocks Program start ai Select cycle program or DIN program see Program Management on page 75 Cycle program On Cycles are run continuously one after the other up to the next tool change Off MANUALplus stops after each cycle To start the subsequent cycle press Cycle START DIN program On Program execution without any interruption Off Stop before command M01 On MANUALplus stops after each traverse To Start the next path of traverse press Cycle START Recommendation Single block should be used together with the basic block display Off Cycles DIN commands are executed without any interruption Input of tool compensation values or additive correction values Switch the graphic simulation on On The traversing and switching commands are shown in DIN format base blocks Off Cycle or DIN program is displayed The cursor returns to the first block of the cycle program or DIN program 3 Machine Mode of Operation il Entering compensation values during program execution Compensation values can be entered during program execution Entered values are added to the existing compensation values and are effective immediately Ce 3 8 Program Mode Tool Add Activate the tool compensation correct Too
84. figure at right for dimensioning with WO 1 and WO z2 neutral button tool 420 7 Tool Management Mode il Recessing and recess turning tools gt Tool parameters Select recessing tools X setup dimension in X Z setup dimension in Z R cutting radius WO tool orientation For code number see graphic support window K cutting width DX wear compensation in X Range 100mm lt DX lt 100mm DZ wear compensation in Z Range 100mm lt DZ lt 100mm DS special compensation Range 100mm lt DS lt 100mm Q tool text Reference to tool text MD direction of rotation default Not defined 3 M3 4 M4 TS cutting spindle speed default Not defined TF feed rate default Not defined PT tool 1ife default Not defined RT Display field for remaining tool life PZ quantity default Not defined RZ Display field for remaining quantity Ce With recessing tools you define the position of the reference point with tool orientation WO DX DZ compensate for wear on the two sides of the tool tip that lie next to the reference point DS compensates for wear on the third side of the tool tip see figure at right The cutting width K is evaluated if the corresponding parameter is not defined in the recessing cycle HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 i Data S il Thread cutting tools Select thread cutting tools Tool parameters X setup dimension in X Z setup dimension in Z WO tool orientati
85. finishing E aE 2 38 xi 8an zaf3s s5 o 2 60 8 z2 52 5 anes una afo 5 BI Baf o maono 5 160 Ff 3 Start point Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back list position tool speed finished 4 Cycle Programming il Recess inside The machining operation is to be executed with the Recessing radial Expanded cycle taking oversizes into account see figure at upper right This contour area is to be finished subsequently with the Recessing radial finishing Expanded cycle see figure at lower right As the plunge width P is not input the MANUALplus plunge cuts with 80 of the plunge width of the tool In expanded mode the chamfers are machined at the start end of the contour Be sure to enter the correct values for the parameters contour starting point X1 Z1 and contour end point X2 Z2 These parameters determine the cutting and inteed directions in this example internal machining and infeed in negative Z axis direction Tool data Lathe tool for internal machining WO 7 Tool orientation K 2 Cutting width 2 mm HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 shanties Toot management organization X 72 0024 T1 Som Z 52 001 i L F i 10 000 mn r SR S Se 1j 0 5 B2j 0 5 T 36 5 160 F 0 3 Start point ee Toot management organization X 72 0026 ss stT1 so am Z 52 001 az m F E 10 000 mmr
86. for the face Switch to Surface view if you have programmed drilling milling cycles for the cylindrical surface 3 Machine Mode of Operation il Magnify Reduce With cycle programs the simulation feature selects the area to be simulated in such a way that all paths of traverse can be illustrated With DIN programs and DIN macros the area to be simulated is taken from Current parameters Graphic parameters Standard window size Standard blank This is also the case for the face and lateral surface views MANUALplus offers two menu options one for magnifying and reducing the displayed graphic and one for isolating a detail 1 When you press Zoom a red frame appears on the screen with which you can select the detail you wish to isolate The frame is moved with the arrow keys enlarged with PgUp and reduced with PgDn To display the selected detail opress Take over The following functions also exist Extend view By reducing the size of the workpiece a larger area of the working space can be displayed You can use this function if you would like to isolate an area of the workpiece with the red frame which is not displayed in the graphics window Zoom off All defined contour areas the workpiece and the paths of traverse are shown as large as possible Last zoom Return to the last setting of Zoom 2 You can magnity reduce the displayed graphics with the PgUp PgDn keys and pan the detail with the
87. for the height and width of the screen and may even enlarge the window size in the vertical or horizontal direction Minimum X coordinate smallest X coordinate displayed Minimum Z coordinate smallest Z coordinate displayed Delta X vertical expansion Delta Z horizontal expansion These parameters define the standard workpiece blank and are used for calculating the unrolled lateral surface Outside diameter The unrolled lateral surface is calculated from the diameter Length of blank Horizontal dimension of unrolled lateral Surface Right edge of blank part Position of the unrolled lateral surface relative to the coordinate origin If you enter a positive value the right blank edge is located to the right of the coordinate origin Inside diameter non functional 8 Organization Mode of Operation il Simulation Settings SP 27 The machining simulation is delayed by the path delay time after the path has been simulated graphically The simulation speed can thus be influenced Path delay Allocation to interfaces SP 40 MANUALplus stores the settings of the serial interface in these Interface 1 SP 41 parameters The parameters are usually defined in Transter Interface 2 SP 42 Settings see Settings in the Serial and Printer modes on page 445 Transfer directory SP 48 The parameters are usually defined in Transfer Settings see Settings in Network mode on page 444
88. hole drilling axial cycle a D LL Select the Deep hole drilling radial cycle The cycle produces a bore hole on the face lateral surface in several passes After each pass the drill retracts and after a dwell time advances again to the first pecking depth minus the safety clearance You define the first pass with 1st hole depth P MANUALplus then automatically reduces the drilling depth with each subsequent pass by the reducing value IB however without falling below the minimum drilling depth JB Cycle parameters X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle P 1st hole depth default Hole will be drilled in one pass IB hole depth reduction value default O JB minimum hole depth default 1 10 of P B return length default Retract to starting point of hole T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution E dwell time for chip breaking at end of hole default O AB drilling lengths default O V drilling variants default O 0 No feed rate reduction 1 Feed reduction for through boring 2 Feed reduction for pre drilling 3 Feed reduction for pre drilling and through boring D retreat retraction speed and infeed within the hole default O 0 Rapid traverse 1 Feed rate Drilling axial Z1 starting point of hole default Drilling starts from position Z Z2 end point of hole HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 7 Drill
89. i a O Ti N e Contour and figure milling cycle face G793 G793 mills figures or open or closed independent contours on the face G793 is followed by E The figure to be milled with E Circle G304 rectangle G305 or polygon G307 E Conclusion of milling contour G80 E The independent contour with E Starting point of milling contour G100 E Milling contour G101 G102 G103 Conclusion of milling contour G80 Parameters gt Z milling top edge ZE milling floor gt P maximum infeed default Total depth in one infeed gt U overlap factor Machining of contour or pocket default 0 U 0 Contour milling E U gt 0 Pocket milling minimum overlap of milling paths U milling diameter gt R approaching radius Radius of approaching departing arc default 0 E R 0 Contour element is approached directly feed to starting point above the milling plane then vertical plunge R gt 0 Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0O for inside corners Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0O for outside corners Length of linear approaching departing element contour element is approached departed tangentially I oversize contour parallel gt K oversize Z in infeed direction F feed rate for infeed default Active feed rate E reduced feed rate fo
90. i 100x 3 888 degr xA o zj o Hfaaa o TRO o o 5 220 Ff0o2 Start pt Edit Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back ICP list position tool speed finished Example Threaded Stud N i il Example Threaded Stud Checking the ICP finishing cycle With the graphic simulation function you can check the execution of the ICP finishing cycle Graphics soft key You can then transfer the cycle to the cycle program with the Save or Overwrite MANUALplus finishes the contour in the defined contour direction see figure to the top right Cycle program ICP example workpiece Besides the ICP cycles the created cycle program also includes the positioning cycles for tool change and the thread cycle see figure to the lower right Functions of the cycles N1 Remove the material roughing N2 Position the tool for tool change N3 Finish machine the workpiece N4 Position the tool for tool change N5 Machine the thread N6 Position the tool for removing the workpiece 482 62 000 2 000 2 S T 1 a 0 000 F fol 0 400 mn r 100 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S ry 150 m min Pr 0 i 100 3 888 degr ICP finish longit x 62 z 2 N 688 T 2 5 220 F 0 2 Start pt 62 000 as 2 000 ao C 888 Lior Beispiel Gewindezapfen T1 Rap tray positioning H2 T1 H3 T1 H4 T2 H5 T2 H6 T3 H T3
91. in both axes with the programmed values As soon as the target dimension Is reached in one axis the tool no longer advances in this axis MANUALplus automatically determines the cutting and infeed directions from the current tool position relative to the starting point of the contour area E Tool position at the end of the cycle Starting point of contour CS G83 must not be nested not even by calling subprograms At the start of the cycle the tool must be located outside the defined contour area Cutter radius compensation is not carried out You can program TRC separately Oversizes Oversizes programmed with G57 are taken into account An oversize programmed with G58 is accounted for provided that the TRC function Is active The oversizes remain in effect after execution of the cycle After each pass the tool returns on a diagonal path before it advances for the next pass If there is danger of collision you must program an additional path of rapid traverse to avoid a collision att Danger of collision HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 32 m X O 3 2 G 00 W 6 12 Simple i Cycles Line with radius G87 G87 machines transition radii at orthogonal paraxial inside and outside corners A preceding longitudinal or transverse element is machined if the tool is located at the X or Z coordinate of the corner before the cycle is executed The radii are machined in one pass M
92. in effect after execution of the cycle Oversizes for inside contours Program negative oversizes with G57 possible only with Free entry Safety clearance after a pass is 1 mm HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 12 Simple i Cycles m x D 3 go G C oh o i Roughing transverse G82 G82 machines the contour area defined by the current tool position and Z X in transverse direction Parameters X end point of contour section diameter value Z starting point of contour section gt I offset Infeed in Z default 0 gt K maximum infeed in X The proportioning of cuts is calculated so that an abrasive cut is avoided and the calculated infeed distance is lt K K gt 0 With machining contour outline m K lt 0 Without machining contour outline Q G function infeed Infeed is executed through G function E Q 0 Infeed with GO rapid traverse E Q 1 Infeed with G1 feed rate 6 12 Simple un Cycles gt V type of retraction default 0 V 0 Return to cycle starting point in Z and last retraction diameter In X E V 1 Return to starting point of cycle Note on the execution of the cycle E f you wish to machine an oblique cut you can define the angle with and K MANUALplus automatically determines the cutting and infeed directions from the current tool position relative to the starting point end point of the contour area CS C
93. in the center of a groove and transfer the positions to the parameters C and ZC by pressing the Take over position soft key From these values the cycle then calculates the angle of the spindle at the starting point Z Cycle parameters Z2 end point of thread C measured angle ZC measured position Fl thread pitch feed rate U thread depth No input Depth is calculated External thread U 0 6134 F1 Internal thread U 0 5413 F1 I 1st cutting depth I lt U First cut with cutting depth I further cuts Reduction of cutting depth I U One cut No input Calculation from U and F1 172 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run 1 Pre position threading tool to center of thread groove 2 Transfer the tool position ZC and the spindle angle C with Take over position 3 Move the tool manually out of the thread groove Position the tool to starting point X Z 5 Start cycle with Input finished then press Cycle START A HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 6 Thread and neereumgre es o il 4 6 Thread and Undercullfilctes Recut longitudinal thread Expanded Call the thread cutting menu Select the Thread cycle Press the Expanded soft key Re Press the Recut soft key cut Inner Inner thread soft key thread On Internal thread Off External thread This cycle recuts a single or multi start external or internal thread Since you have already unclamped the workpiece MANUALplus needs to
94. interpretation of the DIN program is concluded You can close the output window with a WINDOW call and the parameter value lines for output 0 394 Machine Toot managenent Organization 999903 nc a WVINDOY Befeh T1 2 GO X100 2100 3 GO X62 22 4 5 INPUTC Durchmesser eingeben 30 6 G96 S150 G95 FO 4 T1 H Mach variable function INPUTA PRINTA lt L Window func Y 6 DIN Programming il PRINT ES Press Program variable function Select PRINT see figure to the top right Define the output texts and the variable numbers see figure to the right During execution of this command MANUALplus displays the output text and the value contents of the defined program variable for output in the output window The PRINT command can be used for defining more than one text and variable cc The output window is cleared after program run interpretation and before execution of the DIN program The window is not cleared however during simulation It is not cleared until the simulation is restarted HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 zj 3 G1 2 70 38 G1 X60 39 G80 52 RINT Innen Durchnesser 30 Aussen Durchmesser 31 0 T2 G9 S800 G95 F1 44 T3 PRINT A iinnen Durchmesser o T he ee Output text ki 7 Text Save Cancel 6 25 Data Input and _ Output j i 6 26 gt rogrammingf
95. know the exact position of the thread For this place the cutting edge of the tap drill in the center of a groove and transfer the positions to the parameters C and ZC by pressing the Take over position soft key From these values the cycle then calculates the angle of the spindle at the starting point Z Cycle parameters Z2 end point of thread without run out C measured angle ZC measured position Fl thread pitch feed rate U thread depth No input Depth is calculated External thread U 0 6134 F1 Internal thread U 0 5413 F1 I 1st cutting depth I lt U First cut with cutting depth I further cuts Reduction of cutting depth down to J I U One cut No input Calculation from U and F1 A feed angle default 30 Range 60 lt A lt 60 A lt 0 Infeed on left thread flank A gt 0 Infeed on right thread flank J remaining cutting depth default 1 100 mm D number of thread starts default 1 single start thread 174 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run 1 Pre position threading tool to center of thread groove 2 Transfer the tool position ZC and the spindle angle C with Take over position 3 Move the tool manually out of the thread groove Position the tool to starting point X Z 5 Start cycle with Input finished then press Cycle START A HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 6 Thread and neereumgre es i il 4 6 Thread and Undercullfilctes Recut tapered thread Call the thread cutting menu
96. lt 90 W end angle Range 0 lt W lt 90 R rounding B1 B2 chamfer rounding B1 contour start B2 contour end B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 115 il T O 4 4 Roughin By setting the following optional parameters you can define additional contour elements SW Oblique cut at contour end BR Rounding in both corners of the contour valley B1 Chamfer Rounding at contour start B2 Chamfer Rounding at contour end Cycle run 1 Move on paraxial path from X Z to contour starting point X1 Z1 2 Finish defined contour area taking optional contour elements into account 116 4 Cycle Programming il ICP contour parallel longitudinal transverse Call the Roughing longitudinal transverse cycles Se IO Select ICP contour parallel longitudinal see figures at right Select ICP contour parallel transverse see figures on the following page The cycle machines parallel to the contour depending on the J parameter J 0 The area defined by X Z and the ICP contour taking the oversizes into account J gt 0 The area defined by the ICP contour plus oversizes and the workpiece blank oversize J alt Danger of collision If the tool angle and the tool point angle have not been defined the tool plunge cuts at the plunging angle If the too
97. of intersection default O 0 If entered data permit two possible solutions for the end point O defines the end point B chamfer rounding arc Transition to the next contour element When entering a chamfer rounding program the theoretical end point of the contour element E B no input Tangential transition m B 0 No tangential transition B gt 0 Radius of rounding m B lt 0 Width of chamfer gt X end point infeed diameter value default Current X position S hom gt V C q4 ol q N o C Define the end point either with C or CY Permitted as geometry command only for G111 Parameters O B Permitted as machining command only for G111 Parameter X m x DQ 3 2 G HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 37 6 21 Lateral Surface Maninin Circular arc lateral surface G112 G113 Geometry command G112 G113 defines a circular arc in a contour on the lateral surface Machining command The tool moves on a circular arc at feed rate to the end point The direction of rotation is shown in the graphic support window Parameters Z end point default Current Z position C end angle for angle direction see graphic support window CY end point as linear value reference G120 reference diameter R radius K center point J center point as a linear value reference unrolled G120 reference diameter W cente
98. page 68 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 X 2 002 s T1 fiz 0 000 Z 52 001 i i F fe 10 000 mm r 0 20 40 60 80 100120 ry 185 m min 100 0 043 degr 333 ICP Beispiel Stechzyklus N2 T30 ICP cut radial finishing N333 N3 T30 Rap tray positioning 3 8 Program i Mode Program Single Tool Add Base Program Back list block correct blocks start 3 8 Program Le Mode Start block search and program execution Preconditions for defining a start block The MANUALplus must be prepared by the machine tool builder for the start block function The start block function must be activated Organization mode of operation Current parameters NC switches Settings or control parameter 1 MANUALplus starts program run from the cursor position The starting position is not changed by a previous graphic simulation CS When selecting the start block in a DIN program ensure that the control executes all commands that define the machine data T S F before it reaches the first traversing command Program execution The selected cycle or DIN program is executed as soon as you press Cycle START You can interrupt machining at any time by pressing Cycle STOP During program run MANUALoplus highlights the cycle or DIN block that is presently being executed With cycle programs the parameters of the cycle currently being run are
99. parallel longitudinal Roughing and finishing cycle for any type of contour ICP contour parallel transverse Roughing and finishing cycle for any type of contour ICP cutting longitudinal Roughing and finishing cycle for any type of contour ICP cutting transverse Roughing and finishing cycle for any type of contour 98 101 101 109 109 117 117 121 121 Overview 129 Overview 162 Recessing radial Tal Recessing and finishing cycles for simple contours Thread cycle 165 Longitudinal single or multi start thread Tapered thread 168 Tapered single or multi start thread Recessing axial 131 Recessing and finishing cycles for simple contours API thread 170 Single or multi start API thread API American Petroleum Institute ICP recessing radial 139 Recessing and finishing cycles for any type of contour Thread recutting 172 Recut longitudinal single or multi start thread ICP recessing axial 139 Recessing and finishing cycles for any type of contour Undercut H 156 Recut tapered thread 176 Recut tapered single or multi start thread Recut API thread 178 Recut single or multi start API thread Undercut K 157 Undercut U 158 Undercut DIN 76 180 Thread undercut and thread chamfer Parting 159 Cycle for parting the workpiece Undercut DIN 509 E 182 Undercut and cylinder chamfer Undercut DIN 509 F 184 Recess tuming cycles __ Page Undercut and cylinder chamfer Overview 1
100. point 4 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path 5 Finish second side taking optional contour elements into account then finish remainder of contour valley 6 Repeat 2 to 5 until all recesses have been finished 7 Return to starting point on paraxial path 138 4 Cycle Programming il ICP recessing cycles mpl Call the recessing menu Select the ICP recessing radial cycle see figures at right Select ICP recessing axial see figures on the following page The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in Q with the ICP recessing contour The parameters X Z define the position of the first recess Cycle parameters X Z starting point P recessing width Infeeds lt P E No input P 0 8 cutting width of the tool I K oversize X Z N ICP contour number DX DZ distance to subsequent recess with respect to the preceding recess Q number of recess cycles default 1 T tool number gt S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 Nevessinggye es k i 4 5 Recessinifi cles Cycle run 1 Calculate the recess positions and the proportioning of cuts 2 Approach workpiece for next recess from starting point or from last recess on paraxial path 3 Machine along the defined contour 4 Return and approach for next pass 5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the complete recess has been machined 6 R
101. point of the contour area E Tool position at the end of the cycle E G817 Cycle starting point Z last retraction diameter X m G818 Cycle starting point CS Descending contour elements are not machined E The tool must be located outside the defined contour area Cutting radius compensation Active G57 G58 oversizes are taken into account if I K is not programmed After the cycle has been executed the oversizes are canceled Safety clearance after each step Parameter Current parameters Machining Safety distances 312 1 6 DIN Programming il Longitudinal contour roughing with recessing G819 The cycle machines the contour area described by the current tool position and the data defined in the subsequent blocks In a longitudinal direction with recessing see Contour definition on page 310 Parameters X cutting limit diameter value The control machines up to the cutting limit gt P maximum infeed The proportioning of cuts is calculated so that an abrasive cut is avoided and the infeed distance is lt P E plunge feed The tool enters the material at the plunge feed E E 0 Descending contours are not machined E No entry The steeper the tool plunges into the material the greater the feed rate decrease max 50 gt H type of departure default 1 m H 0 Machine contour outline after each pass E H 1 Retract at 45 machine contour outline after last pass m H 2 R
102. press the Assume contour soft key HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 X 200 000 TO Z 100 000 Fie S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S ol 0 m min et Sel Be ad ee ee ee i SS See MTT TT 0 1 100x 0 000 degr Layer 4 5 Kontur 13 El 5 3 Importing of DXF i 7 il 5 3 Importing of DXF Co Configuring the DXF import After you have selected a file with DXF contours you can adapt the parameters for configuring the DXF import DEF Press DXF parameters he MANUALplus opens the parameter DXF parameters dialog box Enter the DXF parameters see the meanings below Cave Press Save The MANUALplus assumes the kaa parameters Call the DXF parameters dialog box a Press Reset he MANUALplus enters the standard a parameters Cave Press Save The MANUALplus assumes the Ea parameters Meaning of the DXF parameters Maximum gap here might be small gaps between contour elements in the DXF drawing With this parameter you specify how large the distance between two contour elements may be If the maximum gap is not exceeded then the following element is seen as being part of the current contour If the maximum gap is exceeded then the following element is considered an element of the new contour Starting point The DXF import analyzes the contour and determines the starting point The possible settings have the following meaning right left top bottom T
103. program that can be repeated any time Required tools Roughing tool Position T1 WO 1 Tool orientation A 93 Setting angle B 55 Nose angle R 0 8 Tool radius Finishing tool Position T2 WO 1 Tool orientation A 93 Setting angle B 55 Nose angle R 0 8 Tool radius Threading tool Position 3 WO 1 Tool orientation Sequence of working steps Clamp a workpiece blank diameter 60 mm length 100 mm Machine setup Define the workpiece zero point Measure the tool dimensions Switch to Teach in mode Machine the workpiece cycle by cycle 458 9 Examples il Setting up the machine Prerequisite Tools 11 T2 and T3 are entered Clamp the workpiece blank Insert the reference tool and specify the machine data in Set T S F Prepare for setting the workpiece zero point and measuring the tools in Manual mode with handwheels jog controls Machine an end face Prepare the diameter Set the workpiece zero point Select Setup Press Set axis values 7 0 Touch the end face and define this coordinate as the workpiece zero point Measure tool for all tools n Insert the tool and define the T number in Set T S F wh 5 Press Measure tool Touch the diameter and enter the value as Measuring point coordinate X Touch the end face and enter 0 as Measuring point coordinate Z The end face has now been defined a
104. see figures at right Select Cut transverse see figures on the following page Press the Expanded soft key The Cut longitudinal cycle machines the area defined by X Z and X1 Z2 taking the oversizes into account The Cut transverse cycle machines the area defined by X Z and Z1 X2 taking the oversizes into account Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour starting point X2 Z2 contour end point P infeed depth Maximum infeed depth P gt 0 Machine contour outline P lt Q Retract by the safety clearance at 45 A starting angle Range 0 lt A lt 90 W end angle Range 0 lt W lt 90 R rounding B B1 chamfer rounding B contour end B1 contour start B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer I K oversize X Z T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution By setting the following optional parameters you can define additional contour elements A Oblique cut at contour start W Oblique cut at contour end R Rounding B Chamfer Rounding at contour end B1 Chamfer Rounding at contour start HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 4 Roughin b il T O 4 4 Roughin Cycle run 1 2 3 104 Calculate the proportioning of cuts infeed Approach workpiece for first pass from X Z Move to contour end point Z2 or contour end point X2 or if defined to one of the optional contour elements
105. several possible solutions you can check all mathematically possible solutions with Next solution Continue solution The changes will not become effective until you press Select solution f you press Back the change will not be transferred and the previous description of the last contour element becomes effective again The type of contour element linear or circular element the direction of a linear element or the direction of rotation of a circular element cannot be changed with this function Should this be necessary you must delete the last contour element and add a new contour element Deleting the last contour element If you press Delete last the data of the last entered contour element are canceled You can use this function repeatedly to delete several successive contour elements 248 Teach in X 12 002 x Z 52 001 AZ i F fel 10 000 mn r S ee ee ee ee ee O 0 Su D 5000 r min 1 100 Enter lines Organization T 1 a 0 000 0 000 Tool management 185 m min 0 043 degr Teach in X 12 002 ox Z 52 001 AZ i F fe 10 000 mm r S a ee ee 0 Sg 5000 r min 1 100 Organization T 1 dx 0 000 dz 0 000 Tool management 185 m min 0 043 degr a od 5 ICP Programming Contour direction The cutting direction depends on the direction of the contour If the contour is described in the negative Z axis direction the control uses a longitudin
106. shifted with G150 G151 Number of spindle for which the last feed rate was programmed Number of spindle for which the last speed was programmed 39 6 26 gt rogrammingifariables Precondition for tool information A tool call must be programmed for the variables to become effective The assignment of variables 519 521 varies depending on the type of tool 398 514 015 519 520 521 522 523 524 526 527 Tool type 1 Turning tools 2 Recessing tools 3 Threading tools 4 Drilling tools 5 Taps 6 Milling tools Tool orientation For tool type 6 Number of teeth K For tool type 1 2 Cutting radius R 6 Milling diameter 1 For tool type 2 Cutting width K Tool orientation reference machining direction of tool 0 On the contour 1 To the right of the contour 1 To the left of the contour Set up dimensions Z X Position of tool tip center K see figure below 6 DIN Programming il V variables The MANUALplus uses value ranges to define the following scope of variables E Real V1 V199 E Integer V200 V299 Reserved V300 V900 Requests and assignments Read write machine dimensions machine parameter 7 Syntax V Mx y x dimension 1 9 y coordinate X Y Z U V W A BorC E nterrogate external events Is the bit value O or 1 The significance of the external event is determined by the machine m
107. superimposing the undercut and cannot be changed when programming changes to ICP contours The contour corner has already been clearly defined HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 ntour C 5 n J LLI Se O J am Q Q 0 O a LO j il ntour C 5 j m ma Ca eb z LLI k Oo ad Q Q A S L LO Select form elements AL JS Select undercut DIN 509 E DIN 509 E Parameters that are not entered are automatically calculated from the standard table see DIN 509 E DIN 509 F undercut parameters on page 527 Parameters XS ZS starting point in X Z Starting point of undercut X Z target point in X Z End point of undercut I undercut diameter default Value from standard table K undercut length default Value from standard table W undercut angle default Value from standard table R undercut radius default Value from standard table Finishing oversize default No finishing oversize J element position default 1 J 1 Undercut starts with the longitudinal element and ends with the transverse element J 1 Undercut starts with the transverse element and ends with the longitudinal element F special feed tE The element position J cannot be entered when superimposing the undercut and cannot be changed when programming changes to ICP contours The contour corner has already been clearly defined 266 5 ICP Programming il
108. the complete machining process on the face including contour definition The machining process is performed with the cycle ICP contour axial To describe a contour define the basic contour first Then superimpose the rounding arcs Tool data milling cutter WO 8 Tool orientation 8 Milling diameter K 4 Number of teeth TF 0 025 Feed per tooth 226 Teach in Toot managenent organization X 72 00 AX T anno T 1 0 000 Z 52 00 Af E ania 20 40 60 80 100120 eee D 5000 r min So E ICP contour axial d 100 4 i jo O A re x2f zj Py 2 ufo 5 1fo 5 fo to sjan F 0 1 Start point Fe 185 m min oox 0 043 degr X 72 m ax T 1 az 0 000 Z 52 00 Cy ny HI F fel a T ma S TETT D 5000 r min So E a3 doar loos 0 043 degr degr ICP contour axial 2005 F2j0 05 fo O x m a aa ICP contour number Edit Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back ICP list position tool speed finished 4 Cycle Programming il 4 9 Drilling Milling Patterns Note on using drilling milling patterns Drilling patterns MANUALplus generates the machine commands M12 M13 apply release block brake under the following conditions the drill tap must be entered as driven tool parameter Driven tool H and the direction of rotation MD must be defined ICP milling contours f the contour starting p
109. the following contours or roughs finishes a pocket on the face Rectangle Q 4 L lt gt B Square Q 4 L B Circle Q 0 RE gt 0 L and B No input Triangle or polygon Q 3 or Q gt 4 L gt 0 Notes on parameters functions Machining of contour or pocket defined in U Milling direction depends on definition in H and the direction of tool rotation see Cutting direction for contour milling and pocket milling on page 224 Milling cutter compensation effective except for contour milling with J 0 Approach and departure he point of the surface normal from the tool position to the first contour element is the point of approach and departure If no surface normal intersects the tool position the Starting point of the first element for rectangles the longer element is the point of approach and departure The tool approaches directly or on an arc according to approaching radius R Contour milling J defines whether the milling cutter is to machine on the contour center of milling cutter on the contour or on the inside outside of the contour Pocket milling roughing O 0 Contour milling J defines whether a pocket is machined from the inside towards the outside or vice versa Pocket milling finishing O 1 First the edge of the pocket is machined then the pocket floor is machined J defines whether a pocket floor is finished from the inside towards the outside or vice versa 204 4 Cyc
110. the speed set in the machine parameter General parameters for spindle Absolute max speed then the speed limit of this parameter takes effect Q Y OD a as O b LL fe Interrupted feed G64 G64 interrupts the programmed feed for a short period of time This function is used to ensure continuous chip breaking G64 without parameters deactivates the interrupted intermittent teed rate Parameters gt E pause duration Range 0 01s lt E lt 999s F feed duration The slide accelerates to the programmed feed rate and decelerates again to zero feed at the end of the period Range 0 01s lt E lt 999s m x D 3 a D G rs HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 29 6 6 Feed Rate and soul Speed Feed per tooth G193 G193 defines the feed rate with respect to the number of teeth of the cutter Parameters F feed per tooth in mm tooth or inch tooth GF The actual value display shows the feed rate in mm rev Constant feed G94 feed per minute G94 defines the feed rate independent of drive Parameters F feed per minute in mm min or inch min Feed per revolution G95 G195 G95 G195 defines the feed rate as a function of drive G95 Reference No of revolutions of spindle G195 Reference No of revolutions of spindle 1 driven tool Parameters F feed per revolution in mm rev or inch rev 298 Example G193 Ex
111. the starting point of the first element for rectangles the longer element is the point of approach and departure The tool approaches directly or on an arc according to approaching radius R Contour milling J defines whether the milling cutter is to machine on the contour center of milling cutter on the contour or on the inside outside of the contour Pocket milling roughing O 0 Contour milling J defines whether a pocket is machined from the inside towards the outside or vice versa Pocket milling finishing O 1 First the edge of the pocket is machined then the pocket floor is machined J defines whether a pocket floor is finished from the inside towards the outside or vice versa 220 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle parameters first inout window T O X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle X1 milling top edge default Starting point X X2 milling floor P infeed depth default Total depth in one infeed U overlap factor No input Contour milling U gt 0 Pocket milling minimum overlap of milling paths U milling diameter 4 8 Millin oversize in infeed direction I K contour parallel oversize T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Cycle parameters second input window N ICP contour number n FZ infeed rate default Active feed rate z Ol m Fr E reduced feed rate for circular elements defa
112. to G113 G120 is a modal function Parameters gt X diameter a aes V C as 4 ol q N fe m x D 3 J D G oh N HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 37 6 21 Lateral Surface ee ining m x 3 2 o G Starting point of contour rapid traverse G110 Geometry command G110 defines the starting point of contour definition on the lateral surface Machining command The tool moves at rapid traverse along the shortest path to the end point Parameters Z end point C end angle CY end point as linear value reference G120 reference diameter X end point diameter value default Current X position C Define the contour starting point or end point either witha oriy Use G110 to position the C axis to a defined angle programming N G110 C Permitted as machining command only for G110 Parameter X 372 6 DIN Programming il Linear segment lateral surface G111 Geometry command G111 defines a linear segment in a contour on the lateral surface Machining command The tool moves on a linear path at feed rate to the end point Parameters Z end point default Current Z position C end angle for angle direction see graphic support window CY end point as linear value reference G120 reference diameter A angle reference see graphic support window gt Q point
113. to check data or to highlight elements for operations like deleting copying editing etc 34 2 Basics of Operation il Alphanumeric keyboard Program descriptions tool descriptions comments etc are entered with the on screen alphanumeric keyboard You select the desired character with the arrow keys and confirm the character with ENTER You can switch between upper and lower case letters with the SHIFT button To edit existing texts place the cursor on the desired position Press the Up arrow key repeatedly until the cursor reaches the Input line Then use the horizontal arrow keys to delete overwrite or add to the text as required With the INS key on the alphanumeric keyboard you can determine whether to insert or overwrite characters Which mode of the INS key is presently active insert mode or overwrite mode is indicated below the input line Numbers are entered with the data input keypad HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 X 22 T ax oo T1 az 0 000 Z 52 00 az F fel ie rm 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S _Muiieuriutentati O O 0 So 185 m min D 5000 r min o oox 0 043 degr Alpha Keyboard Beispiel Exanple f Ai Fe om Lock Insert OOD PoC ood A LID ILI J PIII G PICs IC ICID Goole Ce Leo Lon mrs Roughing cycles lon trans 2 2 Operation and cal 2 3 Error Messages The appearance and effect of a MANUALplus error message depend on the current operatio
114. to the starting point Longitudinal linear machining The tool moves from the starting point to the contour end point at the programmed feed rate and remains at the cycle end position Contour linear longitudinal With return The tool approaches the workpiece executes the longitudinal cut and returns to the starting point at the end of cycle see figures at right Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 contour starting point Z2 contour end point T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Cycle run if With return is active 1 Move trom X Z to contour starting point X1 2 Move to contour end point Z2 at programmed feed rate 3 Retract and return to starting point on paraxial path HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 3 Single wares 4 3 Single cull ctes Linear machining transverse Call the single cut menu Select the Transverse linear machining cycle With With return soft key return Off When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position On Tool returns to the starting point Transverse linear machining The tool moves from the starting point to the contour end point at the programmed feed rate and remains at the cycle end position Contour linear transverse With return The tool approaches the workpiece executes the transverse cut and returns to the starting point at the end of cycle see figures at right Cycle par
115. transverse cycles OO 0 0 q0 0 0 OE EEE Select Cut longitudinal see figures at right Select Cut transverse see figures on the following page The Cut longitudinal cycle machines the rectangular area defined by X Zand X1 Z2 The Cut transverse cycle machines the rectangular area defined by X Z and X2 Z1 Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 contour starting point roughing longitudinal Z2 end point of contour roughing longitudinal Z1 contour starting point roughing transverse X2 end point of contour roughing transverse P infeed depth Maximum infeed depth P gt 0 Machine contour outline P lt 0 Retract by 1 mm at 45 T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 4 Roughin j il 4 4 Roughin T O Cycle run 1 2 3 4 OQ ol 102 Calculate the proportioning of cuts infeed Approach workpiece for first pass from X Z Move to end point Z2 at programmed feed rate Depending on algebraic sign of infeed depth P P gt 0 Machine contour outline P lt O Retract at angle of 45 Retract and approach for next pass Repeat steps 3 to 5 until X1 or Z1 Is reached Return to starting point on diagonal path 4 Cycle Programming il Roughing longitudinal transverse Expanded Call the Roughing longitudinal transverse cycles Select Cut longitudinal
116. use of an ICP contour for machining a pattern The individual working steps for machining the ICP contour and integrating the contour into ICP cycles are based on the workpiece drawing In the process described below you create an ICP contour description and a cycle program for parts production The cycle used is ICP contour pattern circular axial Required tool Milling tool Position 140 WO 8 Tool orientation 8 Cutter diameter K 4 Number of teeth TF 0 025 Feed per tooth Sequence of working steps Preconditions The turning operation is completed The tool dimensions have been determined Switch to Teach in mode Enter the positioning cycles for tool change Call ICP contour axial Activate Pattern circular in addition ICP contour programming Integrate the ICP contour in the milling cycle roughing Generate a milling cycle finishing Integrate the ICP contour in the milling cycle finishing Note on defining ICP contours in patterns In this example the first milling contour is programmed as indicated in the workpiece drawing The coordinate datum therefore is the reference point for the definition of the pattern positions Alternately you can dimension the first milling contour in the coordinate datum and define the position of the milling contours in the pattern positions HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 _ Example Milling Cycle j il 9 5 ICP Example Milling Cy
117. wal select Program run MANUALoplus loads the program l 50 000 ar rr F Koor that was last machined In this case the cycle 150 n nin program 999 is loaded o 3 888 degr In the figure to the right the complete machining operation for producing the workpiece was simulated in the Program run mode In this example the Continuous run function is active MANUALplus therefore runs the simulation without interruption T 3 468 9 Examples SNIQTVNNVIN YUM Buo lece hed workp The figure to the right shows the resulting workpiece inis F 469 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Example Threaded Stud 9 2 ICP Example Threaded Stud This example illustrates how to machine a threaded stud using the ICP programming feature The individual working steps for machining the ICP contour and integrating the contour into ICP cycles are based on the workpiece drawing The machining operation is performed with the ICP cutting longitudinal cycle In the process described below you create an ICP contour description and a cycle program for parts production Required tools Roughing tool Position T1 WO 1 Tool orientation A 93 Setting angle B 55 Nose angle R 0 8 Tool radius Finishing tool Position T2 WO 1 Tool orientation A 93 Setting angle B 55 Nose angle R 0 5 Tool radius Threading tool Position 3 WO 1 Tool orientation Sequence of working steps
118. 0 3 5 60 X60 Z2 6 1 2 15 G1 X82 B2 G 1 Linear movement G 2 Circular machining G 3 Circular machining G 4 Period of dwell G 9 Block precision G Circular machining G Circular machining G Tool change point G Chuck part cyl tube G Workp blank contour G Contour undercut G Speed limitation G Uni thread cycle G Single thread G 3 Thread single path G function no 287 6 2 Editing DI 6 3 Definition of wodi Blank 6 3 Definition of Workpiece Blank Chuck part cylinder tube G20 G20 describes the workpiece blank and the setup used This information is evaluated during the simulation Parameters X diameter Z length including transverse allowance and clamping range gt K right edge transverse allowance I inside diameter for workpiece blank tube B clamping range J type of clamping E 0 Not clamped E 1 Externally clamped E 2 Internally clamped 288 Example G20 6 DIN Programming il Workpiece blank contour G21 G21 describes the setup used The workpiece blank is described with G1 G2 G3 G12 and G13 commands that follow immediately after G21 G80 concludes the contour description This information is evaluated during the simulation Parameters X diameter Z length B clamping range J type of clamping 0 Not clamped E 1 Externally clamped E 2 Internally clamped HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 28 m x 3
119. 00 120 f 185 m min en pee S o 0 043 degr D 5000 r min Cut longitud E E 72 002 2 2 x i 50 a2ijo x2 70 zakan pis afie Uo E o ff eo X 72 002 2 2 000 C T 6 sor se OTe 2 Basics of Operation il 2 4 Explanation of Terms Cursor In lists or during data Input a list item an input field or a character is highlighted This highlight is called a cursor Entries and operations like copying deleting inserting a new Item etc refer to the current cursor position Arrow keys he cursor is moved with the horizontal and vertical arrow keys and with the PgUp PgDn keys Page keys The PgUp PgDn keys are also called Page keys Navigate Within a list or an input box you can move the cursor to any position you would like to check change delete or add to In other words you navigate through the list Active inactive windows functions menu items Of all windows that are displayed on the screen only one is active That means any data you type on the keyboard or keypad are entered in the active window only In the active window the title bar is shown in color In the inactive windows the title bar appears dimmed Inactive function keys or menu keys also appear dimmed Menu menu key MANUALoplus arranges the available functions and function groups in a 9 field box This box is called a menu Each symbol in the menu is a menu key Editing Editing is changing
120. 00 ax T 1 ere Z 52 001 F A 10 000 mm r o 185 m min 0 043 degr Op time 0 20 40 60 80 100120 nnn 0 e D 5000 r min 1 100 Time calculation CHr Min Sec Non op time Sum yo 0 00 0 0 00 7 0 00 TEREZ 0 39 1 0 03 1 0 42 2 TERZ 0 00 0 0 00 4 0 00 4 E G 0 11 9 0 01 2 0 13 1 T 6 0 00 0 0 00 4 0 00 4 T 45 0 03 2 0 00 7 0 03 9 Total processing time 0 54 2 0 06 5 1 00 7 3 Machine Mode of Operation 3 11 Program Management MAN UALplus differentiates between the following Program run To01 management organization program groups Cycle programs X 72 00 AR O T 1 Te ICP contours Z 52 001 F oe 10 000 mn r DIN programs Oo 20 40 60 80 100120 Trans DIN macros S DS sooo rain z S o 0 043 degr Beispiel Example ICP Beispiel Gewindezapfen ICP Beispiel Gewindezapfen Example Beispiel Fraesen Stirn ICP Excample Beispiel Matrize ICP Excample Beispiel Matrize ICP Beispiel Stechzyklus Cycle program 111 Size 6856 Last change 25 06 2003 13 42 3 11 Program Manage Program information Program number The program number 1 to 8 characters serves to identify the program within a program group Completing zeros are part of the program number Program description You can describe a program by a short text of up to 35 alphanumeric characters This text is displayed in th
121. 00 r min SE 1110 ICP Beispiel Gewindezapfen H1 TO Bar tube blank H2 T2 Rap tray positioning N3 T2 ICP cut longitud W111 H4 T2 Rap tray positioning N5 T6 ICP finish longit N111 N6 T6 Rap tray positioning H T45 Thread ar Workpiece blank Define standard workpiece blank or workpiece blank with ICP Single cuts Position at rapid traverse linear and circular single cuts chamfers and rounding arcs Roughing cycles longitudinal transverse Roughing and finishing cycles for turning and facing Recessing and recess turning cycles Cycles for recessing contour recessing undercuts and parting Thread cutting Thread cycles relief turns and thread repair Drilling Drilling cycles and patterns for face and lateral surface machining Milling Milling cycles and patterns for face and lateral surface machining DIN macros Integrate program sections written in DIN format into the cycle program dx dz F qe 185 m min 0 043 degr ing wi 4 1 Work rf Soft keys in cycle programming Depending on the type of cycle you define the functions for the cycle by soft key The table to the S0ft Keys injeyele programming TEE right lists the soft keys used in cycle programming FE Call the ICP editor S T Change Approach the tool change position O approach ar Spindle Activate spindle positioning M19 Stop M19 Oo
122. 000 mmr o 185 m min S ras n sat S DIN 76 at snsose JE TER gt 0 043 degr Thread lp Thread cycle Longitudinal single or multi start thread Tapered thread Tapered single or multi start thread API thread Single or multi start API thread API American Petroleum Institute Undercut DIN 76 Thread undercut and thread chamfer Undercut DIN 509 E Undercut and cylinder chamfer Undercut DIN 509 F Undercut and cylinder chamfer 4 Cycle Programming il Angle of infeed thread angle With some thread cycles you can indicate the angle of infeed The figures to the right show the operating sequence of the MANUALplus at an angle of infeed of 30 figure at upper right and an angle of infeed of 0 figure at center right Thread depth proportioning of cuts The thread depth is programmed for all thread cycles MANUALplus reduces the cutting depth with each cut see figure at center right Handwheel superpositioning in threading cycles As of software version 526 488 09 you can influence the current thread cut via handwheel superpositioning in X and Z and so optimize the production of the thread Handwheel superpositioning must be supported by the machine manufacturer and is activated via a switch on the machine operating panel Handwheel superpositioning is restricted as follows X direction thread depth Depends on the current cutting depth the starting an
123. 001 0k020697 g 2 ag Beispielwerkstueck selection 5361 002 bis auf n55 o0k020697 555 Beispiel Fraesen Stirnflae 0028 FH Mannheim Huelse Mat POM 5552 7 003 Schlichten funktioniert ni 599999 004 ok 10 07 97 DIH DIN programs or 666 ICP Excample Beispiel Ste 6666 Beispielwerkstueck programs 772 ICP Excample Beispiel M 007 Manualplus Zyklenprog 7777 Beispielwerkstueck 008 Manualplus Zyklenprog 888 ICP Excample Beispiel 009 Manualplus Zyklenprog DIH DIN macros or 8888 0090 SINTEF T NR 202 06 KOMPLET macros 900 0091 SINTEF T NR 202 06 KOMPLET Example Beispiel 01 9999 Beispiel Gewinde 010 Manualplus Zyklenprog Cycl e Cycle programs or 999999 abspanl 1 011 Manualplus 2yklenprog programs Size 88656 Byte Last change 08 07 2003 12 26 Network eae Haee EA hira beste w iii contour IF ee Program group extensions S ICP ICP contours or files NC DIN programs Press Back NCS DIN subprograms DIN macros GTZ Cycle programs When DIN programs or cycle programs or ICP GTI ICP turning contours contours have been selected only the file name is displayed MANUALplus uses the extensions see sa ICP face contours table at right to differentiate between the individual GTM ICP isteral surtace contours program groups If you log on as a system manager you can DXF DXF contours additionally select the following files Diagnostic files These files ar
124. 1 G2 G81 M3 M30 and the parameters Organizational commands consist of key words WHILE RETURN etc or of a combination of letters numbers The parameters are preceded by address letters such as X100 Z 2 etc You can program several NC commands in one block unless they have the same address letters or opposing functionalities Examples Permissible combination N10 G1 X100 Z2 M8 Non permissible combination N10 G1 X100 Z2 G2 X100 Z2 R30 same address letters are used more than once or N10 M3 M4 opposing functionality You can also program NC blocks containing only variable calculations Comments are enclosed in brackets They are located at the end of an NC block or in a separate NC block An NC block consisting only of acomment does not have a block number HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Example Program and block structure z 6 1 DIN Pr C i Overview of DIN commands Traversing commands For moving the slide on a linear or circular path Cycles For roughing recessing finishing threading and drilling Switching commands For machine components Zero point shifts For adjusting the dimensional system Commands for program organization Program branches program repeats and subprograms Comments For explaining the program Variable functions Instead of fixed address parameters you can use variables which are entered or calculated bef
125. 10 Teach in x 62 000 d 2 000 2 FE toll 0 200 mn r 100 S O 20 40 60 80 100120 S o 180 m min TIN 0 D BSA 356 121 degr ss zsa ooo ema E a Teach in Toot adninistration Organisation x 62 000 0 200 mn r re Ol eee 180 m min 100 356 121 degr l 2 000 so i il Q gt O I V N Q or Q z gt LLI Example Recessing Cycle Contour element 6 The next connecting contour element is an oblique cut whose target point is known After you have entered the target point X Z the oblique cut is unambiguously defined MANUALplus draws the contour elements in the graphics window 502 x 62 000 1 Z 2 000 a T 4 foo Jo 0 200 nnr 100 3 ry 180 m min 1oox 356 121 degr 0 l Target pt in Z x 62 000 Z 2 000 ao S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 ee ee ee ee ee eee G i dx 0 000 T 4 dz 0 000 F fol 0 200 mn r o ___160_n ain 100 356 121 degr 0 i Lines 9 Examples il Contour element 7 The next connecting contour element is a horizontal areas Wi en XI 62 00 T4 gom After you have entered the target point Z the line is AR dz 0 000 unambiguously defined MANUALplus draws the I NNN 0 200 nm r contour elements in the graphics window l 2 000 ae Fi
126. 13 20 H G1 X16 2 1 5 H8 G1 2 30 H9 G25 H 11 15 K5 2 R0 8 W30 FP1 5 N10 G1 amp 20 H11 G1 amp 40 2 35 N12 G1 2 55 B4 N13 G1 X855 B 2 N14 G1 2 70 N15 G1 X60 680 Program run m 90 000 ss T1 z 0 000 50 000 lt F fl 0 200 mn r S 0 180 m min 100 356 121 degr 20 40 60 80 100120 Single cuts 9 Examples 9 7 DIN Programming Example Milling Cycle This example illustrates how to machine the face using the DIN programming feature Required tool Milling tool roughing and finishing Position T40 WO 8 Tool orientation 8 Cutter diameter K 4 Number of teeth TF 0 025 Feed per tooth Preconditions The turning operation is completed The tool dimensions have been determined HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 9 7 DIN rrogranyains Example Milling Cycle j il 9 7 DIN progran n Example Milling Cycle DIN program face milling Ol 20 Program number of the DIN program Program description Spindle STOP Program the speed feed rate Call the milling tool Activate the C axis Position the C axis Approach the workpiece Contour milling face roughing cycle Starting point of contour definition for cycle G793 Contour definition End of contour definition Deactivate the C axis Retract the tool approach the tool change position End of program 9 Examples il Checking the DIN program After you have written th
127. 20 150 m min 100 868 r min I T s 2f2 th MANUALplus x1f40 afo 2755 22j 55 Pfa f af C rz Bj 2 koi th sfiso The starting point X Z is defined such that It is Start pt located shortly before the area to be machined It is ec ae We Wee aa ae Li ey wut i run list position tool speed finished approached at rapid traverse ing wi ork The cycle machines the area marked in the drawing The expanded mode is selected for programming the allowances the rounding and the chamfer Roughing cycle 3 x 40 000 T 1 fz 0 000 l 2 000 Fy ne Fig om S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 150 m min mininin 0 O BBD ocx 1194 rnin sE o z2 O O x1f20 zafo g2 40 z2aj 35 oO P4 oo uf26 565 eft wt kori shso The cycle machines the area marked in the drawing Start pt The expanded mode is selected for programming the Ese aera ee z Ta i ia pal EN Back allowances and the oblique cut 462 9 Examples il Roughing cycle 4 x 20 a ax T 1 iz 6 000 l 2 000 7 a Fig a S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S 150 m min 0 A a B 2387 r min th MANUALplus ing wi ork The cycle machines the area marked in the drawing The expanded mode is selected for programming the Ei prr me pew T ezi a Fe deal al HOCE allowances Positioning the tool for tool change Before you can replace the roughing tool by the TPE E Toot administration organisation _ finishing
128. 3 Thread undercut DIN 76 180 Undercut DIN 509 E 182 Undercut DIN 509 F 184 Undercut position 162 Undercut type H 156 Undercut type K 157 Undercut type U 158 DIN programming Undercut contour G25 344 Undercut cycle G85 345 Undercut DIN 509 E G851 347 Undercut DIN 509 F G852 348 Undercut DIN76 G853 349 Undercut type H G857 351 Undercut type K G858 352 Undercut type U G856 350 ICP contour Fundamentals of ICP undercuts 263 Thread undercut DIN 76 265 Undercut DIN 509 E 266 Undercut DIN 509 F 267 Parameters undercut DIN 509 E DIN 509 F 527 Word length serial data transfer 445 Working with cycles 80 Workpiece zero point 27 50 Workpiece blank definition Cycle programming 85 DIN programming 288 X X axis 25 XON XOFF serial data transfer 445 Z Z axis 25 Zero point shift Absolute G59 307 Additive G56 306 C axis parameter 433 C axis G152 359 Zero point shift G51 305 Zoom simulation 73 Parameters undercut DIN 76 525 Undercut tools 412 Unsolved contour elements ICP 242 User name automatic logon 444 User service 454 V Variables assigning values to DIN programming 393 Views 70 542 Index il Overview of G functions Definition of workpiece blank Page Tool compensation Page G20 Standard blank bar tube 288 G148 Changin
129. 3 Marking program transfer 446 Marking for block functions DIN programming 285 Mathematical functions 396 Maximum speed 47 Cycle mode 46 Display 46 Speed limitation G26 G126 297 Menu 39 Menu key 39 Menu selection 33 Menu structure DIN programming 286 Metric 434 Milling cutter radius compensation DIN programming 300 Fundamentals 29 Milling cycles 201 538 Milling pattern Cycle programming Circular axial 230 Circular radial 234 Linear axial 228 Linear radial 232 Notes 227 DIN programming Circular face G745 385 Circular lateral surface G746 389 Linear face G743 383 Linear lateral surface G744 387 Milling tools 425 Mode of operation Machine 42 Organization 430 Tool administration tool management 412 Modes of operation 33 N Navigating 39 NC blocks 279 NC center drills 413 NC commands 279 Nested subprograms 406 Networks Configuration 444 Fundamentals 442 Neutral tools 420 O Operating mode line 32 Optical gauge 57 Optional parameters cycle programming Origin of the coordinate system 71 Output window 395 Output window defining 394 Oversize Axis parallel G57 308 Contour parallel G58 309 P Page keys 39 Panning functions simulation 73 Parameter description subprograms 407 Parameters
130. 413 Cross slide 25 Current parameters 432 Cursor 39 Cutting and infeed directions cycle programming 98 Cutting data 412 Cutting direction cycle programming 224 Cutting path graphics 68 Cutting speed DIN programming 392 Cycle programming Cycle interruption 81 Cycle keys 81 Cycle menu 83 Cycle programming 62 Starting point of cycles 80 Cylinder start chamfer undercut DIN 509 E with 182 Cylinder start chamfer undercut DIN 509 F with 184 D Data backup 441 Data input DIN programming 393 Data input keypad 23 Data input operation and 34 Data output DIN programming 393 Data transfer 441 DataPilot 441 Date time 455 Deep hole drilling Axial Radial cycle programming 193 Deep hole drilling cycle G74 355 Default value 39 534 Diagnosis 455 Dialog texts for subprograms 407 DIN commands overview 280 DIN cycle cycle programming 239 DIN example Milling 519 Threaded stud 516 DIN macros 83 278 DIN programs 278 Direction of rotation tool parameters 426 Display type actual position display 433 Displaying and editing parameters 431 Distance to go display 46 Drilling Cycle programming Deep hole drilling 193 Drilling 191 Tapping 195 DIN programming Deep hole drilling cycle G74 355 Simple drilling cycle G71 354 Tapping G36 357 Drilli
131. 43 Recess turning radial 144 Recess turning and finishing cycles for simple contours Recess turning axial 144 Recess turning and finishing cycles for simple contours ICP recess turning radial 152 Recess turning and finishing cycles for any type of contour ICP recess turning axial 152 Recess turning and finishing cycles for any type of contour Overview 190 Face milling 211 For milling surfaces or polygons Slot radial 215 For milling single slots or slot patterns Axial drilling cycle 191 4 For drilling single holes and patterns Radial drilling cycle 191 For drilling single holes and patterns Figure radial 216 For milling a single figure Radial ICP contour 220 For milling single ICP contours or contour patterns Axial deep hole drilling cycle 193 For drilling single holes and patterns Radial deep drilling cycle 193 For drilling single holes and patterns Helical slot milling radial 223 For milling a helical slot Axial tapping cycle 195 D Thread milling 197 For drilling single holes and patterns For milling threads in existing holes Radial tapping cycle 195 For drilling single holes and patterns Thread milling 197 For milling threads in existing holes Undercut DIN 509 E 182 Undercut and cylinder chamfer Undercut DIN 509 F 184 x Undercut and cylinder chamfer Overview 201 Rapid traverse positioning 202 Activate C axis position tool and spindle
132. 431 Parity serial data transfer 445 Parting Cycle programming 159 Parting cycle G859 353 83 Index il Parting tools 412 Protection zone X Password automatic logon 444 Deactivate DIN cycle G60 391 Password for user logon 453 Display of protection zone status 51 Password changing 454 Protection zone setting setting up the machine 51 Pattern Protocol serial data transfer 445 Cycle programming Pattern circular face 230 Q Pattern circular lateral surface 234 Quantity monitoring for number of parts produced Pattern linear face 228 Fundamentals 59 Pattern linear lateral surface 232 Tool data 427 DIN programming Circular face G745 385 R Circular lateral surface G746 389 Rapid traverse Linear face G743 383 Contouring speed for manual control parameter 432 Linear lateral surface G744 387 Cycle programming Period of dwell G4 391 Rapid traverse positioning 89 Peripheral interface connector assignment 532 Rapid traverse positioning C axis 202 PLC diagnosis 37 DIN programming Rapid traverse GO 290 Rapid traverse face G100 360 Rapid traverse lateral surface G110 372 Rapid traverse speed automatic mode parameter 432 Reading in parameter values 397 Reamers 413 Recess turning Cycle programming Fundamentals 143 ICP recess turning finishing 154 PLC error 37 Pola
133. 48 Undercut with cylinder machining DIN 76 349 Undercut type U 350 Undercut type H 351 Undercut type K 352 Parting cycle 203 G71 G74 G36 G743 G744 G745 G746 G799 Drilling cycle 354 Deep hole drilling cycle 355 Tapping cycle 357 Linear pattern face 383 Linear pattern lateral surface 387 Circular pattern face 385 Circular pattern lateral surface 389 Thread milling 358 G120 G126 G152 G153 G193 G195 G196 G197 Reference diameter lateral surface 371 machining Speed limitation driven tool 297 Zero point shift C axis 359 Standardize C axis 359 Feed per tooth 298 Feed per revolution for driven tool 298 Constant cutting speed for driven tool 299 Spindle speed in rev min for driven tool 299 Overview of G functions il G100 G101 G102 G103 G304 G305 G307 G743 G745 G791 G793 G797 G799 G110 G111 G112 G113 G120 G314 G315 G317 G744 G746 G792 G794 G798 Rapid traverse face Linear path face Circular arc face Circular arc face Figure definition full circle face Figure definition rectangle face Figure definition polygon face Linear pattern face Circular pattern face Linear slot face Contour milling cycle face Area milling face Thread milling axial Rapid traverse lateral surface Linear path lateral surface Circular arc lateral surface Circular arc lateral surface Reference diameter lateral surface machining Figure definition full circle lateral s
134. 61 K 30 BC3 SINC 31 E E G1 2 3 32 G25 H 11 15 K5 2 R0 8 W30 FP1 5 a 33 G1 R20 34 G1 R40 2 35 35 61 2 55 B4 gt be a i 3 SINC 31 Addition Free Save Back entry term prog mach Math Calcul Conparis variable variable function operation operator 403 T U O O lt T T E gt 00 N 6 28 Variables as Address me acters 24 T2 25 GO X62 22 26 689 2 G42 26 GO X13 29 j30 TANC Laas ean 0 31 C4 32 a 30 G1 X 30 23 SINC 31 31 G1 2 30 32 G25 H 11 15 K5 2 RO amp WSO FP1 5 gt Variable 30 TAN 31 4 32 9 gnment Addition prog Y mach Math Calcul Comparis Free Save Back variable variable function operation operator entry term SIN COS TAN ATAN ABS ROUND INT SORT SORTA SORTS LOGN EXP 404 Sine degrees Cosine degrees Tangent degrees Arc tangent degrees Absolute amount Round Round off truncate Square root Square root a b Square root a b Natural logarithm Exponential function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Assign Opening bracket Closing bracket 6 DIN Programming il You can program NC blocks that contain only variable calculations see figure at right Press Program variable function Ea Select Assignment Enter the variable number Select Transfer
135. 75 Functions for program management 76 3 12 Conversion into DIN Format 77 3 13 Inch Mode 78 4 1 Working with Cycles 80 Starting point of cycles 80 Cycle transitions 80 DIN macros 81 Graphical test run Simulation 81 Cycle keys 81 Switching functions M functions 82 Comments 82 Cycle menu 83 Soft keys in cycle programming 84 4 2 Workpiece Blank Cycles 85 Blank bar tube 86 ICP workpc blank contour 87 4 3 Single Cut Cycles 88 Rapid traverse positioning 89 Approach the tool change position 90 Linear machining longitudinal 91 Linear machining transverse 92 Linear machining at angle 93 Circular machining 94 Chamfer 95 Rounding 96 M functions 97 4 4 Roughing Cycles 98 Roughing longitudinal transverse 101 Roughing longitudinal transverse Expanded 103 Finishing cut longitudinal transverse 105 Finishing cut longitudinal transverse Expanded 107 Plunge longitudinal transverse 109 Plunge longitudinal transverse Expanded 111 Finishing plunge longitudinal transverse 113 Finishing plunge longitudinal transverse Expanded 115 ICP contour parallel longitudinal transverse 117 ICP contour parallel finishing longitudinal transverse 119 ICP roughing longitudinal transverse 121 ICP finishing longitudinal or
136. 773 degr ICP contour pattern cir ax cj 100 Sh 4 fo EE x W Jo wfo oo Keo aao S wfo of tjo sfa0 rjo Start pt Pattern Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back linear list position tool speed finished X 139 A ax T 40 iom Z 49 713 az F AEA 0 20 40 60 80 100120 a o eae ICP contour pattern cir ax uf A COCO xy ti YS y2 os ifo 5 kjo Nf2005 I C jo SCS T afo on 2 Upper edge of milling Edit Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back TEP list position tool speed finished The same cutter that was used for the roughing cycle is used for the finishing cycle 9 5 ICP Example Milling Cycle 514 9 Examples il Checking the ICP milling cycle finishing With the graphic simulation function you can check the execution of the ICP milling finishing cycle Graphics soft key You can then transfer the cycle to the cycle program with Save or Overwrite Cycle program ICP milling example Besides the ICP cycles the created cycle program also includes the positioning cycles for tool change see figure to the right Functions of the cycles N2 Pocket milling Roughing N3 Pocket milling Finishing N4 Position the tool for removing the workpiece HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in X 139 871 a e Z 49 13 12 Toot managenent organization Uo ace F fel 10 000 mn r 0 m min
137. 863 G864 326 Recessing finishing G867 G868 329 Simple recessing cycle G865 G866 328 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 539 il x lt T Recessing cycles Cycle programming ICP recessing cycle 139 ICP recessing cycle finishing Recessing 131 141 Recessing finishing expanded 137 Recessing finishing simple 135 Recessing expanded 133 DIN programming Contour recessing G861 G862 324 Contour recessing finishing G863 G864 326 Recessing cycle simple G865 G866 328 Recessing finishing G867 G868 329 Recessing tools 412 421 Recess turning tools 412 Reference diameter G120 371 Reference point for tools 418 Reference points 27 Reference run 43 Roughing cycle programming Finishing 105 Finishing plunge 113 Finishing plunge expanded 115 Finishing expanded 107 ICP cutting contour parallel 117 ICP finishing contour parallel 119 ICP finishing longitudinal transverse 123 ICP roughing longitudinal transverse 121 Plunge cutting 109 Plunge cutting expanded 111 Roughing 101 Roughing expanded 103 Roughing cycles 98 Roughing tools 412 Rounding ICP face 271 ICP lateral surface 275 ICP turning contour 264 S S display 47 Saddle 25 Safety clearance 98 Scope of V variables 399 Screen displays 32 Screen windows 32 39 Selection of solutions I
138. A Examples of recessing cycles Recess outside The machining operation is to be executed with the Recessing radial Expanded cycle taking oversizes into account see figure at upper right This contour area is to be finished subsequently with the Recessing radial finishing Expanded cycle see figure at lower right The rounding arcs in the corners of the contour valley and the oblique surfaces at the contour start and end are also machined in expanded mode Be sure to enter the correct values for the parameters contour starting point X1 Z1 and contour end point X2 Z2 These parameters determine the cutting and infeed directions in this example external machining and infeed in negative Z axis direction Tool data Lathe tool for external machining WO 1 Tool orientation K 4 Cutting width 4 mm 160 Teach in X 7 000 T T1 aooo Z 52 001 10 000 mmr to H 4100 AREENAN 20 40 60 80 aa 0 Q niwinivninivninnwvinivinn So 185 m min D 5000 r min o 0 043 degr Recessing radial E x1 80 af3ass5 o 2 60 8 z2 j 52 5 Pa oo Aane ufa Rf0 5 af gf to sheo F03 tS Start point Teach in Toot managenent organization X 12 00 ax CK T 1 j2 0 000 Z 52 001 x gt 10 000 on r FE fal 20 40 60 80 minntniwvininnivninniviniin MT 0 S o 185 m min D 5000 E 0 043 degr Recessing radial
139. ANUALplus determines the direction of the radius from the tool orientation see Lathe tools on page 419 Tool position at the end of the cycle End point of radius Parameters X corner point diameter value Z corner point B radius E reduced feed rate default Active feed rate Example G87 322 6 DIN Programming il 6 12 Simple Cycles ce Cutting radius compensation Active Oversizes are not taken into account Line with chamfer G88 G88 machines chamfers at orthogonal paraxial outside corners A preceding longitudinal or transverse element is machined if the tool is located at the X or Z coordinate of the corner before the cycle is executed The chamfers are machined In one pass MANUALplus determines the direction of the chamfer from the tool orientation see Lathe tools on page 419 Tool position at the end of the cycle End point of chamfer Parameters X corner point diameter value Z corner point B chamfer width E reduced feed rate default Active feed rate iE E Cutting radius compensation Active E Oversizes are not taken into account HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 12 Simple ri Cycles m x D 3 god D G O0 60 j i 6 13 neces Cycles 6 13 Recessing Cycles Contour recessing axial G861 radial G862 The cycles machine an axial radial recess in the contour area described by the current tool position and the
140. CP contours Serial interface 442 Service 453 Set axis values 50 540 248 Set T S F 392 Settings transfer Network 444 Printer 445 Serial 445 simple drilling cycle G71 354 Simulation 68 Single cut cycles 88 Single block mode Program execution 64 Simulation 71 Slot milling linear Cycle programming Axial 203 Radial 215 DIN programming Face G791 363 Lateral surface G792 376 Slot linear Cycle programming Slot axial 203 Slot radial 215 DIN programming Face G791 363 Lateral surface G792 376 SOM ne 00 Soft keys 33 Software handshake serial data transfer 445 Special compensation recessing tools 421 Special compensation entering tool compensation 58 Specifications 528 Speed limitation Definition in cycle mode 46 DIN cycle G26 G126 297 Spindle 49 Spindle rotation 82 Spindle speed 47 DIN cycle G97 G197 299 DIN programming 392 Display and cycle mode 46 Spindle utilization 46 Start block search program execution 64 Starting point of contour definition 290 Starting point of ICP contour 243 Stop bits serial data transfer 445 Stopping angle cycle mode 46 Subprograms 406 Surface view simulation 70 Switching functions M functions 82 Switch off 45 Index il Switch on 43 System error 37 System service 455 System start
141. Clamp a workpiece blank diameter 60 mm length 100 mm Machine setup Define the workpiece zero point Measure the tool dimensions Switch to Teach in mode Enter the positioning cycles for tool change ICP contour programming Integrate the ICP contour in the roughing and finishing cycles Machine the thread 470 9 Examples il ICP cutting longitudinal The procedure presupposes that the machine has been set up and the control is in Teach in mode The infeed depth and the allowances for roughing are programmed in the ICP cutting cycle In this example the number 888 of the ICP contour is entered before calling the ICP editor see figure to the top right You then switch to the ICP editor and press Insert element to enter the contour elements iE Since MANUALplus determines the cutting direction from the contour direction the ICP contour must be described in the negative Z direction HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in x 62 000 Z Toot adninistration Organisation _ 2 000 2 S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 ae ee ee ee ee ee ee T 1 0 000 F fel 0 400 mn r i S o 150 m min 0 il 100 ICP cut longitud xA o zj oo P4 f0 3 k 0 1 H ss6 0 th sfiso Ffos 3 888 degr Example Threaded Stud Teach in x 62 000 A 2 000 ao S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 4 ee ee ee ee ee CR
142. Examples of drilling cycles 199 4 8 Milling Cycles 201 Rapid traverse positioning 202 Slot axial 203 Figure axial 204 ICP contour axial 208 Face milling 211 Slot radial 215 Figure radial 216 ICP contour radial 220 Helical slot milling radial 223 Cutting direction for contour milling and pocket milling Examples of milling cycles 226 4 9 Drilling Milling Patterns 22 Drilling milling pattern linear axial 228 Drilling milling pattern circular axial 230 Drilling milling pattern linear radial 232 Drilling milling pattern circular radial 234 Examples of pattern machining 236 4 10 DIN Cycles 239 5 1 ICP Contours 242 5 2 Editing ICP Contours 243 Programming and adding to ICP contours 244 Absolute or incremental dimensions 244 Transitions between contour elements 245 Contour graphics 246 Changing the ICP contour graphics 247 Selection of solutions 248 Contour direction 249 5 3 Importing of DXF Contours 250 Fundamentals 250 DXF Import 251 Configuring the DXF import 252 5 4 Programming Changes to ICP Contours 254 Editing a contour element 254 Adding a contour element 257 Deleting a contour element 257 Splitting a contour 258 Superimposing form elements 259 5 5 ICP Contour Elements Turning Contour
143. Feed per revolution G95 G195 298 Feed per tooth G193 298 Feed rate programming 392 Feed rate contouring speed for manual control parameter 432 Feed rate reduction for drilling Cycle programming Deep hole drilling 194 Drilling cycle 191 DIN programming Deep hole drilling cycle G74 355 Simple drilling cycle G71 354 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Figure definition Face Full circle G304 368 Polygon G307 370 Rectangle G305 369 Lateral surface Full circle G314 380 Polygon G317 382 Rectangle G315 381 Figure milling cycle face G793 364 Figure milling cycle lateral surface G794 377 Figure milling axial cycle programming 204 Figure milling radial cycle programming 216 Files transferring 446 Fine finishing tools 412 Finishing DIN cycle contour finishing G89 318 Finishing cycle longitudinal transverse 105 Finishing tools 412 Form elements ICP Form elements entering 263 Fundamentals 242 Superimposing form elements 259 Function selection 33 G G function programming 287 Gear range 49 Global variables DIN programming 397 Graphic simulation 71 Graphics parameters 434 H Handwheel operation 60 Handwheel resolution 60 78 Handwheel superposition For G350 340 For G351 341 For G352 342 For G353 343 Hardware handshake serial data transfer 445 Helical slot milli
144. G N co 6 3 Definition of wonraa Blank 6 4 Tool Positioning without Machining ining Rapid traverse GO Geometry command GO defines the starting point of contour definition Machining command The tool moves at rapid traverse along the shortest path to the target point X Z Rapid traverse paths can be executed when the spindle is stationary thout A S Parameters gt X target point diameter value Z target point 2 a7 O 0 o lt m X D 3 J G 290 6 DIN Programming il Tool change point G14 The slide moves at rapid traverse to the tool change position In setup mode define permanent coordinates for the tool change point see Defining the tool change position on page 52 Parameters Q sequence default 0 Determines the sequence of traverse Q 0 Diagonal path of traverse 5 m Q 1 First X then Z direction Oo E Q 2 First Z then X direction lt E Q 3 Only X direction Z remains unchanged gt E Q 4 Only Z direction X remains unchanged O IE G14 is converted to the basic commands Rapid traverse S to machine coordinates G701 With G701 target point X l c Z is referenced to the machine zero point The slide is Example G14 ro referenced to the slide reference point pur O am O lt HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 291 il 6 5 Simple Linear and Circular M ments m x DQ 3 o G 6
145. G64 297 Feed per tooth G19 298 Constant feed G94 feed per minute 298 Feed per revolution G95 G195 298 Constant cutting speed G96 G196 299 Spindle speed G97 G197 299 6 7 Tool Tip Milling Cutter Radius Compensation 300 Fundamentals 300 G40 Switch off TRC MCRC 301 G41 G42 Switch on TRC MCERC 301 6 8 Compensation Values 302 Changing the cutter compensation G148 302 Additive compensation G149 303 Compensation of right hand tool nose G150 Compensation of left hand tool nose G151 304 6 9 Zero Point Shifts 305 Zero point shift G51 305 Additive zero point shift G56 306 Absolute zero point shift G59 307 12 6 10 Oversizes 308 Axis parallel oversize G57 308 Contour parallel oversize equidistant G58 309 6 11 Contour Based Turning Cycles 310 Contour definition 310 End of cycle G80 310 Longitudinal contour roughing G817 G818 311 Longitudinal contour roughing with recessing 6819 313 Transverse contour roughing G827 G828 314 Transverse contour roughing with recessing G829 316 Contour parallel roughing G836 317 Contour finishing G89 318 6 12 Simple Turning Cycles 319 Roughing longitudinal G81 319 Roughing transverse G82 320 Simple contour repeat cycle G83 321 Line with radius G87 322 Line with chamfer G88 323 6 13 Recessing Cy
146. HEIDENHAIN User s Manual HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 ome afer eam Mt eo T NC Software imnknnknkkke er BEC Rea English en 9 2007 MANUALplus 4110 Software and Functions This manual describes functions that are available in MANUALplus 4110 controls with NC software numbers 507 807 xx and 526 488 xx The machine manufacturer adapts the features offered by the control to the capabilities of the specific machine tool by setting machine parameters Therefore some of the functions described in this manual may not be among the features provided by the MANUALplus on your machine tool Some of the MANUALplus functions which are not available on every machine are Positioning of spindle M19 and driven tool Machining with the C Axis Please contact your machine manufacturer for detailed information on the features that are supported by your machine tool Many machine manufacturers and HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the MANUALplus controls We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skills and sharing information and ideas with other MANUALoplus users HEIDENHAIN also offers the PC software DataPilot 4110 which is designed to simulate the functions of the MANUALplus 4110 control The DataPilot is suitable for both shop floor programming as well as off location program creation and testing It is also ideal for training purposes The DataPilot can be run on WINDOWS oper
147. I K W R DIN 509 F I K W R P A DIN 76 I K W R and FP determined from the diameter GF All parameters that you enter will be accounted for even if the standard table prescribes other values f you are programming an internal thread it is advisable to preset the thread pitch FP since the diameter of the longitudinal element is not the thread diameter If you have MANUALplus calculate the thread pitch automatically slight deviations may occur 344 DIN 509 E 0 5 6 DIN Programming il Undercut cycle G85 With the function G85 you can machine undercuts according to DIN 509 E DIN 509 F and DIN 76 thread undercut The adjoining cylinder is machined If you position the tool at the cylinder diameter in front of the cylinder If the tool is not positioned at the cylinder diameter it approaches the workpiece on a diagonal path to machine the undercut Parameters X target point diameter value Z target point I finishing oversize depth E DIN 509 E F Finishing oversize default 0 E DIN 76 Undercut depth K undercut length and undercut type E No input Undercut DIN 509 E E K 0 Undercut DIN 509 F E K gt 0 Undercut length for DIN 76 E reduced feed rate for machining the undercut default Active teed rate The control determines the undercut parameters from the cylinder diameter see tables Undercuts can only be executed in orthogonal paraxial contour corn
148. I K for recess turning finishing Q 2 since they define the material to be machined during the finishing cycle Cutting radius compensation Active G57 G58 oversizes are taken into account if I K is not programmed After the cycle has been executed the oversizes are canceled 334 6 DIN Programming il 6 15 Thread Cycles Universal thread cycle G31 G31 cuts threads in any desired direction and position longitudinal tapered or transverse threads internal or external threads You can also machine successions of threads Parameters gt X end point of thread diameter value Z end point of thread F thread pitch U thread depth U gt 0 Internal thread E U lt 0 External thread lateral surface or front face U 999 or 999 Thread depth is calculated I maximum infeed gt R difference in radii default 0 Difference between the diameters at the start of thread XA and end of thread X With descending contours R must be programmed as a negative value R X XA 2 B run in length Distance required to accelerate to the programmed feed rate No input Internal calculation see Thread run in thread run out on page 163 P run out length Distance required to decelerate the slide No input Internal calculation see Thread run in thread run out on page 163 gt A feed angle Range 0 lt A lt 60 No input A arctan 0 5 F U gt V type of approach default
149. Lateral Surface k i ni 6 21 Lateral Surface A m x 3 2 D G ow _ A Figure definition Full circle lateral surface G314 G314 defines a full circle on the lateral surface Program this figure in conjunction with G794 Parameters Z center point CY center point as linear value reference G120 reference diameter C center point Angle to center for angle direction see graphic support window R radius of circle 380 6 DIN Programming il Figure definition Rectangle lateral surface G315 G315 defines a rectangle on the lateral surface Program this figure in conjunction with G794 Parameters Z center point CY center point as linear value reference G120 reference diameter C center point Angle to center for angle direction see graphic support window A angle reference see graphic support window gt K length of rectangle B height width of rectangle gt R chamfer rounding R lt 0 Chamfer length R gt 0 Rounding arc HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 S amp hm gt V C q4 ol q N fe m x O 3 gc D G Ww mah o i a hm V q4 ol q N o Example G317 Figure definition Eccentric polygon lateral surface G317 G317 defines a polygon on the lateral surface Program this figure in conjunction with G794 Parameters Z center poin
150. NUALplus you produce a part in the usual manner by moving the axes with the handwheels and jog controls just like on a conventional lathe In most cases however it is much more convenient to use the cycles offered by MANUALoplus A cycle is a machining step that has already been programmed for you This can be any machining operation from a single cut through to a complex machining task like thread cutting In any case a cycle is always a complete machining step that is immediately executable once you have defined a few parameters that describe the workpiece to be machined In Manual mode the cycles that you program are not stored In Teach in mode each machining step is executed with a cycle and then stored and integrated into a complete cycle program You can subsequently use this cycle program in parts production by repeating it as often as desired in the Program run mode In ICP programming any contour can be defined using linear circular elements and transition elements chamfers roundings undercuts The contour descriptions are included in ICP cycles see ICP Contours on page 242 The DIN programming feature provides commands for simple traversing movements DIN cycles for complex machining tasks switching functions mathematical operations and programming with variables You can either create independent programs that already contain all necessary switching and traversing commands and are executed in the Program r
151. NUALplus 4110 to a aiii ion in 3 12 Convers 3 13 Inch Mode You can operate MANUALplus in the metric or inch Machine Tool managenent organization system for inch mode see illustration to the right dx 0 00000 Units in inch mode X 2 834 AK T 1 dz 0 00000 Coordinates lengths path data in inches Z 2 0473 2 F fl Tea Feed rate in inch revolution or inch min binant 0 No 607 ft min 1 100 0 043 degr Cutting speed in ft min feet min The inch metric setting is also evaluated for the displays and entries in tool management and parameters For accuracies for displays and entries see the table at right The metric inch setting is selected in the parameter Current parameters NC switches Settings Changed metric inch settings do not become effective until the control is restarted Cycle programs Suitch Teach in Edit Cyc prog Program off DIN gt DIN run Cycle programs are always stored in the metric system regardless of whether they were written in metric or inch mode If you load a cycle program while in inch mode MANUALplus automatically converts With coordinate data and path data 2 A the cycle parameters to inches The cycle parameters are then displayed and entered in inches With compensation values 2 z ec DIN programs that were written in metric mode may only be executed in this mode The same appli
152. Nominal IPO position CON Oost WN gt Tool measurement type 2 This parameter defines how to determine the tool set up dimensions in setup mode Type of tool measurement 0 Touch oft 1 Touch probe 2 Optical gauge Measuring feed Feed rate for approaching the touch probe Measuring range Measuring range The tool stops when it has traversed to the maximum measuring range without reaching the touch probe ih rameters HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 433 il Ay rameters Settings 3 PLC parameters 4 menu item Graphics parameters 5 menu item Standard window size 1 Standard workpiece blank 2 Machining 6 menu item Safety clearances 1 434 Set the system to metric mode or inch mode and define the behavior for searching the start block Changes do not take effect until the control is restarted Output to printer non functional Metric Inch 0 Metric 1 Inch Start block search 0 Off 1 On Note The system must be prepared for the start block function The PLC parameters are described in your machine manual These parameters define the display area for the graphic simulation of DIN programs MANUALplus accounts for the height and width of the screen and may even enlarge the window size in the vertical or horizontal direction Minimum X coordinate smallest X coordinate displayed Minimum Z coordinate smallest Z coordinate displayed Delta X vertical expansion Delta Z hor
153. S Teach in ol 150 m min 100 3 888 degr 9 Examples il To transfer the correct solution press Select eer solution 62 000 T 1 dx 0 000 The preceding oblique cut is now unambiguously Si dz 0 000 defined The circular arc still permits several solutions Z 2 000 l F 0 400 mr Z 100 MANUALplus displays the symbol for an unsolved Neer unten tea eiien 150 wala element below the graphics window and depicts the AAOOAOOOODODO ODODO 0 S o 3 888 degr unsolved line in gray color for unsolved elements gt pA Any oe Arc with Mp R 9 3 ICP Example Matrix Teach in x 62 000 11 amp 80 l 2 000 kal FEA 0 400 mmr 150 m min 3 886 degr Arc with Mp R HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 487 il 9 3 ICP Example Matrix Contour element 5 The next connecting contour element is an oblique cut After you have entered the target point X Z and the angle A the line is unambiguously defined MANUALplus displays the possible solutions for selection see figure to the bottom right and on the next page to the top right 488 x 62 000 s T1 fcm l 2 000 az F fel 0 400 mn r Q 20 40 60 80 100120 150 m min S iuivininiiinininnin 02 SE 3 888 degr a Hja o Pajo Am OL FE ti iti CS S ae to Z axis X 62 000 l 2 000 sar
154. Slot axial 203 For milling single slots or slot patterns Figure axial 204 For milling a single figure Axial ICP contour 208 For milling single ICP contours or contour patterns HEIDENHAIN DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Dr Johannes Heidenhain Stralge 5 83301 Traunreut Germany 49 8669 31 0 49 8669 5061 E Mail info heidenhain de Technical support 49 8669 32 1000 Measuring systems amp 49 8669 31 3104 E Mail service ms support heidenhain de TNC support gt 49 8669 31 3101 E Mail service nc support heidenhain de NC programming 49 8669 31 3103 E Mail service nc ogm heidenhain de PLC programming 49 8669 31 3102 E Mail service plc heidenhain de Lathe controls gt 49 8669 31 3105 E Mail service lathe support heidenhain de www heidenhain de Ve 04 354 267 24 1 9 2007 FAW Printed in Germany Subject to change without notice
155. Tool data Lathe tool for external machining WO 3 Tool orientation A 93 Tool angle B 55 Point angle 128 4 Cycle Programming il 4 5 Recessing cycles The recessing cycle group comprises recessing recess turning undercut and parting cycles Simple contours are machined in basic mode complex contours in expanded mode With ICP recessing cycles you can machine any type of contour defined with ICP see ICP Contours on page 242 KE Proportioning of cuts MANUALplus calculates an infeed that is lt infeed depth P Oversizes In expanded mode Cutter radius compensation Active exception Undercut type K Cutting and infeed directions for recessing cycles MANUALplus automatically determines the cutting and infeed directions from the cycle parameters The decisive ones are Basic mode The parameters for starting point X Z Manual mode current tool position and contour starting point X1 contour end point Z2 Expanded mode The parameters for contour starting point X1 Z1 and contour end point X2 Z2 ICP cycles The parameters for starting point X Z Manual mode current tool position and starting point of the ICP contour Undercut position MANUALplus determines the position of an undercut from the cycle parameters for starting point X Z current tool position in Manual mode and corner point of contour X1 Z1 Se Undercuts can only be executed in orthogonal para
156. Z 2 00 Fas 150 m min 100 3 686 degr Caman a a a S Oo 20 40 60 80 100120 A 62 000 a T1 l 2 000 az F fal 0 400 nn r C samitunieciunai 150 m min 100 3 888 degr 9 Examples il Contour element 6 The next connecting contour element Is a vertical line After you have entered the target point X the line and the preceding rounding are unambiguously defined MANUALplus draws the contour elements and clears the symbols for the unsolved elements HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in Toot administration organisation x 62 000 4 eas l 2 000 Az FE Cee 9 400 mar 150 m min 3 6868 degr xs 40 2Ssf 55 A a D lS S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S ol UINNNQNGNNQNGQQQQQQ0QQ00000N0N1 0 Mal 00x i E pt in amp Teach in Toot administration organisation x 62 000 T1 eevee l 2 000 A2 FA 0 400 mmr S domicminiiain S o 150 m min AAORAOAOOARARRARR R 0 oo 3 888 degr Example Threaded Stud a k il Contour element 7 The next connecting contour element Is a chamfer Teach in Toot administration organisation The only parameter that needs to be defined is the i i dx 0 000 chamfer width B x 62 000 AX T 1 0 000 When you program the chamfer the control does not j 7 NANN a ol 0 400 an r yet know t
157. aE Organisation A 62 000 T1 z 0 000 l 2 a 000 Az F ol 20 40 60 80 100120 _ S g 150 m min TT 0 1l 100 3 888 degr Teach in x 62 000 T1 0 2 J 000 reen F E 0 400 mmr 150 m min 3 686 degr Start pt 9 Examples il ICP finishing The ICP contour 777 Matrix is also used for the finishing cycle Checking the ICP finishing cycle With the graphic simulation function you can check the execution of the ICP finishing cycle Graphics soft key You can then transfer the cycle to the cycle program with the Save or Overwrite MANUALplus finishes the contour in the defined contour direction see figure to the bottom right HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 x 62 000 T 1 aston lo 2 000 Fa m 20 40 60 80 100120 S o 150 m min RAOOARODUOROOOARO OOA 0 d Aoo 3 888 degr ICP finish transy me 8 2f2 N T 2 S1220 F 0 2 Teach in EE T x 62 000 ax T 1 _ l 2 000 AZ F fel 0 400 mm r 20 40 60 80100120 S ol 150 m min RADOAROOOAROOOARO MOA 0 d Aoo 3 888 degr 97 000 Z Start pt 9 3 ICP Example Matrix j il 9 3 ICP Example Matrix Cycle program ICP example Matrix Besides the ICP cycles the created cycle program also includes the positioning cycles for tool change see figure to the right Functions of the cycles
158. al surface in Cartesian or polar values You must pay attention to the setting of the Polar soft key MANUALplus distinguishes Cartesian coordinates from polar coordinates by different address letters f Polar coordinates XD X Diameter CS C Angle to positive XK axis Depending on the cycle you can have the MANUALplus display ICP contours for either the face or the lateral surface by calling the selection of ICP contours with the Contour list soft key 268 5 ICP Programming il Entering lines on the face it Select the line direction You enter the dimensions of the line and then define the transition to the next contour element Parameters XS YS starting point Cartesian coordinates XD CS starting point polar coordinates XK YK target point Cartesian coordinates X C target point polar coordinates L length of line F special feed Select the line direction You enter the dimensions of the line and then define the transition to the next contour element Parameters XS YS starting point Cartesian coordinates XD CS starting point polar coordinates gt XK YK target point in Cartesian coordinates X C target point polar coordinates A angle to XK axis for direction of angle see graphic support window L length of line F special feed HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 5 6 ICP Contour Elements a Face j i 5 6 ICP Contour Elemen
159. al cycle see figure to the upper right If the contour Is described in the negative X axis direction the control uses a transverse cycle see figure at center right ICP cut longitudinal transverse roughing MANUALplus machines the workpiece in the contour direction ICP finishing longitudinal transverse MANUALplus finishes the workpiece in the contour direction iE An ICP contour which was defined for a roughing operation with the cycle ICP cut longitudinal cannot be used for machining with the cycle ICP cut transverse You can reverse the contour direction with the Turn contour soft key HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 5 2 Editing ICP i i il 5 3 Importing of DXF Co 5 3 Importing of DXF Contours Fundamentals Contours available in DXF format can be imported into the ICP editor DXF contours describe contour trains for ICP cycles recessing cutting and milling cycles For contour trains for recessing and cutting cycles DXF layers should contain only one contour For contours for milling cycles multiple DXF contours can be contained and imported DXF import is available as of software versions 507 807 11 and 526 488 03 Requirements of a DXF contour or DXF file Only two dimensional elements The contour must be in a separate layer without dimension lines without wraparound edges etc Depending on the setup of the lathe contours for recessing or cutting cycles must be either befor
160. all machining operations in the standard quadrant The tools are alSo described and dimensioned for the standard quadrant even if they are inserted in the additional tool holder Mirroring does not become effective until the machining of the workpiece i e when the additional tool holder is executing the machining operation Feed rate F is the identification letter for feed data Depending on which mode of the Feed rate soft key is active data is entered in Millimeters per spindle revolution feed per revolution Millimeters per minute feed per minute On the screen you can tell the type of feed rate from the unit of measure in the input field You can change the feed value with the feed compensation controller feed override range 0 to 150 48 Status Cycle ON Cycle or program execution is active Status Cycle OFF Cycle or program execution is not active 3 Machine Mode of Operation il Spindle S is the identification letter for spindle data Depending on which mode of the Constant speed soft key is active data is entered in Revolutions per minute constant speed Meters per minute constant cutting speed The input range is limited by the maximum spindle speed You define the speed limitation in Set T S F in machine parameters 805 855 or in DIN programming with the G26 command The speed limit remains in effect until a new speed limit value is programmed The speed compe
161. am run control M01 Optional stop In Program run mode you can use M00 Program STOP Continuous run to determine whether cycle programs or DIN M01 Optional STOP programs are to be interrupted at an M01 command If this function is disabled MANUALplus interrupts execution of the program when M30 End of program M01 is reached and continues program run after Cycle START has been pressed M30 End of program indicates the end of a program or subprogram M30 does not need to be programmed If you press Cycle START after M30 program execution is repeated from the M417 Deactivate protection zone monitoring start of the program M99 End of program with return jump to start of program or to the defined block number and restart MANUALplus restarts program execution from The start of program if no next block NS is defined or From the block number NS if a next block NS is defined M99 NS End of program with return jump to start of program or to block number NS and restart M418 Activate protection zone monitoring M417 deactivates protection zone monitoring M418 activates protection zone monitoring GF Note on using M99 All modal functions feed rate spindle speed tool number etc which are effective at the end of program remain in effect when the program is restarted You should therefore reprogram the modal functions at the start of program or at the startup block 408 6 DIN Programming il Machine commands Th
162. ameters X Z starting point Z1 starting point of contour if With return is active X2 contour end point T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Cycle run if With return is active 1 Move from X Z to contour starting point Z1 2 Move to contour end point X2 at programmed feed rate 3 Retract and return to starting point on paraxial path 92 4 Cycle Programming Linear machining at angle Call the single cut menu Select the Linear machining at angle cycle With With return soft key Off When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position On Tool returns to the starting point Linear machining at angle MANUALplus calculates the target position and moves the tool on a straight line from the starting point to the target position at the programmed feed rate When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position Contour linear at angle With return MANUALplus calculates the target position The tool then approaches the workpiece executes the linear cut and returns to the starting point at the end of cycle see figures at right Cutter radius compensation is taken Into account Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 starting point of contour if With return is active X2 Z2 contour end point A starting angle range 180 lt A lt 180 T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F fe
163. ample G94 m x D 3 D G z G oh T T 1 D J Zz Y a o 3 3 amp il Constant cutting speed G96 G196 m x D 3 pei D G G O G96 G196 defines a constant cutting speed L G96 The speed of the spindle depends on the X position of the tool tip G196 The spindle speed depends on the diameter of the tool Parameters gt S cutting speed in m min or ft min Spindle speed G97 G197 m x D 3 2 D G NI G oa NI G97 G197 defines a constant spindle speed L G97 For the spindle G197 For spindle 1 driven tool Parameters S speed in revolutions per minute HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 29 co 6 6 Feed Rate and a Speed nsation O O N z 5 cc em E sr O 2 2 fi 3 Je 6 7 Tool Tip Milling Cutter Radius Compensation Fundamentals Tool tip radius compensation TRC If TRC is not used the theoretical tool tip is the reference point for the paths of traverse This might lead to inaccuracies when the tool moves along non paraxial paths of traverse The TRC function corrects programmed paths of traverse see Tool tip radius compensation TRC on page 28 With Q 0 the TRC reduces the feed rate at arcs G2 G3 G12 G13 and rounding arcs if the shifted radius lt original radius The special teed rate is corrected when a rounding a
164. an axial hole milled contour in Lathe view and the depth of a radial hole milled contour in Face view 70 Program run Tool management Organization X 72 002 a T 1 a o o00 Z 92 001 fe FE ee 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 7 S PCE Tea a Aes eg ES 0 S o 185 m min D 5000 r min 100 0 043 degr ICP contour pattern cir ax x 100 53 892 Z Program run Tool management Organization X 72 002 x T 1 a o o00 Z 92 001 fe FE ee 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S O m m ae Uaf ai aed ee Pa 0 S o 185 m min D 5000 r min 100 0 043 degr Slot pattern linear radial sso sa 22S 60 000 2 3 Machine Mode of Operation il Graphic elements elements and tool movements in the graphics window Switch the graphic simulation on Origin of the coordinate system The workpiece zero point serves as the origin of the Magnify reduce shift view coordinate system Contour At the beginning of a cycle simulation the E os programmed contour of that cycle is depicted in yee programi O cyan In the Teach in mode you can display the E On Cycles are simulated up to the next tool preceding contour elements of the cycle program change D function Display contour elements Off MANUALplus stops after each cycle To Light dot Start the subsequent cycle press Graphic The light dot small white rectangle represents the Continue rap theoretical tool point Di EE TIE Feed paths i These
165. an coordinates Ji end point Pattern distance Cartesian coordinates gt R length Distance between first and last position gt Ri length Distance to next position gt Q number of holes figures default 1 Parameter combinations for defining the starting point and the pattern positions Starting point of pattern XK YK EX C Pattern positions E Jand Q E i Ji and Q m R Aand Q Ri Ai and Q HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 c hm T E A N N m x D 3 D Q x A w j i c ho T E A N N Examples for command sequences Ww 84 6 DIN Programming il Circular pattern face G745 With cycle G745 you can machine hole patterns or figure patterns in which the individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a circle or circular arc on the face If ZE has not been defined the drilling milling cycle of the next NC block is used as a reference Using this principle you can combine pattern definitions with E Drilling cycles G71 G74 G36 E The milling cycle for a linear slot G791 E The contour milling cycle with independent contour G793 Parameters XK center of pattern Cartesian coordinates YK center of pattern Cartesian coordinates gt Z starting point of drilling milling operation ZE end point of drilling milling operation X diameter polar coordinates C angle polar coordinates
166. and tool nose 304 G151 Compensation of left hand tool nose 304 G152 Zero point shift C axis 359 G153 Standardize C axis 359 G193 Feed per tooth 298 G195 Feed per revolution 298 G196 Constant cutting speed 299 G197 Spindle speed 299 G2 Circular path 293 G20 Chuck part cylinder tube 288 G204 Wait for moment 391 G21 Workpiece blank contour 289 G25 Undercut contour 344 G26 Speed limitation 297 G3 Circular path 293 G304 Figure definition Full circle face 368 G305 Figure definition Rectangle face 369 G307 Figure definition Eccentric polygon face 370 G31 Universal thread cycle 335 G314 Figure definition Full circle lateral surface 380 G315 Figure definition Rectangle lateral surface 381 G317 Figure definition Eccentric polygon lateral surface 382 G32 Single thread 337 G33 Thread single path 338 G35 Metric ISO thread 339 G350 Simple longitudinal single start thread 340 G351 Extended longitudinal multi start thread 341 G352 Tapered API thread 342 G353 Tapered thread 343 G36 Tapping 357 G4 Period of dwell 391 G40 Switch off TRC MCRC 301 G41 Switch on TRC MCRC 301 G42 Switch on TRC MCRC 301 G51 Zero point shift 305 G56 Additive zero point shift 306 G57 Axis parallel oversize 308 G58 Contour parallel oversize 309 G59 Absolute zero point shift 307 G60 D
167. angle Single oblique cut Circular machining Single circular cut for cutting direction see menu key Machine a chamfer Machine a rounding Call an M function 4 Cycle Programming il Rapid traverse positioning Call the single cut menu IN Select the Rapid traverse positioning cycle The tool moves at rapid traverse from the starting point to the target point Cycle parameters gt X Z starting point X2 Z2 target point T tool number HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 3 Single ores 4 3 Single cull cles Approach the tool change position Call the single cut menu Select the Rapid traverse positioning cycle T Change Activate the T Change approach function approach The tool moves at rapid traverse from the current position to the tool change position see Defining the tool change position on page 52 Cycle parameters Q sequence default O 0 Diagonal path of traverse 1 First X then Z direction 2 First Z then X direction 3 X direction only 4 Z direction only T tool number After reaching the tool change position MANUALplus switches to the tool indicated in T 90 4 Cycle Programming il Linear machining longitudinal Call the single cut menu Select the Longitudinal linear machining cycle With With return soft key return Off When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position On Tool returns
168. angle of 45 Return and approach for next pass Repeat steps 3 to 6 until contour end point X2 or Z2 is reached Return to starting point on paraxial path 112 4 Cycle Programming il Finishing plunge longitudinal transverse Call the Roughing longitudinal transverse cycles Select Plunge longitudinal see figures at right Select Plunge transverse see figures on the following page Finishing Press the Finishing run soft key run The cycle finishes the contour area from X1 Z1 to X2 Z2 At the end of cycle the tool returns to starting point X Z The steeper the tool plunges into the material the greater the feed rate decrease max 50 Pay attention to the dimensions of facing tools see Facing tools on page 419 att Danger of collision If the tool angle and the tool point angle have not been defined the tool plunge cuts at the plunging angle If the tool and point angles have been defined the tool plunge cuts at the maximum possible plunging angle In this case the resulting contour will not be completely finished and may need to be reworked Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour starting point X2 Z2 contour end point A plunging angle default 0 Range 0 lt A lt 90 W end angle Oblique cut at contour end Range 0 lt W lt 90 T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUAL
169. anufacturer Syntax V Ex y x slide 1 y bit 1 16 E nterrogate sequential events The tool life monitoring function and the function for searching the start block trigger sequential events Syntax V Ex 1 x event 20 90 E 20 Life of this tool has expired global information 90 Define start block O not active 1 active E Read write tool compensation Syntax V Dx y x T number y length compensation X Y or Z HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 N 2 lt Example V variable 6 26 Programming o i 6 26 gt rogramminififariables Information contained in variables V901 V902 and V919 are used for the G functions G901 G902 and G903 see table GF X values are saved as radius values Note Functions G901 G902 and G903 overwrite the variable This also applies to variables that have not yet been evaluated Note on interpreter stop G909 The MANUALoplus pre interprets approx 15 to 20 NC blocks If variables are assigned shortly before the evaluation old values would be processed An interpreter stop ensures that the variables contain the new value G909 stops the pre interpretation The NC blocks are processed up to G909 after G909 the subsequent NC blocks are processed C Program an interpreter stop if variables or external events are modified shortly before the block Is run Each interpreter stop lengthens the run time of the
170. araxial path 134 4 Cycle Programming il Recessing radial axial finishing Call the recessing menu Select the Recessing radial cycle see figures at right Select Recessing axial see figures on the following page ae Press the Finishing run soft key The cycle finishes the number of recesses defined in Q The parameters X Z to X2 Z2 define the first recess position recess depth and recess width Cycle parameters gt X Z starting point X2 Z2 contour end point gt DX DZ distance to subsequent recess with respect to the preceding recess Q number of recess cycles default 1 T tool number gt S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 Nevessinggye es k i 45 Recessingijcles Cycle run 1 Calculate the recess positions 2 Approach workpiece for next recess from starting point or from last recess on paraxial path 3 Finish first side and the contour valley up to position just before recess end point 4 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path 5 Finish the second side and the remainder of the contour valley 6 Repeat 2 to 5 until all recesses have been machined 7 Return to starting point on paraxial path 136 4 Cycle Programming il Recessing radial axial finishing Expanded Call the recessing menu Select the Recessing radial cycle see figures at right
171. are handshake does not require the transmission of RIS CTS signals over the data transfer cable Device name Designation of the interface used in most cases COM2 Backup name Parameters and tool data are stored in the remote station under the file name entered for Backup name The Backup name is displayed for your information It can be changed by service personnel only HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 E Transfer o il a Transfer Transferring programs files When selecting a program place the highlight on the desired program and press Mark You can also select all programs with Mark all A marked program is Indicated with a diamond To unmark a program simply press Mark once again If you want to transfer a single program place the highlight on the program and press Transmit file or Receive file Below the window MANUALplus displays the file size of the highlighted program and the time it was last changed With DIN programs DIN macros you can also view the NC program with Program view Parameters and tool data are sent received as blocks During transfer MANUALplus displays the following information in a transfer window see figure at bottom right The transfer status in the form of a small red square which moves between the control and the PC during transfer if transfer is interrupted the red square remains stationary The name of the program which is currently being transferred
172. are not taken into account Parameters Z end point gt C end angle gt K length of slot referenced to the cutter center gt A angle of slot reference see graphic support window X milling floor diameter value J milling depth J is defined The tool approaches to safety clearance and then mills the slot E Jis not defined The milling cycle starts from the tool position gt P maximum infeed default Total depth in one infeed F feed rate for infeed default Active feed rate Possible parameter combinations for definition of the end point E End point Z end angle C E Slot length K angle A Notes E Rotate the spindle to the desired angle position before calling G792 E f you use a spindle positioning device no C axis a radial slot is machined parallel to the Z axis 376 6 DIN Programming il Contour and figure milling cycle lateral surface G794 i G794 mills figures or open or closed independent contours on the r lateral surface G794 is followed by 1T E The figure to be milled with E Circle G314 rectangle G315 or polygon G31 7 Conclusion of contour definition G80 E The independent contour with E Starting point G110 Contour definition G111 G112 G113 Conclusion of contour definition G80 Parameters X milling top edge XE milling floor gt P maximum infeed default Total depth in one infeed U overlap facto
173. arget point X the line is unambiguously defined MANUALplus draws the contour elements in the graphics window The ICP contour has been completely defined Back concludes ICP programming and Input finished concludes the ICP cycle 480 Teach in x 62 000 1 Z 2 000 2 S Oo 20 40 60 80 100120 Caman N N N a N Toot adninistration Organisation _ T1 fcm F fol 0 400 mm r x S o 150 m min 3 888 degr xs 55s 2sf 70 se o en ES Teach in 62 000 2 000 2 S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 ae eee ee ee eee eee eee a l Target pt in amp 0 400 mn r F Eo TA o A 150 m min 3 6868 degr A TA E 9 Examples il Checking the ICP cutting cycle With the graphic simulation function you can check the execution of the cycle Graphics soft key You can then transfer the cycle to the cycle program with the Save or Overwrite ICP finishing The ICP contour 888 threaded stud is also used for the finishing cycle HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in Toot administration ton 62 00 11 tm 2 gt 2 00 F A S Q 20 40 60 80 100120 S g 150 m min OAOAOROROROOOOOOODAOMIMMI 0 i 100x 3 888 degr x 62 000 1 T 10 amp w l 2 000 a2 F fel 0 400 mn r S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S g 150 m min OAOAOROROROCOOROODADMMMMM 0
174. ased until Cycles m x D 2 D G O0 N Transverse contour roughing with recessing G829 The cycle machines the contour area described by the current tool position and the data defined in the subsequent blocks in transverse direction with recessing see Contour definition on page 310 Parameters gt Z cutting limit The control machines up to the cutting limit gt P maximum infeed The proportioning of cuts is calculated so that an abrasive cut is avoided and the infeed distance Is lt P E plunge feed The tool enters the material at the plunge feed E E 0 Descending contours are not machined No entry The steeper the tool plunges into the material the greater the feed rate decrease max 50 gt H type of departure default 1 H 0 Machine contour outline after each pass H 1 Retract at 45 machine contour outline after last pass H 2 Retract at 45 do not machine contour outline I oversize X diameter value default O gt K oversize Z default 0 Note on the execution of the cycle MANUALplus automatically determines the cutting and infeed directions from the current tool position relative to the starting point end point of the contour area Tool position at the end of the cycle Cycle starting point C The tool must be located outside the defined contour area Cutting radius compensation Active G57 G58 oversizes are taken into account if
175. ated parameters are AEC O The cursor is located on an address letter of a parameter Extend Ne Function selection menu can be IEE used to add further NC commands Change word AIl parameters of the function can be edited Delete word Only the parameter concerned is deleted An NC command can be changed within a group You can for instance change the number of a G command but you cannot change the G command into an M command The editor deletes the parameters that are no longer required after a change 6 2 Editing a eal Address parameters Enter the address parameters as follows Absolute dimension The dimension is referenced to the workpiece zero point Incremental dimension The dimension is referenced to the last active coordinate Variable The value of the variable or the result of the mathematical expression represents the value of the address parameter Simplified geometry programming This coordinate is calculated by MANUALplus if mathematically possible The input data that are supported by the individual address parameters depend on the meaning of this parameter MANUALplus inhibits all functions that are not permissible Absolute dimensions is the default setting for the input fields If you wish to define incremental dimensions simply press Increment The address letter receives the attribute i for example Zi The attribute is transferred to the DIN program The selected absolute or incr
176. ating systems Intended place of operation The MANUALplus 4110 complies with EN 55022 Class A and is intended primarily for operation in industrially zoned areas Contents HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 roduction and Fundamentals s of Operation ine Mode of Operation le Programming Programming Programming Management Mode janization Mode of Operation nples les and Overviews 1 1 The MANUALolus 20 The C axis 20 1 2 Features 21 1 3 MANUALplus Design 22 Lathe design 22 Machine operating panel 24 1 4 Axis Designations and Coordinate System 25 Axis designations 25 Coordinate system 25 Absolute coordinates 26 Incremental coordinates 26 Polar coordinates 26 1 5 Machine Reference Points 2 Machine zero point 27 Workpiece zero point 27 Reference points 27 1 6 Tool Dimensions 28 Tool length 28 Tool compensation 28 Tool tip radius compensation TRC 28 Milling cutter radius compensation MCRC 29 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 2 1 The MANUALplus Screen 32 2 2 Operation and Data Input 30 Modes of operation 33 Menu selection 33 Soft keys 33 Data input 34 List operations 34 Alphanumeric keyboard 35 2 3 Error Messages 36 Direct error messages 36 Error display 36 Clearing an error message 37 System e
177. axial Z1 starting point of hole default Drilling starts from position Z Z2 end point of hole Drilling radial X1 starting point of hole default Drilling starts from position X X2 end point of hole F If AB and V are programmed the feed rate is reduced by 50 during both pre drilling and through boring MANUALplus uses the tool parameter driven tool to determine whether the programmed spindle speed and feed rate apply to the spindle or the driven tool HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 A N q j il T O 4 7 Drillin Cycle run 1 2 192 Position spindle to spindle angle C in Manual mode machining starts from the current spindle angle If defined move at rapid traverse to Z1 axial X1 radial Start drilling at reduced feed rate if defined Depending on V Drill at programmed feed rate to End point Z2 axial End point X2 radial Remain at end of hole for dwell time E if defined or Drill at programmed feed rate to position Z2 AB axial X2 AB radial Drill at reduced feed rate to End point Z2 axial End point X2 radial If X1 Z1 has been defined retract to Starting point of hole Z1 axial Starting point of hole X1 radial If X1 Z1 has not not been defined retract to Starting point Z axial Starting point X radial 4 Cycle Programming il Deep hole drilling axial radial Call the drilling menu Select the Deep
178. axial path oOo Fh WN HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 nevessinagre es i il 4 5 Recessiniffvcles Recess turning radial axial finishing Call the recessing menu Select the Recess turning cycle Select the Recess turning radial cycle see figures at right Select Recess turning axial See figures on the following page Eee Press the Finishing run soft key The cycle finishes the contour area from X Z to X2 Z2 see also Recess turning on page 143 E With oversizes K for the workpiece blank you define the material to be machined during the finishing cycle It is therefore absolutely necessary to define the oversizes for recess turning finishing Cycle parameters X Z starting point X2 Z2 contour end point I K workpiece blank oversize X Z T tool number gt S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution 148 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run 1 2 3 Approach contour area from X Z Finish first side then finish contour valley up to position just before contour end point Z2 X2 Move on paraxial path E radially to X Z2 E axially to Z X2 Finish second side then finish remainder of contour valley Return to starting point on paraxial path HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 Recessinggycles b i 4 5 Recessinffvcles Recess turning radial axial finishing Expanded Call the recessing menu
179. bar tube The cycle describes the workpiece blank and the setup used This information is evaluated during the simulation Cycle parameters X outside diameter Z length including transverse allowance and clamping range I inside diameter for workpiece blank tube K right edge transverse allowance B clamping range J type of clamping 0 Not clamped 1 Externally clamped 2 Internally clamped 86 4 Cycle Programming il ICP workpc blank contour Select the function for defining a workpiece blank Select ICP workpiece blank contour The cycle integrates the workpiece blank defined with ICP and describes the setup used This information is evaluated during the simulation Cycle parameters X clamping diameter Z clamping position B clamping range J type of clamping 0 Not clamped 1 Externally clamped 2 Internally clamped N ICP contour number HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 2 Workpiece ee 4 3 Single cull tes 4 3 Single Cut Cycles 88 In the single cut cycles you position the tool in rapid traverse perform linear or circular cuts machine chamfers or rounding arcs and enter M functions x 72 vl 3 T1 oo Z 52 001 FE ree 20 40 60 80 Mi 0 D 5000 r min o 0 043 degr oo dem S S Rapid traverse positioning Approach the tool change position Linear machining longitudinal transverse Single longitudinal transverse cut Linear machining at
180. cal variables E f a subprogram is to be executed repeatedly enter the number of times the subprogram is to be repeated in the parameter number repeats Q Dialog texts You can define the parameter descriptions that precede follow the input fields in an external subprogram MANUALplus automatically sets the unit of measure for parameter values to the metric system or inches A maximum of 19 descriptions can be entered The parameter descriptions can be positioned within the subprogram as desired Parameter descriptions I beginning on n s parameter text up to 16 characters I end pon Parameter designations la Ib n Conversion number for units of measurement 0 Non dimensional E 1 mm or inches E 2 mm rev or inch rev E 3 mm min or inch min E 4 m min or feet min 5 Rev min 6 Degrees E 7 um or uinch HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 m X D 3 pi D 40 6 29 aeons 6 30 M Functions With M functions you can control the program run and program switching functions for the machine machine commands Select M function mw N a a S 6 30 Enter the number of the M function Define the parameters if applicable M commands for program run control M00 Program stop interrupts execution of a DIN program Program run is continued after Cycle START has been pressed M commands for progr
181. ccordingly The superposition is limited to the following range E X direction Depends on the current cutting depth the starting and end points of the thread are not exceeded E Z direction No more than one turn the starting and end points of the thread are not exceeded E E Cycle STOP becomes effective at the end of a thread cut The feed rate and spindle speed overrides are not effective during cycle execution Handwheel superposition is activated with a switch located on the machine operating panel Feedforward control is switched off 340 6 DIN Programming il Extended longitudinal multi start thread G351 G351 machines a single or multi start longitudinal thread internal or external thread with variable pitch The thread starts at the current tool position and ends at the end point X Z Parameters gt Z end point of thread F thread pitch U thread depth U gt 0 Internal thread U lt 0 External thread lateral surface or front face U 999 or 999 Thread depth is calculated gt I maximum infeed no input is calculated from the thread pitch and the thread depth A feed angle default 30 Range 60 lt A lt 60 A gt 0 Infeed on right thread flank A lt 0O Infeed on left thread flank D number of thread starts default 1 J remaining cutting depth default 1 100 mm gt E variable pitch default 0 E gt 0 Increase the pitch per revolution by E E lt 0 Decrease the pitch
182. cessing or roughing cycle Parameters X oversize X diameter value Z oversize Z The following cycles take the oversizes into account Roughing cycles G81 G817 G818 G819 G82 G827 G828 G829 G83 E Recessing cycles G86x Recess turning cycles G81x G82x The cycles G81 G82 and G83 do not cancel the oversizes after execution of the cycle If the oversizes are programmed with G57 and in the cycle itself the cycle oversizes apply 308 m x O D G o1 N 6 DIN Programming il Contour parallel oversize equidistant G58 G58 defines a contour parallel oversize G58 is programmed before recessing or roughing cycles T T Se Parameters P oversize A negative oversize is permitted with the cycle G89 6 1 The following cycles take the oversizes into account E Roughing cycles G817 G818 G819 G827 G828 G829 G83 Recessing cycles G86x Recess turning cycles G81x G82x The cycle G83 does not cancel the oversizes after execution of the cycle ce If an oversize is programmed with G58 and in the cycle the oversize from the cycle is used m x O 3 2 G o1 00 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 30 6 11 Contour Based un Cycles 6 11 Contour Based Turning Cycles Contour definition For contour based cycles turning recessing recess turning cycles the cycle call is followed by the cont
183. ciple you can combine pattern definitions with drilling cycles G71 G74 G36 or milling cycles figure definitions with G314 G315 G317 Parameters Z center of pattern polar C angle Center of pattern polar X starting point of drilling milling operation diameter value XE end point of drilling milling operation diameter value K diameter Pattern diameter A starting angle position of the first hole figure K diameter Pattern diameter default Current X position W end angle position of the last hole figure Wi end angle distance to the next position Q number of holes figures default 1 gt V direction of rotation default 0 Position of holes figures required if W is defined E V 0 Holes are placed on the longer arc E V 1 Holes are arranged clockwise starting at A E V 2 Holes are arranged counterclockwise starting at A HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 c aes T E A N N m X D 3 lt 3 D G SJ D eT o i 6 22 Pattern ae ining m x lt 9D g D h e e 3 9D Q D 2 S D O D n Oo 90 6 DIN Programming il 6 23 Other G Functions Period of dwell G4 The system interrupts the program run for the programmed length of time before executing the next command If G4 is programmed together with a path of traverse in the same block the dwell time only becomes effective afte
184. ck pean aa Toot adninistration organisation the execution of the ICP recessing cycle Graphics lt lt soft key Activating the Single block function allows x 62 3 000 E T 4 you to check the paths of traverse more carefully one 5 300 wal block at a time In the figure to the upper right the l 2 3 000 Azn a F fel recessing operation has not been completed yet 20 40 60 80 100120 S g 180 m min AAOAOCROOROOROROORIMMIIMMIM 0 5 You can then transfer the cycle to the cycle program 1 oos 356 121 degr with Save or Overwrite 62 000 Z Start pt T 4 Graphic Extra Over Back Continue func write en eea g Teach in Toot administration organisation ICP contour 666 recess which was defined in the dx 0 000 above steps is also used for the finishing cycle x 62 000 Ax T 4 dz 0 000 l 2 000 azm F fel 0 200 mn r S Q 20 40 60 80 100120 S o 180 m min TTT TTT 0 i 100x 356 121 degr radial finishing xA O zj oo H 666 o tH o sf80 Flo 2 O gt Q D T N Q O D o Q x Lu Start pt Edit Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back ICP list position tool speed finished HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 505 il Example Recessing Cycle Checking the ICP recessing radial finishing cycle With the graphic simulation function you can check the execution of t
185. cket milling Roughing 3 4 5 6 7 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling plane Depending on J machine the milling plane either from the inside towards the outside or vice versa Plunge to the next milling plane Repeat 4 to 5 until the milling depth is reached Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis Pocket milling Finishing 3 4 Depending on R approach the workpiece and plunge to the first milling plane Finish machine the edge of the pocket one working plane after the other Depending on J finish machine the milling floor either from the inside towards the outside or vice versa Finish machine the pocket at the programmed feed rate Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 8 Millin i il T O 4 8 Millin ICP contour axial Call the milling menu Select ICP contour axial Depending on the parameters the cycle mills a contour or roughs finishes a pocket on the face Notes on parameters functions Machining of contour or pocket defined in U Milling direction depends on definition in H and the direction of tool rotation see Cutting direction for contour milling and pocket milling on page 224 Milling cutter compensation effective except for contour milling with J 0 Approach and departure For closed contours the point of the surface normal from t
186. cle Milling cycle roughing The roughing cycle used is ICP contour pattern circular axial After defining the cycle parameters press Edit ICP to call the ICP programming function CS The pattern diameter is K 0 since the exact position of the first milling contour is defined and the ICP contours are symmetrically arranged around the face center 508 X 139 val ax T 40 feon Z 49 T1 az T F fel Elo E ma o S aiininbieeiaiaid 0 20 40 60 80 100120 a 0 m min o 72 773 degr ICP contour pattern cir ax cj 100 Sh 4 TT ss fo wfo oo Keo aao S wfo of tjo sfa0 rjo Start pt Pattern Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back linear list position tool speed finished X 139 A ax T 40 feon Z 9 13 2 F Ea AEA 0 20 40 60 80 100120 ioe ICP contour pattern cir ax uf A COCO Hpo YC e2 ufos ms Wi 7 n2005 mM fy jo 05 1 Upper edge of milling Edit Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back TEP list position tool speed finished 9 Examples il Contour element 1 First you enter the rough contour Then you use the superimposition function to define the roundings The contour starts with a horizontal line The starting point of the ICP contour is defined in XS YS when programming the first contour element The element is defined unambiguously after the length of line has been entered MANUALplus d
187. cles 324 Contour recessing axial G861 radial G862 324 Contour recessing cycle finishing axial G863 radial G864 326 Simple recessing cycle axial G865 radial G866 328 Recessing finishing axial G867 radial G868 329 Simple recessing cycle G86 330 6 14 Recess Turning Cycles 331 Function of recess turning cycles 331 Simple recess turning cycle longitudinal G811 transverse G821 332 Recess turning cycle longitudinal G815 transverse G825 8333 6 15 Thread Cycles 335 Universal thread cycle G31 335 Single thread G32 337 Thread single path G33 338 Metric ISO thread G35 339 Simple longitudinal single start thread G350 340 Extended longitudinal multi start thread G351 341 Tapered API thread G352 342 Tapered thread G35 343 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 14 6 16 Undercut Cycles 344 Undercut contour G25 344 Undercut cycle G85 345 Undercut according to DIN 509 E with cylinder machining G851 347 Undercut according to DIN 509 F with cylinder machining 6852 348 Undercut according to DIN 76 with cylinder machining 6853 349 Undercut type U G856 350 Undercut type H G857 351 Undercut type K G858 352 6 17 Parting Cycle 353 Parting cycle G859 353 6 18 Drilling Cycles 354 Drilling cycle G71 354 Deep hole drilling cycle G74 355 Tapping G36 357 Threa
188. cles 4 4 Roughin 120 4 Cycle Programming il ICP roughing longitudinal transverse Call the Roughing longitudinal transverse cycles my EE EE EE EEE ee Select ICP cut longitudinal see figures at right Select ICP cut transverse see figures on the following page The cycle machines the area defined by X Z and the ICP contour taking the oversizes into account att Danger of collision If the tool angle and the tool point angle have not been defined the tool plunge cuts at the plunging angle If the tool and point angles have been defined the tool plunge cuts at the maximum possible plunging angle In this case the resulting contour will not be completely finished and may need to be reworked Cycle parameters X Z starting point P infeed depth Maximum infeed depth P gt 0 Machine contour outline P lt Q Retract by the safety clearance at 45 I K oversize X Z N ICP contour number T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 4 Roughin 7 il T O 4 4 Roughin Cycle run A W N Calculate the proportioning of cuts infeed Approach workpiece on paraxial path for first pass from X Z For sloping contours plunge into the material at reduced feed rate Machine the workpiece according to the calculated proportioning of cuts Depending on algebraic sign of P P gt 0 Machi
189. compensation 0 No compensation 1 Value of backlash compensation is added Value of backlash compensation For linear axis Z parameter 1166 the value defined in Set protect zone is transferred Protection zone dimension negative mm Protection zone dimension positive mm Feed rate for rapid traverse mm min Reference dimension mm Configuration parameters j il Ay rameters Settings SP 1 Time calculation for simulation general SP 20 Time calculation for simulation M function SP 21 Standard window size SP 22 Standard workpiece blank SP 23 438 Set the system to metric mode or inch mode and define the behavior for searching the start block Output to printer non functional Metric Inch 0 Metric 1 Inch Start block search 0 Off 1 On Note The system must be prepared for the start block function The times set in this parameter are taken into account for calculating the idle machine times Tool change time sec Gear shifting time sec Time allowance for M functions sec For M functions the control calculates the time allowance for M functions that was defined in parameter 20 In parameter 21 you can enter up to 10 M functions for which an additional time allowance is to be calculated 1st M function Time allowance sec 2nd M function Time allowance sec These parameters define the display area for the graphic simulation of DIN programs MANUALplus accounts
190. computer name and the share name are set on the PC of the remote station Serial Auto logon PC rect ial dd gt gt Save Back Yes Automatic logon is active No Automatic logon is not active User name For automatic logon Password For automatic logon 444 8 Organization Mode of Operation Settings in the Serial and Printer modes Baud rate n bits per second Word length 7 or 8 bits per character Parity Select even odd parity or no parity The setting word length 8 bits is required whenever you want to use even odd parity Stop bits 1 1 1 2 and 2 stop bits Protocol Hardware hardware handshake The receiver informs the sender through RTS CTS signals that it is temporarily not able to receive data A hardware handshake presupposes that the RTS CTS signals are hardwired in the data transfer cable XON XOFF software handshake The receiving terminal transmits XOFF if it is temporarily unable to receive data As soon as the receiver can receive further data is signalizes XON again The software handshake does not require the transmission of RIS CTS signals over the data transfer cable ON XOFF software handshake The receiver transmits XON at the beginning of data transmission to indicate that It is ready to receive When the receiver is temporarily not able to receive data it sends XOFF As soon as the receiver can receive further data is signalizes XON again The softw
191. contour element in the graphics window seo zs ooo e E WA Target pt in Z 62 000 a T 4 0 000 l 2 000 e E FE 0 200 mn r S Q 20 40 60 80 100120 S g 180 m min HEATED OD cox 256 121 degr r O Q O T 7 qd O D cc X Lu Arc with Mp R a de a HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 497 il Example Recessing Cycle Contour element 2 The next connecting contour element is a circular arc Only its radius is known The circular arc still permits several solutions MANUALplus displays the corresponding symbol below the graphics window and depicts the arc in gray which is the color used for identifying unsolved elements 498 62 000 T 4 koo 2 000 o FE ee S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 180 m min wnnivonivonivninivnininnin 100x 356 121 degr Teach in dx 0 000 62 000 as T4 a ow 2 000 S F fal 0 200 mn r S aE ne a Ere oE Aee S g 180 m min winiwini 0 100 356 121 degr Arc with R 9 Examples il Contour element 3 The next connecting contour element is an oblique cut Tenet Tool administration organisation whose target point and angle are known T ax 0 000 MANUALplus displays the selection of possible A 52 000 ai E 4 solutions To transfer the correct solution press InNnn ee 0 200 mm r Sel
192. contour repeat cycle 32l G197 Spindle speed in rev min for driven tool 299 P n G836 Contour parallel roughing 317 Tool tip outter radius compensation TRC MCRC Page C87 Line with racius 322 G40 Deactivate TRC 301 G88 Line with chamfer 323 G41 Activate TRC 301 G89 Contour finishing cycle 318 G42 Activate TRC 301 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 543 il Overview of G functions G861 G862 G863 G864 G865 G866 G867 G868 G811 G815 G821 G825 Simple recessing cycle Axial contour recessing Radial contour recessing Axial contour recessing finishing Radial contour recessing finishing Simple axial recessing cycle Simple radial recessing cycle Axial recessing finishing Radial recessing finishing Simple radial recess turning cycle Radial recess turning cycle Simple axial recess turning cycle Axial recess turning cycle Universal thread cycle Single thread cycle Thread single path Metric ISO thread Simple longitudinal single start thread Extended longitudinal multi start thread Tapered API thread Tapered thread Tapping cycle Thread milling 330 324 324 326 326 328 328 329 329 332 333 332 333 335 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 357 358 G25 G85 G851 G852 G853 G856 G857 G858 G859 Undercut contour DIN509 E DIN509 F 344 DIN76 Undercut cycle DIN509 E DIN509 F 345 DIN76 Undercut with cylinder machining DIN 509 E 347 Undercut with cylinder machining DIN 509 F 3
193. crease the pitch per revolution by E moeMNse a 168 4 Cycle Programming il Parameter combinations for taper angle X1 Z1 X2 Z2 X1 Z1 Z2 W Z1 X2 Z2 W Cycle run Calculate the proportioning of cuts Move to starting point X1 Z1 Move to end point Z2 at programmed feed rate Return on paraxial path and approach for next thread groove Repeat 3 and 4 for all thread grooves Approach for next pass taking the reduced cutting depth and the feed angle A into account Repeat 3 to 6 until no threads D and depth U are reached O 0O WRN HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 6 Thread and neereumgre es o il 4 6 Thread and Undercullfilctes API thread Call the thread cutting menu Select API thread Inner Inner thread soft key thread On Internal thread Off External thread This cycle cuts a single or multi start API external or internal thread The depth of thread decreases at the overrun at the end of thread Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 starting point of thread without run in X2 Z2 end point of thread without run out Fl thread pitch feed rate U thread depth No input Depth is calculated External thread U 0 6134 F1 Internal thread U 0 5413 F1 I 1st cutting depth I lt U First cut with cutting depth I further cuts Reduction of cutting depth down to J l U One cut No input Calculation from U and F1 A feed angle default 30
194. cursor on the text entry Press Change text MANUALplus displays the alohanumeric keyboard for editing the text Copy entry Position the cursor on the text entry Press Copy Position the cursor on a free space Retrieve the copied text by pressing Insert Relocate entry Position the cursor on the text entry Press Cut out Position the cursor on a free space Retrieve the copied text by pressing Insert Delete entry Place the cursor on the text entry to be deleted Press Delete 416 Machine X 12 002 s Z 92 001 2 Tool management 0 20 40 60 80 100120 N Y dtp O OE E N organization T 1 i F fol 10 000 mmr 2 Werkzeug 1 tool 1 3 Schruppen roughing S 5000 S 0 m min 0 043 degr E Tool text 1 k Cut Copy Insert Delete Change Take over Bac out text text no 7 Tool Management Mode Transfer text number Position the cursor on the text entry Press Take over text no MANUALplus transfers the Q number of the text entry as tool text O and switches back to the tool data editing mode HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 a Texts k i ool Data 74 Tool Data Tool orientation From the tool orientation MANUALplus determines the position of the tool tip and depending on the selected tool type additional information such as the setting angle direction reference point position etc This informat
195. d Call the thread cutting menu Select the Thread cycle Press the Expanded soft key Inner Inner thread soft key On Internal thread Off External thread This cycle cuts a single or multi start external or internal thread The thread starts at starting point X and ends at end point Z2 without a thread run in or run out Cycle parameters X Z starting point of thread without run in Z2 end point of thread without run out Fl thread pitch feed rate U thread depth No input Depth is calculated External thread U 0 6134 F1 Internal thread U 0 5413 F1 I 1st cutting depth I lt U First cut with cutting depth I further cuts Reduction of cutting depth down to J U One cut No input Calculation from U and F1 A feed angle default 30 Range 60 lt A lt 60 A lt 0O Infeed on left thread flank A gt 0 Infeed on right thread flank Cu remaining cutting depth default 1 100 mm number of thread starts default 1 single start thread incremental gradient default O E 0 Constant pitch E gt 0 Increase the pitch per revolution by E E lt 0 Decrease the pitch per revolution by E m o tool number N spindle speed cutting speed 166 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run Calculate the proportioning of cuts Start first pass for first thread groove at Z Move to end point Z2 at programmed feed rate Return on paraxial path and approach for next thread groove
196. d end points of the thread in X are not exceeded Z direction No more than one turn the starting and end points of the thread in Z are not exceeded Thread run in thread run out The slide requires a run in distance to accelerate to the programmed feed rate before starting the actual thread and a run out distance at the end of the thread to decelerate again Calculation of chamfer run in length BA gt 0 75 F S 2 a 0 15 Calculation of run out length BA gt 0 75 F S 2 e 0 15 BA Minimum run in length BE Minimum run out length F Thread pitch in mm revolution T Speed in revolutions second a Acceleration in mm s see Configuration parameters on page 435 1105 Acceleration at start of block e Acceleration in mm s see Configuration parameters on page 435 1105 Acceleration at start of block If the run in run out length is too short the thread may not attain the expected quality In this case MANUALplus displays a warning HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 AK eS e GL Na aaa A LLALLA S 4 6 Thread and neereumgre es o il om O ge ge d ka Jan Last cut After the cycle is finished the MANUALplus presents the Last cut option You can use this function to repeat the last thread cut with an updated tool compensation Sequence for the last cut function Initial
197. d for the spindle or with driven tools for the auxiliary spindle in all cycles that use this tool CGF It depends on the PLC software of your machine whether the generated switching commands are evaluated If the PLC does not execute the switching commands they should not be defined Your machine manual provides more detailed information on switching commands Cutting data Cutting data You can transfer the parameters cutting speed TS and feed TF as cycle parameters or machine data by pressing the S F from tool soft key When presetting the spindle speed you can choose between constant speed and constant cutting speed The setting that you define in the tool parameters is then taken over whenever you press S F from tool With driven tools the cutting data always refer to the auxiliary spindle 426 Machine e Tool management aa x 72 002 11 Sm Z 52 001 PE Ta F fl 10 000 mn r 0 20 40 60 80 100120 n Pima E irae marae Te e o 0 m min 100 0 043 degr Sean 8 gt psfies refo 5 Pi S S na P o R Dir of rot M3 3 M4 4 2 7 Tool Management Mode il Tool life management MANUALplus can count either the machining time of a tool i e the time a tool is traversed at the programmed feed rate or the number of parts that were produced with that tool These two options are used for tool life management As soon as the tool life expires or the
198. d milling axial G799 358 6 19 C Axis Commands 359 Zero point shift C axis G152 359 Standardize C axis G153 359 6 20 Face Machining 360 Starting point of contour rapid traverse G100 360 Linear segment face G101 361 Circular arc face G102 G108 362 Linear slot face G791 363 Contour and figure milling cycle face G793 364 Area milling face G797 366 Figure definition Full circle face G304 368 Figure definition Rectangle face G30b 369 Figure definition Eccentric polygon face G307 370 6 21 Lateral Surface Machining 371 Reference diameter G120 371 Starting point of contour rapid traverse G110 372 Linear segment lateral surface G111 373 Circular arc lateral surface G112 G113 374 Linear slot lateral surface G792 3 6 Contour and figure milling cycle lateral surface G794 377 Helical slot milling G798 379 Figure definition Full circle lateral surface G314 380 Figure definition Rectangle lateral surface G315 381 Figure definition Eccentric polygon lateral surface G317 382 6 22 Pattern Machining 383 Linear pattern face G743 383 Circular pattern face G745 385 Linear pattern lateral surface G744 387 Circular pattern lateral surface G746 389 6 23 Other G Functions 391 Period of dwell G4 391 Precision stop GQ 391 Deactivate protection z
199. d per revolution Cycle parameters second input window N ICP contour number ons FZ infeed rate default Active feed rate Ol ve vr E reduced feed rate for circular elements default Active feed rate H cutting direction default 0 H 0 Up cut milling H 1 Climb milling J contour milling default 0 depending on U the following applies Pocket milling and J 0 On the contour Pocket milling and J 1 Inside Pocket milling and J 2 Outside Contour milling and J 0 From the inside towards the outside Contour milling and J 1 From the outside towards the inside 0 roughing finishing Milling sequence only for pocket milling default O O 0 Roughing O 1 Finishing R approaching radius Radius of approaching departing arc default O R 0 Contour element is approached directly feed to starting point above the milling plane then vertical plunge R gt 0 Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0 for inside corners Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0 for outside corners Length of linear approaching departing element contour element is approached departed tangentially HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 209 il T O 4 8 Millin oO1 f Cycle run 1 2 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid traverse only in Teach in mode Calculate the proportioni
200. d side on paraxial path 4 Finish second side taking optional contour elements into account then finish remainder of contour valley 5 Finish chamfer rounding at contour start contour end if defined HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 151 il 4 5 Recessinffvcles ICP recess turning radial axial Call the recessing menu Select the Recess turning cycle Select the ICP recess turning radial cycle see figures at right Select ICP recess turning axial see figures on the following page The cycle proceeds as follows taking oversizes into account For descending contours the area defined by X Z and the ICP contour is machined For ascending contours the area defined by X1 Z1 and the ICP contour is machined See also Recess turning on page 143 cc If you are machining Descending contours define Only starting point X Z but not contour starting point X1 Z1 Ascending contours define Starting point X Z and contour starting point X1 Z1 Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 starting point of workpiece blank P infeed depth Maximum infeed depth 0 recessing feed rate default Active feed rate B offset width default 0 U unidirectional turning default 0 U 0 bidirectional U 1 unidirectional direction see graphic support window I K oversize X Z N ICP contour number T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution 152 4 Cycle Pr
201. dercut type K 352 G859 Parting cycle 353 G86 Simple recessing cycle 330 G861 Contour recessing axial 324 G862 Contour recessing radial 324 G863 Axial contour recessing cycle finishing 326 G864 Radial contour recessing cycle finishing 326 G865 Simple axial recessing cycle 328 G866 Simple radial recessing cycle 328 G867 Axial recessing finishing 329 G868 Radial recessing finishing 329 G87 Line with radius 322 G88 Line with chamfer 323 G89 Contour finishing 318 G9 Precision stop 391 G94 Constant feed rate 298 G95 Feed per revolution 298 G96 Constant cutting speed 299 G97 Spindle speed 299 List operations 34 Local variables DIN programming 397 Index Log file 455 Logoff 454 Logon 454 j il Index M M functions DIN programming 408 Fundamentals of cycle programming 82 M cycle entering cycle programming 97 M19 spindle positioning cycle programming 97 MOO Program STOP 408 Machine commands 409 Machine data Cycle programming 83 DIN programming 286 Display configuration 439 Inout and display 46 Machine dimensions 435 Machine operating panel 24 Machine reference points 27 Machine setup 50 Machine variables 286 Machine zero point 27 Machine setting up example 459 Machining times 74 Magnify Reduce ICP contour graphics 247 Simulation 7
202. diameter A angle of 1st hole slot default 0 Wi angle increment pattern spacing default Holes slots etc arranged at a regular spacing in a circle Q number of holes slots default 1 T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution MANUALplus also interrogates the parameters that are required for machining the respective elements See corresponding cycle descriptions Cycle run 1 oO ol AOUN Positioning depending on the machine configuration Without C axis Position to spindle angle C With C axis Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid traverse Manual mode Machining starts from current spindle angle Calculate the pattern positions Position to starting point of pattern Execute drilling milling operation Position for next machining operation Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been completed Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 9 Drilling Milling tt j il Examples of pattern machining Linear hole pattern on face 4 9 Drilling Milling J ns A linear hole pattern is to be machined on the face of the workpiece with the Drilling axial cycle This machining operation requires a traversable spindle and driven tools The pattern is programmed by entering the coordinates of the first and last hole and the number of holes see figure at upper right Only the depth is ind
203. dle surface The machine zero point is designated with the letter M see figure at upper right Workpiece zero point For machining a workpiece It is easier to reference all input data to a zero point located on the workpiece By programming the zero point used in the workpiece drawing you can take the dimensions directly from the drawing without further calculation This point is the workpiece zero point The workpiece zero point is designated with the letter VV see figure at center right Reference points Whether the control forgets the positions of the machine axes when it is switched off depends on the position encoders used If the positions are lost you must pass over the fixed reference points after switching on the MANUALplus The control knows the exact distance between these reference marks and the machine zero point see figure at lower right HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 1 5 Machine Reference Poir imensi 1 6 Tool D 1 6 Tool Dimensions MANUALplus requires data on the specific tools for a variety of tasks such as positioning the axes calculating cutting radius compensation or proportioning of cuts Tool length All position values that are programmed and displayed are referenced to the distance between the tool tip and workpiece zero point Since the control only knows the absolute position of the tool carrier slide it needs the dimensions XWz and ZWz to calculate and display the p
204. dows networks by the authorized personnel of your machine manufacturer Use the automatic logon function HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 E Transfer i il Transfer Configuring for data transfer gt Machine Tool management re Press Settings Baud rate Word length Settings Netra Press Network and define the Parity D directory of the remote station ORE LL a s i Device name input field see aii figure to the upper right Protocol po 7 a a a Oo O a O ee Device name SERVER TRANSFER Cerial Press Serial and define the interface Backup none PAPARA parameters see figure to the lower Auto logon a right User name i Password eee Press Printer and define the interface parameters PC uan Serial Printer ee gt gt Save Back Cave Transfer the settings Settings Back Press Back Baud rate 19200 Word length bit Parity Even Access authorization as system manager is Stop bits Le necessary to access the settings see Access authorization on page 453 The active mode is ELE JON XOFF a displayed to the right above the soft key row EE aude cong Settings in Network mode Backup name JNP_PARA Device name Enter the name and directory of the Auto logon re server as follows Computer name path peor rer The character corresponds to the character on Pacai y the PC The
205. e MO M1 for all NC channels configuration parameter Interpreter stop during tool change O not active 1 active look ahead block interpretation is interrupted and only resumed after execution of the G14 function Option code 1 configuration parameter Rapid traverse contouring speed for manual control Feed rate contouring speed for manual control usually set with Set SF Feed per revolution for manual control The coupling decoupling path is used if the corresponding parameters are not programmed in the DIN program Coupling path mm Acceleration path at the beginning of a threading cut in order to synchronize the feed axis with the rotary axis Decoupling path mm Deceleration path at the end of the threading cut To define the position of the probe enter its external coordinates To define the position of the optical measuring system enter the position of the cross hairs Reference Machine zero point Position of touch probe optical gauge in X Position of touch probe in X Position of touch probe optical gauge in Z Position of touch probe in Z 8 Organization Mode of Operation il Tool mount n MP 607 General parameters for spindle MP 805 driven tool MP 855 Tolerance values for spindle MP 806 driven tool MP 856 Backlash compensation in linear axis X MP 1107 linear axis Z MP 1157 Limit switches protection zone feed rates for linear axis X MP 1116 linear axis
206. e cuts at the maximum possible plunging angle In this case the resulting contour will not be completely finished and may need to be reworked Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour starting point X2 Z2 contour end point P infeed depth Maximum infeed depth P gt 0 Machine contour outline P lt 0 Retract by the safety clearance at 45 A plunging angle default 0 Range 0 lt A lt 90 W end angle Range 0 lt W lt 90 R rounding B1 B2 chamfer rounding B1 contour start B2 contour end B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer T tool number HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 r D 5 O oc gt T O 4 4 Roughin A UO N S F I spindle speed cutting speed feed per revolution K oversize X Z By setting the following optional parameters you can define add itional contour elements W Oblique cut at contour end R B B Rounding in both corners of the contour valley 1 Chamfer Rounding at contour start 2 Chamfer Rounding at contour end Cycle run Calculate the proportioning of cuts infeed Approach workpiece on paraxial path for first pass from X Z Plunge cut at plunging angle A with reduced feed Move to contour end point Z2 or contour end point X2 or if defined to one of the optional contour elements at programmed feed rate Depending on algebraic sign of P P gt 0 Machine contour outline P lt 0 Retract at
207. e DIN program face milling switch to the Program run mode to test the program see figure at upper right To check the contours and each Individual tool movement switch the simulation o Face view see figure to the bottom right HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Program run Toot managenent organization X 133 871 ax T 40 kooo Z 49 13 12 Fae e ee S S g DT ee AO Fee 0 m min 72 773 degr 2005 nc Beispiel Fraesen Stirnflaeche H2 G14 Q1 H3 G19 3183 6195 F0 1 M103 T40 H4 GO X100 22 H5 M14 H6 G110 CO N G 745 XKO YKO 2100 KO AD Wi90 Q4 1 H8 G 93 22 ZE 5 P2 UO 5 RO 10 5 FO 05 HO QO H9 G100 XK10 YK43 5611 H10 6101 YK22 9844 H11 6103 amp K12 3542 YK18 7418 R5 115 H12 6102 XK18 7418 YK12 3542 R20 11 7712 H13 6103 XK22 9844 YK10 R5 J15 H14 6101 amp K43 5611 H15 6103 amp K486 307 3 YK16 5728 R5 143 5611 8K16 5726 YK48 3073 R50 I0 8452 Program run Toot managenent organization X 139 871 s T 40 kooo Z 49 113 z F il ae S Q 20 40 60 80 100120 S ol ITNAOUNGNAUOGONGNONNOUN00NN 0 i 100 0 m min 72 3 degr 300 000 Z Roughing cycles lon trans ng Example Milling Cycle 9 7 DIN Progra i il Tables and Overviews 10 1 Thread Pitch 10 1 Thread Pitch If the thread pitch has not been defined it is calculated from the diame
208. e accounted for even if the standard table prescribes other values If the parameters K W and R are not defined MANUALplus determines these values from the cylinder diameter in the standard table see DIN 509 E DIN 509 F undercut parameters on page 527 182 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run 1 ow AOUN Approach workpiece trom X Z to cylinder starting point X1 or E for the thread chamfer Machine thread chamfer if defined Finish cylinder up to beginning of undercut Machine undercut Finish to end point X2 on plane surface E Without return Tool remains at the end point X2 E With return Return to starting point on diagonal path HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 6 Thread and Undercugiycies o i 4 6 Thread and Undercullfilctes Undercut DIN 509 F Call the thread cutting menu Select the Undercut DIN 509 F cycle With With return soft key Off When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position see figures at right On Tool returns to the starting point see figures on next page The cycle machines a thread undercut according to DIN 509 type F a cylinder start chamfer then the adjoining cylinder and finishes with the plane surface You can define a finishing oversize for the area of the cylinder The cylinder start chamfer is executed when you enter at least one of the parameters B or RB Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 s
209. e are correctly set Language switchover 3 After calling this function you can select the desired language with the gt gt soft key Then confirm your selection with OK The selected language becomes effective as soon as you restart the control D Diagnosis The Diagnosis submenu provides information test and control functions 8 4 Service Info 1 provides information on the software version of your control Log files 3 Display error log 1 displays the most recent error message To view further entries press the PgUp PgDn keys Log file 3 Save error log file 2 This function makes a copy of the error log file and stores the file with the name error log in the Para_Usr directory If the directory already contains an error log file it is overwritten Application example You save the error messages that have occurred in order to make them available to the service engineer Further diagnostic functions are available for commissioning and service HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 455 il S a a a Wail m Examples oe th MANUALplus ing wi Sn 9 1 Working with MANUALplus The following example illustrates how to set up the machine and how to machine a workpiece using the cycle programming feature The machining operation is to be performed in Teach in mode This has the advantage that once you have machined the first workpiece you have a cycle
210. e effect of machine commands depends on the configuration of your machine The table lists the M commands used on most machines Please refer to your machine manual for detailed information on which of the M commands listed are supported by your machine and which additional M commands are available HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 M03 M04 M05 M12 M13 M14 N amm Mcommandsasmachinecommands Q Spindle ON CW Spindle ON CCW z Spindle STOP Lock spindle brake Release spindle brake ove C axis ON Te C axis OFF M15 M19 M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M103 M104 M105 C STOP spindle at position C Shift gear to range O neutral Shift gear to range 1 Shift gear to range 2 Shift gear to range 3 Shift gear to range 4 Spindle 1 auxiliary spindle for driven tool ON CVV Spindle 1 auxiliary spindle for driven tool ON CCW Spindle 1 driven tool STOP o il 7 1 Tool Management Mode Wb veration 7 1 Tool Management Mode of Operation You usually program the coordinates for the contour by taking the dimensions from the drawing To enable MANUALplus to calculate the slide path compensate the cutting radius and determine the proportioning of cuts you need to enter the tool length cutting radius tool angle etc MANUALplus can save tool data for up to 99 tools whereby each tool is identified with a number 1 99 For each tool you can enter an additional tool description which makes
211. e important for commissioning and service Log files These files serve to display the stored error log file file name error and further files for commissioning and service GF You can use the same program names for DIN programs DIN macros ICP turning contours and ICP contours on face and lateral surface It is therefore advisable to use the program description for explaining the program contents HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 447 E Transfer Program transfer Network mode Network shows its own directory in the left window and the directory of the remote station in the right window see figure to the right To switch back and forth between the two windows press the horizontal arrow keys or ENTER Program Press Program Place the highlight in the left window Highlight the program or Mark Select and Mark programs or Mark Press Mark all all EER Press Transmit file file Progran Press Program Place the highlight in the right window Highlight the program or Mark Select and Mark programs or Mark Press Mark all all Receive Press Receive file file The information displayed during transfer is described in Transferring programs files on page 446 gt 48 Number 61 2005 Example Beispiel Fraesen 222 ICP Excample Beispiel M 2222 ICP Excample Beispiel M 223 0000009 333 ICP Beispiel Stechzyklus 0001 Manualpl
212. e or behind the workpiece No complete circles no splines no DXF blocks macros etc The imported contours may consist of no more than 4000 elements lines arcs In addition up to 10 000 polyline points are permitted Preparation of contours during DXF import The contour is converted from DXF format to ICP format during importation The following changes are made to the contour representation since there are basic differences between the DXF and ICP formats Possible gaps between contour elements are closed Polylines are transformed into linear elements In addition the following features which are necessary for a ICP contour are specified The starting point of the contour The direction of rotation of the contour Sequence of a DXF importation Selection of the DXF file Selection of the layer which contains only the contour s Import of the contour s 250 5 ICP Programming il DXF import The ICP editor offers the DXF import during the contour entry phase Press Edit ICP Insert Press Insert element element Press DXF Import Select the file with the DXF contour s Hext Press Next contour or Previous kontur contour to select the DXF layer Preyious kontur Press Assume contour The ICP editor loads the selected DXF contour and converts it to ICP format CES Contour elements that have already been entered or loaded are overwritten immediately when you
213. e plunge cut and the thread chamfer H type of departure default 0 H 0 Tool returns to the starting point E H 1 Tool remains at the end of the plane surface gt U finishing oversize for the area of the cylinder default 0 Note Parameters that are not programmed are automatically calculated trom the diameter in the standard table see DIN 509 E DIN 509 F undercut parameters on page 527 Blocks following the cycle call ce Undercuts can only be executed in orthogonal paraxial contour corners along the longitudinal axis Cutting radius compensation Active Oversizes are not taken into account 348 6 DIN Programming il Undercut according to DIN 76 with cylinder machining G853 The cycle machines the adjoining cylinder the undercut and finishes with the plane surface It also machines a cylinder start chamfer when you enter at least one of the parameters B or RB Parameters FP thread pitch I undercut diameter diameter value default Value from standard table K undercut length default Value from standard table W undercut angle default Value from standard table gt R undercut radius default Value from standard table gt P oversize E P is not defined The undercut is machined in one pass E P is defined Division into pre turning and finish turning P longitudinal oversize The transverse oversize is preset to 0 1 mm gt B cylinder 1s
214. e positioning and position the spindle before the actual milling cycle The milling cycles then automatically deactivate the C axis F The constant cutting speed may only be programmed with driven tools on machines with spindle control HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 a 185 m min 0 043 degr X 22 m ax Z 52 00 Az Nniunvntsniniiniit 20 40 60 80 100 a 0x eee D 5000 a Rapid traverse positioning Activate C axis position tool and spindle Slot axial radial For milling single slots or slot patterns Figure axial radial For milling a single figure Radial axial ICP contour For milling single ICP contours or contour patterns Face milling For milling surfaces or polygons Helical slot milling radial For milling a helical slot T O 4 8 Millin i il T O 4 8 Millin Rapid traverse positioning Call the milling menu e Select the Rapid traverse positioning cycle The cycle activates the C axis and positions the spindle C axis and the tool ce Rapid traverse positioning is only required in Manual mode The C axis is deactivated by a subsequent manual milling cycle Cycle parameters X2 Z2 target point C2 end angle C axis position default Current spindle angle Cycle run 1 Activate C axis 2 Position to end angle C2 at rapid traverse 3 Position the tool to target point X2 Z2 at rapid traverse 202
215. e program list Date time The control stores the time the program was last changed and displays this in Sort by date Program length With this information you can estimate the size of a program The program length is given in bytes By rule of thumb one cycle or ICP contour element needs about 165 bytes and each character of a DIN program or DIN macro takes up 1 byte HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 75 il 3 11 Program Ma ment Functions for program management First select the desired program and then press the corresponding function key The selected program is displayed in the Program number field Sort program list The programs of a program group can be listed in alphabetical order or by date Select program You can select the desired program from the list or enter the program number Activate program When you press Select program the control returns to the previous operating environment The program that is displayed in the Program number field is activated Create new program Enter the new program number and press Select program Copy program The selected program is copied The copied program then needs to be assigned a new program number The other program data is not changed Neither are the contents Delete program The selected program is deleted from the system Change the program description With Change text you can call the alphanumeric keyboard to change a program description or to enter a ne
216. e proportioning of cuts see figure at top right Tool data Threading tool for external machining WO 1 Tool orientation HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in T 1 a o o00 Fa M o o 185 m min 100 0 043 degr eA 20 40 60 80 100120 D 5000 r min Thread cycle E IEA 4 OoOo Hpo zj maj 1j0 235 ajoi o Ee tw sjo Start point Re Tool Take over S F from Inner Input Back cut list position tool thread finished Toor management organization X 72 002 Z 52 001 2 See 4 6 Thread and nel i il A Internal thread and thread undercut ERA Toot management organization E X 12 002 s T1 woo Z 52 001 MA File OS Sin pniviqnntnniniininit 20 40 60 80 100120 185 m min 0 so D 5000 r min o 0 043 degr EE B2 oO i 40 27 zafo o 2 35 zazo lt FPH 5S Ef0 2 t3 sf2a0 F03 tt M42 x 1 5 245 Start point The machining operation is to be performed in two steps Thread undercut DIN 76 produces the undercut and thread chamfer In the second step the thread cycle cuts the thread apache Ie Toot management organization d 0 000 First step X 72 00 Ax fo T 1 7 0 000 The parameters for the undercut and thread chamfer 10 000 mn r are programmed in two superimposed Input windows Z 52 00 A a F cs see figure at bottom right and figure on next page at pnivnnntnniuiinitit ont inn 0 185 m min top
217. e tool s cutting width equals K Blocks following the cycle call m x D 3 o G 00 o C Undercuts can only be executed in orthogonal paraxial contour corners along the longitudinal axis Cutting radius compensation Active E Oversizes are not taken into account 350 6 DIN Programming il Undercut type H G857 The cycle G857 machines an undercut The end point is determined trom the plunging angle in accordance with Undercut type H At the end of cycle the tool returns to the starting point Parameters X contour corner diameter value Z contour corner K undercut length gt R radius no input No circular element tool radius undercut radius gt W plunge angle no input W is determined from K and R CS Undercuts can only be executed in orthogonal paraxial contour corners along the longitudinal axis Cutting radius compensation Active Oversizes are not taken into account HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Example G857 6 16 ndei Cycles i i 6 16 Unde A Cycles Undercut type K G858 The cycle G858 machines an undercut This cycle performs only one cut at an angle of 45 The resulting contour geometry therefore depends on the tool that is used At the end of cycle the tool returns to the starting point Parameters X contour corner diameter value gt Z contour corner I undercut depth C Undercuts can only be executed in orthogona
218. eactivate protection zone 391 G64 Interrupted feed rate 297 G71 drilling cycle 354 G74 Deep hole drilling cycle 355 G743 Linear pattern face 383 G744 Linear pattern lateral surface 387 G745 Circular pattern face 385 G746 Circular pattern lateral surface 389 G791 Linear slot face 363 G792 Linear slot lateral surface 376 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 G793 Contour and figure milling cycle face 364 G794 Contour and figure milling cycle lateral surface 377 G797 Area milling face 366 G798 Helical slot milling 379 G799 Thread milling axial 358 G80 End of cycle 310 G81 Longitudinal roughing 319 G811 Simple recess turning cycle longitudinal 332 G815 Recess turning cycle longitudinal 333 G817 Longitudinal contour roughing 311 G818 Longitudinal contour roughing 311 G819 Longitudinal contour roughing with recessing 313 G82 Transverse roughing 320 G821 Simple recess turning cycle transverse 332 G825 Recess turning cycle transverse 333 G827 Transverse contour roughing 314 G828 Transverse contour roughing 314 G829 Transverse contour roughing with recessing 316 G83 Simple contour repeat cycle 321 G836 Contour parallel roughing 317 G85 undercut cycle 345 G851 Undercut DIN 509 E 347 G852 Undercut DIN 509 F 348 G853 Undercut DIN 76 349 G856 Undercut type U 350 G857 Undercut type H 351 G858 Un
219. eat RE RA Start pt Edit Finishing Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back ICP run list position tool speed finished Toot adninistration organisation N T1 fe o 000 F Ol 0 S B 0 400 mmr 150 m min 3 888 degr i il Example Threaded Stud Contour element 1 The contour starts with a chamfer thread chamfer The starting point of the contour is defined in XS ZS when programming the first contour element The starting point in this case is the corner that is cut off by the chamfer If you program a chamfer as the first contour element you must specify the position of the chamfer with the parameter element position J here J 1 see figure to the upper right The control does not know yet the next connecting contour element The chamfer is therefore regarded as an unsolved element MANUALoplus displays the appropriate symbol below the graphics window see figure to the bottom right 472 x 62 000 1 Z 2 000 ao S Oo 20 40 60 80 100120 Caman N N N a N F fal 0 400 mm r S ry 150 m min 0 1 100 3 6868 degr 20 40 60 80 100120 ae eee ee ee eee eee eee a F fol 0 400 mm r cael 00 S o 150 m min 0 1 100 3 6868 degr TALLLOLE 9 Examples il Contour element 2 The next connecting contour element is an undercut The form element u
220. ece step by step with the help of cycles MANUALplus memorizes how the workpiece was machined and stores the necessary working steps In a cycle program which you can call up again at any time The Teach in mode can be switched on by soft key and is displayed in the header Each cycle program is given a number and a short description The individual cycles of a cycle program are listed as blocks and are numbered in ascending order The block number has no meaning for the program run The cycles are run after each other When the cursor is located on a cycle block MANUALplus displays the cycle parameters The cycle block includes Block number Tool used Cycle designation Number of ICP contour or of DIN macro in Cycle programming When creating a new cycle program you program each cycle in the following sequence of actions Enter Simulate Execute Save The individual cycles form the cycle program You can change cycle programs by simply editing the necessary cycle parameters and delete or add cycles as required When you exit the Teach in mode or switch off the machine the cycle program remains as It was programmed or edited When you call an ICP cycle MANUALplus displays a soft key for switching to the ICP contour editor see Editing ICP Contours on page 243 DIN macros are programmed in the DIN editor and then integrated in a DIN cycle You can call the DIN editor by soft key when you sel
221. ect solution see figure to the lower right 4 2 000 sal FE oS l S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S o 180 m min The preceding circular arc and the oblique cut are now TEVTEDEATEANENEAOMAEEA 0 oo 356 121 degr unambiguously defined O gt Q D T N Q O D o Q x Lu x 62 000 T 4 ae 0 000 l 2 000 e E Fie Do 0 200 mn r 180 m min 100 356 121 degr am A A HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 499 il Contour element 4 The next connecting contour element is an oblique cut ere Toot adninistration organisation whose target point is known T ax 0 00 After you have entered the target point X Z the x 62 000 x i 4 iel oblique cut is unambiguously defined MANUALplus l A AR a 0 200 nar draws the contour elements in the graphics window 4 2 000 z F tol 180 m mi o E 356 121 0 20 40 60 80 100 140 S 0 J Example Recessing Cycle Teach in dx 0 000 A 62 000 a T 4 dz 0 000 l 2 000 az F fel 0 200 nn r S o 180 m min 0 100x 356 121 degr 1 i TAL Tea 500 9 Examples il Contour element 5 The next connecting contour element is a horizontal line After you have entered the target point Z the line is unambiguously defined MANUALplus draws the contour elements in the graphics window HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 41
222. ect the DIN cycle or when you are in the Main menu see DIN Programming on page 278 62 Teach in Toot management _ X 72 002 STs Z 52 01 E rg e 0 20 40 60 80 100120 a NN N N N A TO W T O A p39 MERA D 5000 r min 1 100x 0 043 degr 333 ICP Beispiel Stechzyklus H2 T30 ICP cut radial finishing N333 N3 T30 Rap tray positioning Program Renumber Change Erase Copy Edit Add Back list text cycle cycle cycle cycle Program Switch to the Select cycle programs function see list Program Management on page 75 Renunbep Renumber the block numbers of the cycles Change Call the alphanumeric keyboard to enter or edit the text program description Ean Delete the selected cycle cycle Copy the cycle parameters into a buffer memory When you then press Add cycle the data Is inserted example copy parameters of roughing cycle into a finishing cycle Copy cycle Edit Edit cycle parameters or cycle mode the cycle type cycle cannot be edited Add Insert a new cycle below the highlighted block cycle 3 Machine Mode of Operation il 3 8 Program Run Mode In Program run mode you use cycle programs and DIN programs for parts production You cannot change the programs in this mode The graphic simulation feature however allows you to check the programs before you run them MANUALplus also offers the Single bloc
223. ed from the thread pitch and the thread depth A feed angle default 30 Range 60 lt A lt 60 A gt 0 Infeed on right thread flank A lt 0 Infeed on left thread flank gt D number of thread starts default 1 gt W taper angle default 0 Range 45 lt W lt 45 gt WE run out angle default 12 Range 0 lt WE lt 90 J remaining cutting depth default 1 100 mm Internal or external threads See algebraic sign of U Proportioning of cuts The first cut is performed at the cutting depth defined for l and is reduced with each cut until the tool reaches the remaining cutting depth J Handwheel superposition provided that your machine is equipped accordingly The superposition is limited to the following range X direction Depends on the current cutting depth the starting and end points of the thread are not exceeded Z direction No more than one turn the starting and end points of the thread are not exceeded Definition of taper angle XS ZS X Z or XS ZS Z W or ZS X Z W C Cycle STOP becomes effective at the end of a thread cut The feed rate and spindle speed overrides are not effective during cycle execution Handwheel superposition is activated with a switch located on the machine operating panel Feedforward control is switched off 342 6 DIN Programming il Tapered thread G353 G353 cuts a tapered single or multi start thread with variable pitc
224. ed per revolution Parameter combinations for defining the target point X2 2 X2 A Z2 A Cycle run if With return is active 1 Calculate the target position 2 Move ona straight line from X Z to contour starting point X1 Z1 3 Move to target position at programmed feed rate 4 Retract and return to starting point on paraxial path HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 3 Single wares 4 3 Single cull tes Circular machining Call the single cut menu Select the Circular machining cycle clockwise Select the Circular machining cycle counterclockwise With With return soft key return Off When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position On Tool returns to the starting point Circular machining The tool moves in circular arc from the starting point to the contour end point at the programmed feed rate and remains at the cycle end position Contour circular With return The tool approaches the workpiece executes the circular cut and returns to the starting point at the end of cycle Cutter radius compensation is taken into account see figures at right Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 starting point of contour if With return is active X2 Z2 contour end point R radius of rounding T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Cycle run if With return is active 1 Move on paraxial path from X Z to
225. eing able to continue Program run Toot management organization 12 002 s az 0 000 T1 Ei 52 001 F Te 10 000 mn r S D 5000 H 100 r 20 40 60 80 sunt 185 m min 0 043 degr a ne Residual eal due to cutting edge geometry BACKGROUND Residual ata al due to en edge geometry BACKGROUND Residual material due to cutting edge geometry 61 Error No 66 PLC Logic osci Tio Back diagnosis analyser scope 2 Basics of Operation Clearing an error message You can cancel the error message on which the cursor is located with the Backspace key or cancel all of the error messages with the Clear key The error symbol remains set in the top line until all of the errors have been canceled You can exit the error window without clearing any error messages by pressing Back Information in the error message The error description explains the error that has occurred The error number level indication D level C level and OM no are needed whenever the supplier needs to be contacted The time shows you when the indicated error occurred The error class is indicated in the framed field to the top left of the message A message without this field represents a warning Background This message serves as information or merely a small error has occurred Abort The current operation execution of a cycle traverse command etc was aborted You can resume
226. emental setting is only effective for the currently active input field To enter variables press the Variable soft key see Variables as Address Parameters on page 403 With the soft key you inform MANUALplus that this coordinate is to be calculated The character is transferred to the DIN program HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 283 il 6 2 Editing DIN orams Comments If you enter a comment in an empty block the block number is deleted and only the comment is stored in this block An empty block is a block that consists of the block number only If the NC block already contains NC commands the comment is appended to the end of the block To change comments place the cursor at the beginning of the comment and press Change word MANUALplus then displays the alphanumeric keyboard and the current text of the comment You can now edit the comment as desired by changing adding to etc If you wish to delete comments place the cursor at the beginning of the comment and press Delete block or Delete word as applicable The comment is deleted 284 6 DIN Programming il Block functions Mark several successive NC blocks block sequence to be able to cut copy or delete them If you cut or copy the block sequence it is taken into the clipboard You can then insert this block sequence at a different position in the program or call a different DIN program and Insert the block sequence there The block sequence rema
227. ence Using this principle you can combine pattern definitions with drilling cycles G71 G74 G36 or milling cycles figure definitions with G314 G315 G317 Parameters Z starting point polar coordinates C starting angle polar coordinates X starting point of drilling milling operation diameter value XE end point of drilling milling operation diameter value ZE end point of pattern default Z gt W end angle of pattern no input Holes figures are arranged on the lateral surface at regular spacing Wi end angle Angle increment distance to next position Q number of holes figures default 1 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 c aes T E A N N m X D 3 G A P i i 6 22 Pattern Pe ining m x lt 9D g D h e e 3 9D Q D 2 S D O D n W 88 6 DIN Programming il Circular pattern lateral surface G746 With cycle G746 you can machine hole patterns or figure patterns in which the individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a circle or circular arc on the lateral surface Parameter combinations for defining the center of the pattern and the pattern positions Center of pattern Z and C Pattern positions Wand Q E Wi and Q If XE has not been defined the drilling milling cycle or the figure definition of the next NC block is used as a reference Using this prin
228. epeat 2 to 5 until all recesses have been machined 7 Return to starting point on paraxial path 140 4 Cycle Programming il ICP recessing radial axial finishing mpl Call the recessing menu Select the ICP recessing radial cycle see figures at right Select ICP recessing axial see figures on the following page Press the Finishing run soft key The cycle finish machines the number of recesses defined in Q with the ICP recessing contour The parameters X Z define the position of the first recess At the end of cycle the tool returns to the starting point Cycle parameters X Z starting point I K oversize X Z N ICP contour number DX DZ distance to subsequent recess with respect to the preceding recess Q number of recess cycles detfault 1 T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 Nevessinggye es j i 45 Recessingijcles Cycle run 1 Calculate the recess positions 2 Approach workpiece for next recess from starting point or from last recess on paraxial path 3 Finish the recess 4 Repeat 2 to 3 until all recesses have been machined 5 Return to starting point on paraxial path 142 4 Cycle Programming il Recess turning The workpiece is machined by alternate recessing and roughing movements The machining process requires a minimum of retraction and infeed movements
229. er Input and output of programs parameters and tool data The transfer functions are used either for exchange of data with other systems or for data security System Service Some parameter settings and functions may only be accessed by qualified personnel User registration and administration is done in the System service mode You can also set the date and time and select the screen language in this mode Diagnosis The Diagnosis menu provides functions for checking the system and for locating errors Menu logic Each menu item in the Organization mode is preceded by a number By pressing the corresponding key on the numerical keypad you can activate the function open a display or input window or call the next menu level P Some functions in the service and diagnosis menu can only be accessed by authorized commissioning and service personnel Basics of operation Data is input in the usual way on the MANUALoplus see Data input on page 34 The data is transferred to the control when you press OK or place the cursor on the OK field and press Enter If you leave the input window with Cancel then entries or changes you made will be lost Switching to another function The Menu key takes you back to the main level where you can then select another function of the Organization mode of operation 430 8 Organization Mode of Operation il 8 2 Parameters Parameters that are preset for the usual daily Machi
230. ers along the longitudinal axis Cutter radius compensation is not carried out You can program TRC separately with G41 G42 and switch it off again with G40 Oversizes are not taken into account HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 DIN 509 E K DIN 509 F KO DIN 76 K 6 16 ndei Cycles m x O 3 p G 00 o o i 6 16 Unde Cycles Undercut angle for undercuts according to DIN 509 E and F 15 Transverse angle for undercuts according to DIN 509 F 8 346 6 DIN Programming il Undercut according to DIN 509 E with cylinder machining G851 The cycle machines the adjoining cylinder the undercut and finishes with the plane surface It also machines a cylinder start chamfer when you enter at least one of the parameters B or RB Parameters I undercut depth default Value from standard table K undercut length default Value from standard table W undercut angle default Value from standard table gt B cylinder 1st cut length no input No chamfer machined at start of cylinder gt RB 1st cut radius no input No chamfer radius is machined WB Ist cut angle default 45 E reduced feed rate default Active feed rate For the plunge cut and the cylinder start chamfer gt H type of departure default 0 H 0 Tool returns to the starting point H 1 Tool remains at the end of the plane surface gt U finishing oversize for the area
231. es for inch mode When executing a DIN program MANUALplus does not check whether it was written in inch or metric mode Refer to your machine manual if you want to know whether and how the handwheel resolution can be set to inches 78 3 Machine Mode of Operation il a a g Ty ie te ae F ia je te TE a r er ali i I P m i a al i im is bee oe See a ae ee Se ei Me E a yor oe es ee a M pa Cycle Programming T O ing wi 4 1 Work 4 1 Working with Cycles Before you can use the cycles you must set the workpiece zero point and ensure that the tools you are going to use are described The machine data tool feed rate spindle speed are entered with the other cycle parameters in Teach in mode In Manual mode you must program these machine data before calling a cycle Define the individual cycles as follows Position the tool tip with the handwheel or the jog keys to the starting point of the cycle only in Manual mode Select and program a cycle Graphically test the cycle Execute the cycle Save the cycle only in Teach in mode Starting point of cycles In Manual mode cycles are executed from the current tool position In Teach in mode you enter the starting point as one of the parameters MANUALplus moves to this position in rapid traverse by the shortest path diagonal before executing the cycle att Danger of collision If the tool cannot approach the next starting poi
232. eter and remain at this position for the time of two revolutions 4 Retract and approach for next pass Repeat steps 3 to 4 until corner point Z1 is reached 6 After the last pass finish adjoining plane surface starting from end point X2 if defined 7 Machine chamfer rounding if defined 8 Return to starting point on diagonal path Ol 158 4 Cycle Programming il Parting Call the recessing menu Select the Cut off cycle The cycle parts the workpiece If programmed a chamfer or rounding arc is machined on the outside diameter Cycle parameters gt X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour corner XE inside diameter tube I diameter for feed reduction gt B chamfer rounding B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer E reduced feed rate T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Cycle run 1 Pre position to safety clearance from X Z 2 Cut to depth of chamfer or rounding and machine the chamfer rounding if defined 3 Depending on the cycle parameters move at feed rate to E The turning center or The inside diameter tube XE If you have programmed a feed rate reduction MANUALplus switches to the reduced feed E as soon as the tool reaches the diameter feed reduction I 4 Retract at end face and return to starting point HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 Nevessinggye es k i N O 4 5 Recessind
233. etract at 45 do not machine contour outline gt I oversize X diameter value default 0 gt K oversize Z default 0 Note on the execution of the cycle MANUALplus automatically determines the cutting and infeed directions from the current tool position relative to the starting point end point of the contour area Tool position at the end of the cycle Cycle starting point C The tool must be located outside the defined contour area Cutting radius compensation Active G57 G58 oversizes are taken into account if I K is not programmed After the cycle has been executed the oversizes are canceled Safety clearance after each step Parameter Current parameters Machining Safety distances alt Danger of collision If the tool angle and the tool point angle have not been defined the tool plunge cuts at the plunging angle If the tool and point angles have been defined the tool plunge cuts at the maximum possible plunging angle In this case the resulting contour will not be completely finished and may need to be reworked HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 31 m x O 3 D G 00 oh Oo 6 11 Contour Based ri Cycles 6 11 Contour Based Cycles Transverse contour roughing G827 G828 The cycle machines the contour area described by the current tool position and the data defined in the subsequent blocks in transverse direction without recessing see Conto
234. ey To reduce the red frame use the PgUp key E E The adjusted red frame will be displayed as a picture By reducing the contour a greater area can be displayed if for example an area of the workpiece is not displayed in the graphics window Foon off All previously defined contour elements are shown as large as possible Return to the last setting of Zoom HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in X 2 002 s Z 32 001 2 T1 2m F 10 000 mmr raed 100 ol 185 m min 0 043 degr 20 40 60 80 100 120 line 5 2 Editing ICP i C il 5 2 Editing ICP BB cours Selection of solutions If the entered data permit several possible solutions you can inspect the mathematically possible solutions with Next solution Continue solution and confirm the correct solution with Select solution see figures at right ce If the contour still contains unsolved contour elements when you exit the editing mode MANUALplus will ask you whether to cancel these elements Editing the last contour element By pressing Change last you can call the data of the last entered contour element and edit it as desired Depending on the adjoining contour elements corrections of linear or circular elements are either transferred immediately or the corrected contour is displayed for inspection Contour elements that have been edited are highlighted in color If the change permits
235. f the previous next screen page toggle between two input windows Info Call the error information or PLC status display i ee ee ee ee B HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 23 1 3 MANUALplus ea 1 3 MANUALplus bese Machine operating panel The machine operating panel is interfaced to the lathe by the machine tool builder The controls on your machine may deviate slightly from those shown in the illustration Your machine documentation provides more detailed information Controls and displays 1 Handwheel resolution Set the handwheel resolution to 1 10 mm 1 100 mm or 1 1000 mm per graduation mark or to other resolutions defined by the machine tool builder 2 Handwheel superposition in thread cycles Set the handwheel to superposition for thread cycles 3 X handwheel Position the cross slide cross slide axis X axis 4 Feed rate override Change the programmed feed rate 5 Speed override Change the preset speed 6 EMERGENCY STOP button 7 Zhandwheel Position the saddle saddle axis Z axis 10 11 12 13 14 15 Tool change Confirm a tool change Coolant ON OFF Enable disable coolant supply Joystick Move the slide on a linear path at feed rate or rapid traverse with a built in switch for enabling rapid traverse Spindle switch Switch spindle to clockwise rotation cw counterclockwise rotation ccw or spindle stop MOb5 Cycle STOP Stop traverse and cycle execution the sp
236. ft key The cycle machines the area defined by X Z1 and X2 Z2 taking the oversizes into account see also Recess turning on page 143 Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour starting point X2 Z2 contour end point P infeed depth Maximum infeed depth 0 recessing feed rate default Active feed rate A starting angle Range 0 lt A lt 90 W end angle Range 0 lt W lt 90 R rounding B1 B2 chamfer rounding B1 contour start B2 contour end B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution B offset width default 0 U unidirectional turning default O U 0 bidirectional U 1 unidirectional direction see graphic support window I K oversize X Z 146 4 Cycle Programming il By setting the following optional parameters you can define additional contour elements A Oblique cut at contour start W Oblique cut at contour end R Rounding in both corners of the contour valley B1 Chamfer Rounding at contour start B2 Chamfer Rounding at contour end Cycle run Calculate the proportioning of cuts Approach workpiece for first pass from X Z Execute the first cut recessing Machine perpendicularly to recessing direction turning Repeat 3 to 4 until contour end point Z2 X2 is reached Machine chamfer rounding at contour start contour end If defined 7 Return to starting point on par
237. g Interactive Contour Programming enables you to describe complex and even incomplete contours You need to enter the values for the known elements MANUALplus then automatically calculates the transitions intersections and any other missing data MANUALplus graphically displays the contour sections entered and calculated You can usually program a contour with the dimensions given in the workpiece drawing ICP contour descriptions are included in the machining cycles The DIN programming feature NC programming in DIN format according to DIN 66025 ISO 6983 enables you to run highly complex technologically sophisticated machining operations Apart from pure traversing commands DIN cycles also provide functions for roughing drilling and milling for programming schematic contour geometry to calculate missing data and for programming variables You can even write separate DIN programs or integrate DIN macros in cycles Before executing a part program you can run a graphic simulation of all machining operations that were programmed with cycles cycle programs or DIN programs Tool management mode MANUALplus stores and manages up to 99 tool definitions MANUALplus stores all of the tool data required for calculating cutting radius compensation proportioning of cuts plunging angle etc With the tool data MANUALplus also manages the data for tool life monitoring as well as the cutting data feed rate and spindle speed Organi
238. g Changes to ICP Contours on page 254 Special feed You can assign a special feed to contour elements which will be used for finish machining these elements 242 Teach in X 72 002 a T1 amp Z 52 001 Fo S a es ee ee UN 3 0 S o D 5000 r min 1 100 185 m min 0 043 degr 8100 ica Miet Ld 6s E Sear ae as 5 ICP Programming il 5 2 Editing ICP Contours An ICP contour consists of definitions of the individual contour elements it is made up of Each ICP contour is clearly identified by its number and a short description ICP contours are integrated in ICP cycles You program an ICP contour by entering the individual contour elements one after the other in the correct sequence The starting point is defined when you describe the first contour element The end point is determined by the target point of the last contour element Existing contours can be edited or added to The contour elements subcontours are displayed as soon as they are programmed With the zoom and panning functions you can adjust the graphics as required You can call ICP contours either with Select ICP contours or by defining an ICP contour number ICP contour input box To switch between the list of ICP contours and the ICP contour input box press the vertical arrow keys or ENTER You can successively program edit several ICP contours After exiting the ICP editor
239. g cycle longitudinal G811 transverse G821 The cycles machine the rectangle described by the tool position and X Zs Parameters X base corner X diameter value Z base corner Z gt P maximum infeed The proportioning of cuts is calculated so that an abrasive cut is avoided and the infeed distance Is lt P gt I oversize X default 0 K oversize Z default 0 gt Q roughing finishing default 0 Q 0 The recess is first rough machined with consideration of the oversizes and then finish machined at finishing feed E Q 1 Only roughing E Q 2 Finishing only l K defines the material to be machined 6 14 Recess tur i Cycles gt U unidirectional turning default 0 U 0 bidirectional m U 1 Unidirectional G811 In direction of spindle G821 In direction of base corner X gt B offset width default 0 gt 0 recessing feed rate default Active feed rate E finishing feed default Active feed rate Note on the execution of the cycle E Tool position at the end of the cycle Cycle starting point t is absolutely necessary to define the oversizes I K for recess turning tinishing Q 2 since they define the material to be machined during the finishing cycle Cutting radius compensation Active G57 G58 oversizes are taken into account if I K is not programmed After the cycle has been executed the oversizes are canceled 332 m m x
240. g the cutter compensation 302 Ga Contourofworkpieceblank _ G149 Additive compensation 303 GQ Compensate right tooltip 80K ool positioning withoutmachining Ray oe Compencateleittooltp 804 GO Positioning in rapid traverse 290 ee ee a E I 3 Zero point shift 305 ee a55 Additive 2010 pot ehn G1 Linear path 292 Overview of G functions G59 Absolute zero point shift 307 G2 Circular arc with incr center dimensioning 293 Eaa G3 Circular arc with incr center dimensioning 293 Oversizes Page G12 Circular arc with abs center dimensioning 295 G57 Paraxial oversize 308 G13 Circular arc with abs center G13 Circular arc with abs center dimensioning 295 __ 295 G58 ae OOA S oversize 309 G26 Speed limitation for spindle 297 End of cycle 310 G126 Speed limitation driven tool 297 G81 Longitudinal roughing 319 G64 Interrupted intermittent feed 297 G817 Longitudinal contour roughing 311 G193 Feed per tooth 298 G818 Longitudinal contour roughing SLi G94 Constant feed 298 G819 Longitudinal contour roughing with 313 TEE recessing G95 Feed per revolution 298 T e G Transverse roughing 320 G195 Feed per revolution for driven tool 298 a G827 Transverse contour roughing 314 G96 Constant cutting speed 299 PERCED G828 Transverse contour roughing 314 G196 Constant cutting speed for driven tool 299 Fo SG B29_s Transverse contour roughing with recessing 316 G97 Spindle speed in rev min 299 a T GES Simple
241. grammed spindle speed and feed rate apply to the spindle or the driven tool HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 A N q i il T O 4 7 Drillin Cycle run 1 Position spindle to spindle angle C in Manual mode machining starts from the current spindle angle 2 f defined move at rapid traverse to Z1 axial X1 radial 3 Tap thread to End point Z2 axial End point X2 radial 4 f X1 Z1 has been defined retract at return speed SR to Starting point of hole Z1 axial Starting point of hole X1 radial If X1 Z1 has not not been defined retract to Starting point Z axial Starting point X radial 196 4 Cycle Programming il Thread milling axial T O Call the drilling menu Select the Thread milling axial cycle 4 7 Drillin The cycle mills a thread in existing holes GF Use threading tools for this cycle att Danger of collision Be sure to consider the hole diameter and the diameter of the milling cutter when programming approaching radius R Cycle parameters X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle Z1 starting point of thread default Starting point Z Z2 end point of thread I diameter of thread R approaching radius default I milling diameter 2 Fl thread pitch J direction of thread default O J 0 Right hand J 1 Left hand H cutting direction default 0 H 0 Up cut milling H 1 Climb mill
242. h Parameters X end point of thread diameter value Z end point of thread XS starting point of thread diameter value ZS starting point of thread F thread pitch U thread depth U gt 0 Internal thread U lt 0 External thread lateral surface or front face U 999 or 999 Thread depth is calculated I maximum infeed default is calculated from the thread pitch and the thread depth A feed angle default 30 Range 60 lt A lt 60 A gt 0 Infeed on right thread flank A lt 0 Infeed on left thread flank D number of thread starts default 1 W taper angle default 0 Range 45 lt W lt 45 J remaining cutting depth default 1 100 mm E variable pitch default 0 E gt 0 Increase the pitch per revolution by E E lt 0 Decrease the pitch per revolution by E Internal or external threads See algebraic sign of U Proportioning of cuts The first cut is performed at the cutting depth defined for I and is reduced with each cut until the tool reaches the remaining cutting depth J Handwheel superposition provided that your machine is equipped accordingly The superposition is limited to the following range X direction Depends on the current cutting depth the starting and end points of the thread are not exceeded Z direction No more than one turn the starting and end points of the thread are not exceeded Definition of taper angle XS ZS X Z or XS ZS Z W or ZS X Z W GF C
243. h the individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a circle or circular arc on the face 22 21 4 Cycle Programming Cycle parameters X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle XM CM pattern center Position angle polar coordinates XK YK pattern center Cartesian coordinates K KD pattern diameter default Starting point X is the pattern diameter A angle of 1st hole slot default 0 Wi angle increment pattern spacing default Holes slots etc arranged at a regular spacing in a circle Q number of holes slots default 1 T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution MANUALplus also interrogates the parameters that are required for machining the respective elements Cycle run 1 Oo ol AOUN Positioning depending on the machine configuration Without C axis Position to spindle angle C With C axis Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid traverse Manual mode Machining starts from current spindle angle Calculate the pattern positions Position to starting point of pattern Execute drilling milling operation Position for next machining operation Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been completed Return to starting point X Z HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 9 Drilling Milling i a i il 4 9 Drilling Milling Drilling milling pattern
244. he control calculates and saves the set up dimensions The compensation value is deleted Pre position the tool for the second direction of measurement y Press the soft key for this direction e g X direction Press Cycle START The tool moves in the direction of measurement When it contacts the touch probe the control calculates and saves the set up dimensions The compensation value is deleted Enter the cutting radius Cave Transfer the cutting radius to the tool table radius 56 3 Machine Mode of Operation il In the tool table enter the tool you want to measure see Tool Data on page 418 Insert the tool and enter the T number in Set T S F Activate Measure tool Position the tool at the cross hairs of the optical gauge by using the jog keys or the handwheel Save the tool dimension in Z the compensation value is deleted Save the tool dimension in X the compensation value is deleted Enter the cutting radius Transfer the cutting radius to the tool table HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Tools 3 5 Settin Tools E Q Y LO w Tool compensation The tool compensation in X and Z as well as the special compensation for recessing tools compensate for wear of the cutting edge cE A compensation value must not exceed 99 mm petit a Select Set T S F only available in Manua
245. he ICP recessing finishing cycle Graphics soft key In the figure to the upper right the finishing operation has not been completed yet You can then transfer the cycle to the cycle program with Save or Overwrite Cycle program ICP recessing example Besides the ICP cycles the created cycle program also includes the positioning cycles for tool change see figure to the right Functions of the cycles N1 Contour recessing N2 Contour finishing N3 Position the tool for removing the workpiece 506 Teach in Toot administration Organisation x 62 000 az 0 000 T 4 j 0 000 2 2 000 2 TE 0 200 mmr F E S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 i S ry 160 m min inini 0 BEM oox 356 121 degr ICP cut radial finishing x 62 z 2 N 666 Th s 180 F 0 2 62 000 Z 50 295 C T 4 Start pt Q Graphic Extra Over Back Continue func write Toot administration organisation X 62 000 0 000 T 4 jk 0 000 2 2 000 2 0 200 omn r F fe S Q 20 40 60 80100120 o 180 m min 0 BEM 356 121 degr ICP Beispiel Stechzyklus H1 T4 ICP cut radial N2 T4 ICP cut radial finishing N3 T4 Rap tray positioning Teach in Program Renumber Change Erase Copy Edit Add Back list text cycle cycle cycle cycle 9 Examples il 9 5 ICP Example Milling Cycle The milling example illustrates the
246. he input field For current parameters which refer to a slide or a spindle the number of the slide or spindle is displayed to the bottom left With configuration parameters the parameter number is displayed to the bottom left OK Cancel The parameter editor automatically considers the metric or inch units of measure ce Some parameters are reserved for acl service and commissioning gt gt OK Cancel HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 431 ih rameters Ay rameters Current parameters Setup menu 1 menu item Workpiece zero point 1 Main spindle 1 Tool change point 2 Zero point shift C axis 3 Tool monitoring 4 Additive compensation 5 Machine parameters 2 menu item Feed rates 1 Manual control 1 Feed rates 1 Automatic mode 2 432 Distance between Machine zero point and workpiece zero point usually determined with Set axis values Zero point coordinate X mm Zero point coordinate Z mm Distance between Machine zero point and tool change point usually determined with Set tool change point Tool change point X coordinate mm Tool change point Z coordinate mm Zero point shift C axis Activate deactivate tool life monitoring Tool life switch 0 Off 1 On 16 compensation value sets you can also define this parameter with Set additive compensation Compensation 901 in X Compensation 901 in Z Compensation 902 in
247. he starting point is set to be the contour point that is the furthest to the right or left or If more than one contour point satisfies this requirement then one of these points is selected automatically DxXF paraneter max Gap Start point Marked point X Dir rot clockwise gt gt Saye Back 5 ICP Programming il Maximum distance he DXF import sets the starting point to one of the two contour points farthest apart from each other The program automatically determines which of these points is the starting point It is not possible to influence this decision Marked point If one of the contour points in the DXF drawing is marked with a complete circle then this point is specified as the starting point The contour point must be at the center of the complete circle Direction of rotation Indicate whether the contour is aligned in clockwise or counterclockwise direction 5 3 Importing of DXF HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 253 il 5 4 Programming Changes to ICP Co 5 4 Programming Changes to ICP Contours You can edit existing contours by Editing contour elements Deleting contour elements Extending the contour adding to the contour Editing individual contour sections Superimposing form elements refining the contour Editing a contour element Change Press Change element a contour element is element marked selected highlighted in color Hext Select the contour element to
248. he subsequent contour element which 4 2 000 AZ F Eo connects to the chamfer The chamfer and the S ae SE 150 m min IDUNVODENVOUEOVODEOVENEOUENUGHI all 00x egr preceding linear element are therefore considered unsolved elements MANUALplus displays the symbols for these elements below the graphics window and depicts the preceding horizontal line in gray color for unsolved elements Example Threaded Stud x 62 000 T 1 4 2 000 az F fl 0 400 mn r SF wate eacpaiaet Sg 150 m min Minin OX O ASA 3 888 degr 478 9 Examples il Contour element 8 The next connecting contour element is a horizontal line After you have entered the target point Z the line and the preceding chamfer are unambiguously defined MANUALplus draws the contour elements and clears the symbols for the unsolved elements HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in Toot administration organisation x 62 000 4 eas 4 2 000 Az FE Cee 9 400 mar 150 m min 3 6868 degr TE O a I W as S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S ol winavi 0 Mali 00 Uo ese FA 0 400 mmr 20 40 60 80 100 120 S o 150 m min AAOOAOAORARARRAR R 0 WD oo 3 888 degr Example Threaded Stud k il Example Threaded Stud Contour element 9 The next connecting contour element Is a vertical line After you have entered the t
249. he tool position to the first contour element is the point of approach and departure If no surface normal intersects the tool position the starting point of the first element for rectangles the longer element is the point of approach and departure The tool approaches directly or on an arc according to approaching radius R Contour milling J defines whether the milling cutter is to machine on the contour center of milling cutter on the contour or on the inside outside of the contour Pocket milling roughing O 0 Contour milling J defines whether a pocket is machined from the inside towards the outside or vice versa Pocket milling finishing O 1 First the edge of the pocket is machined then the pocket floor is machined J defines whether a pocket floor is finished from the inside towards the outside or vice versa 208 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle parameters first input window T O X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle C1 angle of figure center default Spindle angle C Z1 milling top edge default Starting point Z Z2 milling floor P infeed depth default Total depth in one infeed U overlap factor No input Contour milling U gt 0 Pocket milling minimum overlap of milling paths U milling diameter 4 8 Millin I contour parallel oversize K oversize in infeed direction T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F fee
250. her quality than on a conventional lathe In addition you can teach in a machining sequence and then have MANUALplus rerun the machining operation automatically as often as desired Each additional part machined saves you time MANUALplus offers a wide range of capabilities From performing simple lathe jobs through to complex workpiece contours including drilling and milling operations on the face and lateral surface MANUALplus lets you choose between manual semi automatic and automatic operation Regardless of whether you are machining a single part producing a whole batch or repairing a workpiece MANUALplus always gives you optimum support The C axis With a C axis you can drill and mill a workpiece on its front back and lateral surfaces During use of the C axis one axis interpolates linearly or circularly with the spindle in the given working plane while the third axis interpolates linearly MANUALplus supports cycle and DIN programming with the C axis 20 1 Introduction and Fundamentals il 1 2 Features The functions of the MANUALplus are grouped into operating modes Machine mode of operation This operating mode includes all functions for machine setup workpiece machining and cycle and DIN program definition The cycle programming functions are available in both manual and automatic modes You can program cycles for roughing recessing thread cutting and drilling operations ICP programmin
251. hine operation Thread repair function for reworking threads with unclamped and re clamped workpieces Sequential linking of machining cycles Program run mode Graphic simulation of each machining cycle after completion of data input Immediate execution after input of cycle Storage of machining cycles with automatic program creation Cycle or DIN programs in single block mode or continuous run Programming machining cycles Interactive contour programming ICP mode Graphically supported cycle programming in plain language Linear and circular paths chamfers and roundings Roughing cycles for longitudinal and transverse turning operations for simple or complex contours or contours defined with ICP Recessing cycles for simple or complex contours or contours defined with ICP Recess turning cycles for simple or complex contours or contours defined with ICP Undercuts as per DIN76 DIN509E DIN509F Parting cycle Drilling deep hole drilling and tapping cycles Linear and circular hole patterns on face and lateral surface Cycles for single or multiple paraxial and tapered threads Axial and radial milling cycles for slots figures single surfaces and polygons as well as for complex contours defined with ICP Thread milling Use of DIN macros in cycle programs Hole patterns on face and lateral surface Conversion of cycle programs into DIN programs Straight line in 3 principal axes max 10 m Circle in 2 axes max
252. hined in expanded mode Be sure to enter the correct values for the parameters contour starting point X1 Z1 and contour end point X2 Z2 These parameters determine the cutting and infeed directions in this example external machining and infeed in negative X axis direction Tool data Lathe tool for external machining WO 1 Tool orientation A 93 Tool angle B 55 Point angle HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 127 il P Second step Feach in Toot management organization E X 12 002 s T 1 a 0 000 Z 92 001 2 M F Sint Nninnsnitininiiniit 20 40 60 80 ra EAN g 185 m min D 5000 r min le eedk ca zf 30 x1 60 21 30 x2 40 22 10 ys wf uis RS O O BI oe T9 sfiso Fo 3 o Start point Finishing Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back run list position tool speed finished 4 4 Roughin The area that was left out in the first step shaded area in top left figure is machined with the cycle Plunge longitudinal Expanded Before executing this step you must change tools The rounding arcs in the contour valley are also machined in expanded mode The parameters for contour starting point X1 Z1 and contour end point X2 Z2 determine the cutting and infeed directions in this example external machining and infeed in negative X axis direction The parameter for contour starting point Z1 was determined during simulation of the first step
253. i Press Transmit file file ICP Beispiel Gewindezapfen Size 8200 Byte Last change 04 09 1997 16 43 Serial T Receive mam Program Mark Mark Back z file file selection view all EERE Press Receive file koa If you have selected Receive file MANUALplus waits for the transmission of data from the serial interface The progress display shows that data transfer is active If you want to cancel the receiving status press Back C When receiving programs MANUALplus accepts all program types DIN programs DIN macros cycle programs and ICP contours The information displayed during transfer is described in Transferring programs files on page 446 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 449 E Transfer Printing DIN programs macros Progran Press Program Number 165 6817 6818 658 6817 6818 G58 6819 6819 6819 658 6819 658 G82 G82 6827 6828 6827 6828 6827 6828 G58 6827 6828 G58 6829 6829 6829 658 6829 658 683 G83 683 658 683 658 6836 6836 6836 658 6836 658 3 3 Transfer Progran Press Program selection selection DIH Press DIN programs or DIH DIN macros Back Press Back 8365801 Size 332 Byte Last change 16 11 1997 12 09 Transmit Receive Program Program Mark file file selection view all Highlight the program or Select and Mark programs or Press Mark all Press Transmit file file The informati
254. ial cycle This cycle mills a slot on the lateral surface The slot width equals the diameter of the milling cutter Cycle parameters X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle C1 angle of slot target point default Spindle angle C X1 milling top edge diameter default Starting point X Z1 target point of slot X2 milling floor L slot length A angle to Z axis default 0 P infeed depth default Total depth in one infeed FZ infeed rate default Active feed rate T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Parameter combinations for the position and orientation of the slot See graphic support window Cycle run 1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid traverse only in Teach in mode Move at rapid traverse to slot starting point X Z if defined Approach at infeed rate FZ Mill to slot end point at programmed feed rate Retract to starting point X o1 fF W KN HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 i il T O 4 8 Millin Figure radial Call the milling menu lt Select the Figure radial cycle Depending on the parameters the cycle mills one of the following contours or roughs finishes a pocket on the lateral surface Rectangle Q 4 L lt gt B Square Q 4 L B Circle Q 0 RE gt 0 L and B No input Triangle or polygon Q 3 or Q gt 4 L gt 0 Notes on parameters f
255. icated for the drilling cycle see figure at lower right Tool data WO 8 Tool orientation 5 Drilling diameter B 90 Point angle H 1 The tool Is a driven tool 236 Teach in X 12 w ax m T1 az 0 000 Z 0 00 a m ims 0 200 mn r ai 20 40 60 80 Mi 0 z c 5000 r min B 0 043 degr 5 1600 Start point Teach in X 7 000 ax T 1 az 0 000 Z 0 00 AZ F ae ree 20 40 60 80 Mi o7 z TT 5000 r min E 0 043 degr Start point drill Pattern Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back circular list position tool speed finished 4 Cycle Programming il Circular hole pattern on face P Ll A circular hole pattern is to be machined on the face of the workpiece with the Drilling axial cycle This machining operation requires a traversable spindle and driven tools The pattern center point is entered in Cartesian coordinates see figure at top right Since this example is to illustrate how you drill a through hole the hole end point Z2 is programmed such that the tool has to drill all the way through the workpiece before it reaches the end point The parameters AB and V define a feed reduction for both pre drilling and through boring see figure at lower right Tool data WO 8 Tool orientation 10 Drilling diameter B 90 Point angle H 1 The tool is a driven tool HEIDENHAIN MANUAL
256. ide or vice versa Plunge to the next milling plane Repeat 4 to 5 until the milling depth is reached Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis Pocket milling Finishing 3 4 Depending on Approaching radius R approach the workpiece and plunge to the first milling plane Finish machine the edge of the pocket one working plane after the other Depending on J finish machine the milling floor either from the inside towards the outside or vice versa Finish machine the pocket at the programmed feed rate Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 8 Millin i il T O 4 8 Millin ICP contour radial Call the milling menu Sy 00000 EEE Ee Select ICP contour radial Depending on the parameters the cycle mills a contour or roughs finishes a pocket on the lateral surface Notes on parameters functions Machining of contour or pocket defined in U Milling direction depends on definition in H and the direction of tool rotation see Cutting direction for contour milling and pocket milling on page 224 Milling cutter compensation effective except for contour milling with J 0 Approach and departure For closed contours the point of the surface normal from the tool position to the first contour element is the point of approach and departure If no surface normal intersects the tool position
257. ifariables 6 26 Programming Variables Fundamentals The MANUALoplus interprets NC programs before the program run The system therefore differentiates between two types of variables variables are evaluated during NC program interpretation V variables or events are evaluated during NC program run The following rules apply Multiplication division before addition subtraction Up to 6 bracket levels Integer variables only for V variables Integer values between 32767 and 32768 Real variables with and V variables Floating point numbers with max 10 integers and 7 decimal places The V variables are retained even if the control has been switched off in the meantime 396 SORT ABS TAN ATAN SIN ASIN COS ACOS ROUND LOGN EXP INTC Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Square root Absolute amount Tangent in degrees Arc tangent in degrees Sine in degrees Arc sine in degrees Cosine in degrees Arc cosine in degrees Round Natural logarithm Exponential function ex Cut decimal places Only with variables SORTA SORT Sc Square root of a2 b2 Square root of a2 b 6 DIN Programming il variables MANUALplus uses value ranges to define the scope of variables E 0 45 global variables Global variables are retained after the program has been completed and can be proces
258. in j il Drilling radial X1 starting point of hole default Drilling starts from position X X2 end point of hole T O C If AB and V are programmed the feed rate is reduced by 50 during both pre drilling and through boring MANUALplus uses the tool parameter driven tool to determine whether the programmed spindle speed and teed rate apply to the spindle or the driven tool Cycle run 4 7 Drillin 1 Position spindle to spindle angle C in Manual mode machining Starts from the current spindle angle 2 If defined move at rapid traverse to Z1 axial X1 radial 3 First pass pecking depth P Drill with reduced feed rate if defined 4 Retract by B or to starting point of hole and advance again to last pecking depth minus safety clearance 5 Next pass pecking depth last depth IB or JB Repeat 4 to 5 until end point Z2 X2 is reached 7 Last pass depending on V Drill at programmed feed rate to End point Z2 axial End point X2 radial Remain at end of hole for dwell time E if defined or Drill at programmed feed rate to position Z2 AB axial X2 AB radial Drill at reduced feed rate to End point Z2 axial End point X2 radial 8 If X1 Z1 has been defined retract to Starting point of hole Z1 axial Starting point of hole X1 radial If X1 Z1 has not not been defined retract to Starting point Z axial Starting point X radial
259. indle remains ON Cycle START Start a cycle cycle program or NC program Spindle jog cw Slowly rotate the spindle clockwise cw Spindle jog ccw Slowly rotate the spindle counter clockwise cew 24 1 Introduction and Fundamentals il 1 4 Axis Designations and Coordinate System Axis designations The cross slide is referred to as the X axis and the saddle as the Z axis see figure at top right All X axis values that are displayed or entered are regarded as diameters When programming paths of traverse remember to Program a positive value to depart the workpiece Program a negative value to approach the workpiece Coordinate system The axis designations X and Z describe positions in a two dimensional coordinate system As you can see from the figure to the center right the position of the tool tip is clearly defined by its X and Z coordinates MANUALplus can connect points by linear and circular paths of traverse interpolations Workpiece machining is programmed by entering the coordinates for a succession of points and connecting the points by linear or circular paths of traverse Like the paths of traverse you can also describe the complete contour of a workpiece by defining single points through their coordinates and connecting them by linear or circular paths of traverse The coordinates entered for the X axis and Z axis are referenced to the workpiece zero point Angles entered for the C axis
260. ing Safety distances Cutting and infeed directions for roughing cycles MANUALplus automatically determines the cutting and infeed directions from the cycle parameters Basic mode The parameters for starting point X Z Manual mode current tool position and contour starting point X1 contour end point Z2 determine these directions Expanded mode The parameters for contour starting point X1 Z1 and contour end point X2 Z2 determine these directions ICP cycles The parameters for contour starting point X Z Manual mode current tool position and starting point of the ICP contour determine these directions 98 Teach in X 12 002 s Z 92 001 2 0 C 00101 Toot managenent Organization T 1 0 000 F fal 10 000 mmr Sa 185 m min 0 043 degr Roughing cycles lon trans Roughing longitudinal transverse Roughing and finishing cycle for simple contours Plunge cutting longitudinal transverse Roughing and finishing cycle for simple contours ICP contour parallel longitudinal transverse Roughing and finishing cycle for any type of contour ICP roughing longitudinal transverse Roughing and finishing cycle for any type of contour 4 Cycle Programming il Tool position It is Important that you observe the tool positions starting point X Z before executing any of the roughing cycles in expanded mode However they also appl
261. ing SR return speed for enabling the tap to retract rapidly default Same spindle speed as for tapping T tool number S spindle cutting speed for the driven tool HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 197 il T O 4 7 Drillin Cycle run 1 Position spindle to spindle angle C in Manual mode machining starts from the current spindle angle 2 Position the tool to milling floor Z2 inside the hole 3 Approach on approach arc R 4 Mill the thread in a rotation of 360 while advancing by thread pitch F1 5 Retract the tool and return it to the starting point 198 4 Cycle Programming il Examples of drilling cycles Centric drilling and tapping The machining operation is to be performed in two steps In the first step the Drilling axial cycle drills the hole In the second the Tapping axial cycle taps the thread The drill is positioned at the safety clearance to the workpiece surface starting point X Z The hole starting point Z1 is therefore not programmed In the parameters AB and V you program a feed reduction see figure at upper right The thread pitch is not programmed MANUALplus uses the thread pitch of the tool The return speed SR ensures that the tool is retracted quickly see figure at lower right Tool data drill WO 8 Tool orientation 8 2 Drilling diameter B 118 Point angle H O0O The tool is not a driven tool Tool data tap WO 8 Tool orientation
262. ing steps Clamp a workpiece blank diameter 60 mm length 100 mm Machine setup Define the workpiece zero point Measure the tool dimensions Enter the tool change position Switch to the DIN editor Write the DIN program Threaded stud Simulate the DIN program Threaded stud pe O O pe am Z O 516 9 Examples il DIN program threaded stud 888 nc DIN example threaded stud N1 G14 Q1 N2 G96 S150 G95 F0 4 T1 N3 G0 X62 Z2 N4 G819 P4 HO 10 3 KO 1 N5 GO X13 Z0 N6 G1 X16 Z 1 5 N7 G1 Z 30 N8 G25 H7 11 15 K5 2 R0 8 W30 FP1 5 N9 G1 X20 N10 G1 X40 Z 35 N11 G1 Z 55 B4 N12 G1 X55 B 2 N13 G1 Z 70 N14 G1 X60 N15 G80 N16 G14 Q1 N17 G96 S220 G95 F0 2 T2 N18 G0 X62 Z2 N19 G89 N20 G42 N21 G0 X13 Z0 N22 G1 X16 Z 1 5 N23 G1 Z 30 N24 G25 H7 11 15 K5 2 R0 8 W30 FP1 5 N25 G1 X20 N26 G1 X40 Z 35 N27 G1 Z 55 B4 N28 G1 X55 B 2 N29 G1 Z 70 N30 G1 X60 N31 G80 N32 G14 Q1 N33 G97 S800 T3 N34 G0 X16 Z2 N35 G350 Z 29 F1 5 U 999 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Program number of the DIN program Program description Approach the tool change position insert the roughing tool Call roughing tool program spindle speed and feed rate Approach the workpiece Longitudinal contour roughing with recessing cycle Start point of contour description for roughing cycle 6819 Contour definition Undercut contour an element of the contour description End of contour desc
263. ins stored in the clipboard until it is overwritten or MANUALoplus is switched off Position the cursor on the beginning of a block Block Call the block functions function Mark Mark the beginning of the block start Position the cursor on the end of a block Mark Mark the end of the block end Copy Copy the block and transfer it to the clipboard Cut Cut the block out and transfer it to the out clipboard Load a new DIN program if required Place the cursor on the position where the block is to be inserted Insert Transfer the block sequence from the can clipboard the NC blocks are inserted below the cursor HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 E 6817 6818 J H 1 G14 Q0 H 2 T2 G95 FO 4 G96 5195 NS m Pa 6 G1 2 15 G1 X862 B2 6 G1 X90 Zi 15 we A G function 6 2 Editing aA ii j i Menu structure Select the function group by menu key Machine Toot management organization G and M functions The function number and further rae Scare parameters that vary depending on the function are N 1 614Q0 H 2 T2 G95 FO 4 G96 5195 M3 entered subsequently H H H H H 3 GO 120 22 f 4 6818 PS H2 I1 KO 3 Comment subprogram and T S F The required parameters are entered subsequently Variable functions MANUALplus switches to other menus for entering further data 5 GO X60 22 6 G1 2 15 7 G1 X82 B2 a 6 2 Editing INA grams G function
264. ion is necessary for example for calculating the cutting radius compensation plunging angle etc Reference point The setting dimensions X Z refer to the tool reference point The position of the reference point depends on the tool type see graphic support window Editing tool data When you press one of the menu keys MANUALplus displays the associated parameter input window and a graphic support window in which all parameters for this tool type are illustrated The tool data are edited in two input windows The first input window contains the parameters specific to this tool type the second contains the cutting data as well as information on the spindle rotation direction and tool life monitoring You only need to switch to the second input window if you want to use this data KE Tool parameters whose identification letters are shown in gray can be entered optionally MANUALplus uses these parameters when specific cycle parameters are not entered when plunging angles or feed rates need to be calculated etc You will find more information on the use of these parameters in the description of the tool data and the cycles 418 7 Tool Management Mode il Lathe tools 2 The graphic support window illustrates how goose necked roughing and finishing tools for longitudinal machining are dimensioned WO 1 3 5 and 7 On the next page you will find information on the dimensions of facing tools neutral tools and button to
265. ion to the next contour element is determined by soft key GF Error messages that occur during definition of the ICP contour are often caused by forgotten tangential transitions HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Tangential transition A from linear to circular element P Tangential transition re f from circular element to circular or linear element for direction of 7 rotation see symbol 245 5 2 Editing ICP i 5 2 Editing ICP BB cours Contour graphics As soon as you have entered a contour element MANUALplus checks whether the element is solved or unsolved A solved element is a contour element that is fully and unambiguously defined It is drawn immediately Unsolved contour element has not yet been fully defined MANUALplus shows a symbol below the graphics window which reflects the element type and the line direction direction of rotation An unsolved linear element is represented if the Starting point and direction are known An unsolved circular element is represented as a full circle if the circle center and the radius are known see figure at upper right As soon as an unsolved contour element can be calculated it is drawn by MANUALplus The symbol is then deleted see figure at lower right An incorrect contour element is displayed if possible In addition an error message Is Issued Colors in contour graphics Solved and unsolved contour elements as well as selected co
266. ions like Take over position you do not have to enter values manually The data are automatically written into the appropriate input fields Data entries are not concluded until the Save or Input finished soft key has been pressed The Back soft key takes you back to the previous operating level HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 2 2 Operation and _ 2 2 Operation and oat ut Data input Input windows comprise several input fields You can move the cursor to the desired input field with the vertical arrow keys The function of the selected field is shown in the bottom line of the window Place the highlight on the desired input field and enter the data Existing data are overwritten With the horizontal arrow keys you can move the cursor within the input field and place it on the position where you want to delete copy or add characters To confirm the data you entered in a field press a vertical arrow key or the ENTER key If there are more input fields than a window can show a second input window is used You will recognize this through the symbol in the bottom line of the input window To switch back and forth between the windows press the PgUp PgDn keys LF Data entry is concluded when you press Input finished or Save lf you press the Back soft key entries or changes will be lost List operations Cycle programs DIN programs tool lists etc are displayed as lists You can scroll through a list with the arrow keys
267. irection Approach workpiece on paraxial path for first pass from X Z Machine the workpiece according to the calculated proportioning Of CUTS Return and approach for next pass Repeat 3 to 4 until the defined area has been machined Return to starting point on paraxial path 118 4 Cycle Programming il ICP contour parallel finishing longitudinal transverse Call the Roughing longitudinal transverse cycles T Select ICP contour parallel longitudinal see figures at right Select ICP contour parallel transverse see figures on the following page Finishing Press the Finishing run soft key run The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position att Danger of collision If the tool angle and the tool point angle have not been defined the tool plunge cuts at the plunging angle If the tool and point angles have been defined the tool plunge cuts at the maximum possible plunging angle In this case the resulting contour will not be completely finished and may need to be reworked Cycle parameters X Z starting point N ICP contour number T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 4 Roughin b il Cycle run 1 Move on paraxial path from X Z to contour starting point oO 2 Finish defined contour area
268. is advised to approach the tool change point and then to define the parameters using Take over position 52 3 Machine Mode of Operation il Setting C axis values The zero point for the C axis can be defined as follows Pitty OAR TIT o Select Setup Press Set C axis values Position the C axis ian Define the position as the zero point of the C axis Enter the zero point shift of the C axis Confirm entry for MANUALplus to calculate the zero aa point of the C axis ped Delete zero point shift of the C axis HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 3 4 Maci Setup Tools kar V LO ae 3 5 Setting up Tools MANUALplus offers functions for measuring tools by touching the workpiece with the tool or by using a touch probe or an optical gauge Set the measuring method in machine parameter 6 If the tool dimensions are already known you can enter the setup dimensions directly in the Tool management mode of operation In the tool table enter the tool you want to measure see Tool Data O D O feb Q 0D L CO Insert the reference tool and enter the T number in Seth S F Turn an end face and define this coordinate as the workpiece zero point Return to Set T S F insert the tool to be measured and enter the associated T number Ib Measure Activate Measure tool p Touch the end face with the too
269. is the point of approach and departure For contour milling and finishing pocket milling define with R whether the tool is to approach directly or in an arc Oversizes are taken into account if K are not programmed G57 Oversize in X Z direction G58 The oversize shifts the milling contour as follows With inside milling and closed contour The contour is contracted With outside milling and closed contour The contour is expanded With open contour and Q 1 Left in machining direction With open contour and O 2 Right in machining direction HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 a T Ti N j il a O Ti N e Area milling face G797 Depending on O G797 mills surfaces polygons or the figure defined in the command following G797 Parameters X limiting diameter Z milling top edge ZE milling floor gt B width across flats omit for Q 0 B defines the remaining material For an even number of surfaces you can program B as an alternative to V E Q 1 Remaining thickness E Q gt 2 Width across flats gt V edge length omit for Q 0 gt R chamfer rounding arc omit for Q 0 E R lt 0 Chamfer length R gt 0 Rounding arc gt A slope angle reference see graphic support window omit for O 0 gt Q number of surfaces default 0 Range 0 lt Q lt 127 E Q 0 G797 is followed by a figure definition Q 1 One surface E Q 2 Two surfaces offset by 180
270. isites for a dry run are The MANUALplus must be prepared by the machine tool builder for dry run The function is activated with a keylock switch or a key The Program Run mode must be activated In dry run all feed paths except thread cuts are traversed at the rapid rate You can reduce the traversing speed with the feed rate override Do not use the dry run feature for anything other than cutting air When dry run is activated the spindle status or spindle speed is frozen After deactivation of the dry run the MANUALoplus returns to the programmed feed rates and spindle speeds att Use the dry run feature only to cut air HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 3 8 Program i Mode a a as 3 9 Graphic 3 9 Graphic Simulation The graphic simulation feature enables you to check the machining sequence the proportioning of cuts and the finished contour before actual machining In the Manual and Teach in modes this function simulates the execution of a single cycle in Program run mode it simulates a complete cycle or DIN program A programmed workpiece blank is displayed in the simulation graphics MANUALplus also simulates machining operations that are executed with a traversable spindle or the C axis on the face or lateral surface This allows you to check the complete machining process In Manual mode and Teach in mode the cycle you are currently working on is simulated In the Program run mode
271. it easier to find the tool data again when needed The Machine mode has functions for determining the tool length dimensions see Setting up Tools on page 54 Wear compensation is managed separately This allows you to enter new compensation values at any time even during program run You can assign specific cutting data to the tools spindle speed feed rate which is then transferred simply at the touch of a key as cycle parameters or machine data This saves you a lot of time since you only need to determine and enter the cutting data once Tool types Tools for drilling recessing finishing etc have very different shapes Therefore the reference points for determining the tool length and other tool data also vary MANUALplus differentiates Lathe tools this group comprises Roughing tools Finishing tools Fine finishing tools Copying tools Button tools Recessing tools this group comprises Recessing tools Undercut tools Parting tools Recess turning tools Thread cutting tools All kinds of threading tools except tapping tools 412 Machine e Tool managenent a Xl 72 024 T1 32 Z 92 001 es i F fi 10 000 mmr Q 20 40 60 80 100120 ae ee eee ee ee eee a t 0 m min 100 0 043 degr Tool list ofromnoanaanm 8 8 8 0 0 a 4 Lathe tool List List Cut Copy Insert Delete Search start end out 7 Tool Managemen
272. ition cycle programming 90 Defining the tool change position 52 Tool change point G14 291 Tool edge compensation G148 302 Tool life monitoring Fundamentals 59 Tool data 427 Tools Power driven tools 47 Reference point 418 Supplementary parameters 426 T display 47 T number entering in cycle mode 46 Tool administration tool management 412 Tool call 47 Tool compensation entering 58 Tool data 418 Tool dimensions fundamentals 28 Tool input menu 418 Tool life management 427 Tool life monitoring working with 59 Tool list 414 Tool organization Fundamentals 414 Tool orientation 418 Tool texts 416 Tool types 412 Tool programming DIN programming 392 Tools in different quadrants 48 Tool tio and cutter radius compensation DIN programming 300 Fundamentals 28 Touch probe 56 Touch off 54 Transfer 441 Index o il Index Transfer values for subprograms Transferring parameters 451 Transferring tool data 452 Twist drill cutter 413 Twist drills 413 U Undercut 344 345 Cycle programming 407 W Wait for moment G204 391 Warnings during simulation 38 Wear compensation 412 WHILE command DIN programming 402 WINDOW command DIN programming 394 WINDOWS networks 442 Wire frame graphics simulation 68 Word functions DIN programming 28
273. ization axial and radial holes X 72 00 E T 1 E oe For pattern machining see Drilling 10 000 mm Milling Patterns on page 227 Z 52 001 F E er ninntndnnninninnininnnninini 20 40 60 80 100120 185 m min 0 COON Sauna D 5000 r min BLISS o 0 043 degr I IE The constant cutting speed may only be programmed with driven tools on machines with spindle control 4 7 Drillin Axial Radial drilling cycle For drilling single holes and patterns Axial Radial deep drilling cycle For drilling single holes and patterns Axial Radial tapping cycle For drilling single holes and patterns Thread milling For milling threads in existing holes 190 4 Cycle Programming il Drilling axial radial Call the drilling menu Select the Drilling axial cycle Select the Drilling radial cycle This cycle drills a hole on the face lateral surface of the workpiece Cycle parameters X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle E dwell time for chip breaking at end of hole default O AB drilling lengths default O V drilling variants default O 0 No feed rate reduction 1 Feed reduction for through boring 2 Feed reduction for pre drilling 3 Feed reduction for pre drilling and through boring o retreat default O 0 Rapid traverse 1 Feed rate T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Drilling
274. izontal expansion These parameters define the standard workpiece blank and are used for calculating the unrolled lateral surface Outside diameter The unrolled lateral surface is calculated from the diameter Length of blank Horizontal dimension of unrolled lateral Surface Right edge of blank part Position of the unrolled lateral surface relative to the coordinate origin If you enter a positive value the right blank edge is located to the right of the coordinate origin Inside diameter non functional The following safety clearances are used in several cycles and during execution of specific DIN cycles see cycle definitions External safety clearance SAR Internal safety clearance SIR External on machined part SAT Internal on machined part SIT 8 Organization Mode of Operation il Configuration parameters You can call the Config uration parameters 2 menu item only with system manager authorization see Access authorization on page 453 The configuration parameters are divided into three groups Machine parameters Control parameters PLC parameters See machine manual The parameters are identified with numbers You can either call a parameter directly if you already know its number or display the parameter list In the parameter list you then simply highlight the desired parameter and confirm your selection with ENTER C Some configuration parameters are also included in the
275. k mode with which you can machine a workpiece for example the first of a whole batch step by step You can start a cycle or DIN program at any desired block to resume a machining operation after an interruption The program run mode can be switched on with the soft key and is displayed in the header If you press Program run MANUALplus reads in the program that was last active in this mode or in the editing mode Alternately you can select another program with Program list see Program Management on page 75 Faulty programs The MANUALoplus checks the programs during loading If it detects an error for example a programmed tool that does not appear in the tool list it displays the error symbol in the screen headline You can then press the Info key for detailed information on the error MANUALplus does not translate faulty cycles but inserts a Cycle STOP at the respective position All correct cycles of this program are translated alt Danger of collision For programs with faulty cycles ensure that the program can be executed without danger of collision Before executing a program Check the cycles and cycle parameters MANUALplus displays the cycle program or the DIN program in the list window With cycle programs the parameters of the cycle on which the cursor is placed are displayed Graphic control You can monitor program run with the graphic simulation feature see Graphic Simulation on
276. l Enter the value 0 for the measuring point coordinate Z workpiece zero point Save the tool dimensions the compensation value is deleted j cu aa La Pd lt La SA Turn a measuring diameter Enter the diameter value as measuring point coordinate X Save the tool dimensions the compensation value is deleted j mi Ea La La Enter the cutting radius Cave Transfer the cutting radius to the tool table radius O1 4 3 Machine Mode of Operation There are several ways to determine tool dimensions The following method describes how the dimensions are determined by comparing a tool with an already measured tool IE The graphic support window shows the details of the tool measurement process taking the selected tool type and tool orientation into account HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 3 5 Senin Tools Tools E Y Lt In the tool table enter the tool you want to measure see Tool Data on page 418 ss z T ee a p MAF Insert the tool and enter the T number in Set T S F S ay Measure Activate Measure tool tool Pre position the tool for the first direction of measurement Press the soft key for this direction e g Z direction Press Cycle START The tool moves in the direction of measurement When It contacts the touch probe t
277. l offset Enter the tool number Press Save for the valid compensation data to be displayed In the Input window Save Enter the compensation values Transfer the compensation values see Setting up Tools on page 54 Save Activate the additive compensation Tool Add correct Additive correct Enter the number of the additive compensation Press Save for the valid compensation data to be displayed Save Enter the compensation values TVE Press Save HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Program run T 1 dx 0 000 dz 0 000 10 000 on r fol ni 1 00 0 20 40 60 80 100120 CS ee al eae eel Te eee eT aes o E S D 5000 S Set tool correction 185 m min 0 043 degr 1110 ICP arr Gewindezapfen H2 T2 Rap tray positioning H3 T2 ICP cut longitud N111 H4 T2 Rap tray positioning N5 T6 ICP finish longit N111 N6 T6 Rap tray positioning H T45 Thread cycle H8 T45 Tool change point Tool number Program run T 1 dx 0 000 dz 0 000 A 10 000 mmr E Fe k t 100 9 20 40 60 80 100120 Phan Sn SE D 5000 r min 1 100 Set additive correction 185 m min 0 043 degr 1110 ICP irr Geuindezapfen N2 T2 Rap tray positioning N3 T2 ICP cut longitud N111 H4 T2 Rap tray positioning N5 T6 ICP finish longit N111
278. l paraxial contour corners along the longitudinal axis Cutting radius compensation Active Oversizes are not taken into account 352 Example G858 6 DIN Programming il 6 17 Parting Cycle Parting cycle G859 The cycle G859 parts the workpiece If programmed a chamfer or rounding arc is machined on the outside diameter At the end of cycle the tool retracts and returns to the starting point You can define a feed rate reduction after position Parameters X parting diameter Z parting position I diameter for feed reduction E is defined The control switches to feed rate E after this position E is not defined No feed rate reduction XE inside diameter tube E reduced feed rate default Active feed rate B chamfer rounding B gt 0 Radius of rounding m B lt 0 Width of chamfer HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Example G859 j i 6 18 Drilling Cycles Drilling cycle G71 You can use cycle G71 with stationary tools for drilling axial holes in the turning center and with driven tools for drilling axial and radial holes Parameters X end point of axial hole diameter value Z end point of radial hole gt A drilling lengths default 0 gt E dwell time for chip breaking at end of hole default 0 gt V drilling variants fFeed rate reduced by 50 during both pre drilling and through boring E 0 No feed rate reduction E 1 Feed reduction for thr
279. l always rough machines the recess first In the second step the recess is then finish machined E f you do not wish to cut the chamfers you must position the tool at a sufficient distance from the workpiece Calculation for radial recess XS XK 2 1 3 b XS Starting position diameter value XK Contour diameter b Chamfer width The starting position is calculated accordingly for an axial recess E At the end of the cycle the tool is located at For radial recess E X Starting position E Z Last recess position For axial recess E X Last recess position E Z Starting position CS Cutter radius compensation is not carried out Oversizes are not taken into account 330 m x O 3 D G O0 6 DIN Programming il 6 14 Recess Turning Cycles Function of recess turning cycles The defined contour area is machined by alternate recessing and roughing movements The machining process requires a minimum of retraction and infeed movements The contour to be machined may contain various valleys If required the area to be machined is divided into several sections To influence recess turning operations use the following parameters Recessing feed O Feed rate for recessing If O is not defined the active feed rate for turning and recessing operations is effective Turning operation unidirectional bidirectional U You can perform a unidirectional or bidirectional turning opera
280. l and point angles have been defined the tool plunge cuts at the maximum possible plunging angle In this case the resulting contour will not be completely finished and may need to be reworked For workpiece blank oversize J gt 0 Set the infeed depth P to the smaller infeed if the maximum infeed differs for the longitudinal and transverse directions due to the cutting geometry Cycle parameters X Z starting point P infeed depth the infeed depth is determined taking J into account J 0 P is the maximum infeed depth The cycle reduces the infeed depth if the programmed infeed is not possible in the transverse or longitudinal direction due to the cutting geometry J gt 0 P is the infeed depth This infeed is used in the longitudinal and transverse directions I K oversize X Z N ICP contour number J workpiece blank oversize the cycle machines J 0 From the current tool position J gt 0 The area defined by the workpiece blank oversize T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 4 Roughin T O 4 4 Roughin Cycle run 1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts infeed taking the parameter J into account E J 0 The cutting geometry is taken into account This may result in the use of different infeeds for the longitudinal and transverse directions E J gt 0 The same infeed is used for both the longitudinal and the transverse d
281. l mode Tcl Press Tool correct offset v offset Select X offset for tool t tool The compensation values that you determine per handwheel are now shown in the Distance to go display Gaye Transfer the compensation value to the tool table The T display shows the new compensation value The distance to go display is cancelled Repeat this procedure for the tool compensation Z and the special compensation Select Set T S F only available in Manual mode Tool Select Tool correct offset Anes Cancel the compensation value entered in X n oOffset Repeat this procedure for the tool compensation Z and the special compensation 3 Machine Mode of Operation Tool life monitoring If desired you can have MANUALplus monitor tool life or the number of parts that are produced with a specific tool The tool life monitoring function adds the times a tool is traversed at the machine feed rate and counts the number of finished parts The count is compared with the entry in the tool data As soon as the tool life expires or the programmed quantity is reached MANUALplus generates an error message and stops program execution after the end of the program If you are working with program repeats M99 in DIN programs the system Is stopped after execution of the current repeat Tool life monitoring should be carried out for each tool used The tool life monitoring data type of monitoring
282. l parameters the cycles generate spindle trigger functions M3 or M4 tE Your machine manual provides further information on automatically triggered switching functions Comments You may assign a comment to an existing cycle The comment is inserted in brackets below the cycle Create select a cycle 4 1 Work Press the Change text soft key text Enter the comment with the on screen alohanumeric keyboard Transfer the comment 82 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle menu The main menu shows the cycle groups Once a cycle group has been selected the soft keys for the individual cycles appear You can use ICP cycles for complex contours and DIN macros for technologically sophisticated machining operations see ICP Contours on page 242 and DIN Programming on page 278 In cycle programs the numbers of the ICP contours or DIN macros are at the end of the line of the cycle Some cycles offer optional parameters That means specific contour elements will only be machined If you set the corresponding parameters The identification letters for optional parameters and parameters that are preassigned default values are displayed in gray The following parameters are only required in Teach in mode Starting point X Z Machine data S F and T HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 cles Teach in X 7 000 ax moo T 1 Z 32 001 2 ninntninntninninanniniininin 20 40 60 80 100120 S Ar D 50
283. l the first plane Plunge to the next milling plane Repeat 5 to 6 until the milling depth is reached Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis Pocket milling Roughing 3 4 5 6 7 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling plane Depending on J machine the milling plane either from the inside towards the outside or vice versa Plunge to the next milling plane Repeat 4 to 5 until the milling depth is reached Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis Pocket milling Finishing 3 Depending on R approach the workpiece and plunge to the first milling plane 4 Finish machine the edge of the pocket one working plane after the other 5 Depending on J finish machine the milling floor either from the inside towards the outside or vice versa 6 Finish machine the pocket at the programmed feed rate 7 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis 222 4 Cycle Programming il Helical slot milling radial Call the milling menu Select the Helical slot milling radial cycle The cycle mills a helical slot from Z1 to Z2 Starting angle C1 defines the starting position for the slot The slot width equals the diameter of the milling cutter Cycle parameters X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle C1 starting angle X1 diameter of thread Z1 starting point of thread Fl thread pitch F1 positive Right hand th
284. ld Meas pt coordin Z Caye Transfer the entered position as protection zone Switch off protective zone monitoring off Display of the status of protective zone monitoring Display symbol 9 of the machine display shows the current status of protective zone monitoring see Configuration parameters on page 435 control parameter 301 ce Protective zone monitoring is not active if the input window Set protect zone is open In DIN programming protective zone monitoring can be deactivated with M417 and reactivated with M418 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Protective zone monitoring active Protective zone monitoring not active 51 Setup O x e 3 4 vac Setup Defining the tool change position With the cycle Move to tool change position or the DIN command G14 the slide moves to the tool change point Always program the tool change point as far from the workpiece as possible to avoid damage to the workpiece during tool change Defining the teot change positon Select Setup E i Press Tool change point Approach the tool change position Move to the tool change point using the jog keys or the handwheel Take over Define this position as tool change point position The coordinates of the tool change position are entered and displayed as distance between machine zero point and tool carrier zero point As these values are not displayed it
285. le Programming il Cycle parameters first input window X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle C1 angle of figure center default Spindle angle C X1 diameter of figure center Z1 milling top edge default Starting point Z Z2 milling floor L rectangle length Rectangle Length of rectangle Square polygon Edge length Circle No input ee B rectangle width Rectangle Width of rectangle Square L B Polygon circle No input RE rounding radius default O Rectangle square polygon Rounding radius Circle Radius of circle A angle to X axis default 0 Rectangle square polygon Position of figure Circle No input Q number of edges default O OQ 0 Circle Q 4 Rectangle square Q 3 Triangle Q gt 4 Polygon T tool number spindle speed cutting speed feed per revolution T N HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 205 il Cycle parameters second input window T O P infeed depth default Total depth in one infeed ET U overlap factor Ol vr gt No input Contour milling U gt 0 Pocket milling minimum overlap of milling paths U milling diameter I contour parallel oversize K oversize in infeed direction FZ infeed rate default Active feed rate E reduced feed rate for circular elements default Active feed rate H cutting direction default 0 H 0 Up cut milling H 1 Climb milling 4 8 Millin J contour milling defau
286. le end point and the current tool position Retraction length J default 0 when using floating tap holders Notes E The control starts execution of the cycle at the current tool and spindle position The starting point is approached at rapid traverse Axial hole Do not program X E Define Z Radial hole Define X Do not program Z m E X and Z are programmed The control uses the tool orientation to decide whether a radial or an axial hole is machined see Tapping tools on page 424 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 35 m x D 3 D G W 6 18 Drilling Cycles Thread milling axial G799 The cycle mills a thread in existing holes Place the tool on the center of the hole before calling G799 The cycle positions the tool on the end point of the thread within the hole The tool then approaches on approaching radius R mills the thread in a rotation of 360 while advancing by F Following that the cycle retracts the tool and returns it to the starting point Parameters I inside diameter of thread Z starting point of thread K thread depth gt R approaching radius default R I milling diameter 2 F thread pitch J left hand right hand default 0 Direction of thread m J 0 Right hand E J 1 Left hand gt H cutting direction default 0 E H 0 Up cut milling E H 1 Climb milling 6 18 Cycles Use thread milling
287. lement Circular machining cycle programming 94 DIN programming Circular path G12 G18 295 Circular path G2 G3 293 Face G102 G103 362 Lateral surface G112 G113 374 ICP contour Face 270 Lateral surface 274 Turning contour 262 Comments 279 Comment blocks in cycle programs 82 Comments editing DIN programming 284 DIN programming 279 Compensation values 65 Computer name 444 Configuration parameters 435 Configuring for data transfer 444 Constant cutting speed DIN cycle G96 G196 299 Fundamentals 49 Continuous run Program execution 64 Simulation 71 Contour definition DIN programming 310 Contour direction ICP 249 Contour display Simulation 71 Contour finishing G89 318 Contour repeat cycle simple G83 321 Index j il Index Contour roughing Contour parallel G836 317 Longitudinal G817 G818 311 Longitudinal with recessing G819 313 Transverse G827 G828 314 Transverse with recessing G829 316 Contour splitting ICP 258 Contour parallel roughing DIN cycle G836 317 ICP contour parallel cycle programming 117 Contours ICP Contour editing 254 Contour elements face 268 Contour elements lateral surface 272 Contour elements turning contour 260 Contour graphics 246 Conversion into DIN format 77 Coordinate system 25 Copying tools 412 Countersinks counterbores
288. linear radial Call the drilling menu Select Drilling radial see figure at upper right Select Deep hole drilling radial See figure at center right Select Slot radial see figure at top of next page Select ICP contour radial see middle figure on next page Pattern Press the Pattern linear soft key linear Press Pattern linear to machine hole patterns or figure patterns in which the individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a straight line on the lateral surface 232 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle parameters X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle Z1 starting point of pattern Position of 1st hole slot polar coordinates C1 angle of 1st hole slot Starting angle polar coordinates ZE end point of pattern default Z1 Wi angle increment pattern spacing default Holes slots etc are arranged at a regular spacing on the circumference Q number of holes slots default 1 T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution The pattern positions are defined with ZE Wi or Wi Q MANUALplus also interrogates the parameters that are required for machining the respective elements Cycle run 1 oO oo AUN Positioning depending on the machine configuration Without C axis Position to spindle angle C With C axis Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at
289. lt 0 depending on U the following applies Pocket milling and J 0 On the contour Pocket milling and J 1 Inside Pocket milling and J 2 Outside Contour milling and J 0 From the inside towards the outside Contour milling and J 1 From the outside towards the inside 0 roughing finishing Milling sequence only for pocket milling default O O 0 Roughing O 1 Finishing R approaching radius Radius of approaching departing arc default O R 0 Contour element is approached directly feed to starting point above the milling plane then vertical plunge R gt 0 Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0 for inside corners Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0 for outside corners Length of linear approaching departing element contour element is approached departed tangentially 206 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run 1 2 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid traverse only in Teach in mode Calculate the proportioning of cuts infeeds to the milling planes infeeds in the milling planes Contour milling 3 o1 f Depending on R approach the workpiece and plunge to the first milling plane Mill the first plane Plunge to the next milling plane Repeat 5 to 6 until the milling depth is reached Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis Po
290. lt DX lt 100mm DZ wear compensation in Z Range 100mm lt DZ lt 100mm Q tool text Reference to tool text MD direction of rotation default Not defined 3 M3 4 M4 TS cutting spindle speed default Not defined TF feed rate default Not defined PT tool 1ife default Not defined RT Display field for remaining tool life PZ quantity default Not defined RZ Display field for remaining quantity C For milling operations with constant cutting speed cutter diameter I is used to calculate the spindle speed The number of teeth K is evaluated for G913 Feed per tooth see Feed Rate and Spindle Speed on page 297 The parameter is used to depict the tool during simulation alt Danger of collision Be sure to specify the direction of tool rotation HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 i Data S il 7 5 Tool Data supplementaniiificameters 75 Tool Data Supplementary Parameters The second input window contains information on direction of rotation cutting data data on tool life monitoring etc You can switch between the input windows using PgUp PgDn Driven tool The Tool driven parameter allows you to define for drilling and tapping tools whether switching commands are generated for the spindle or the driven tool Milling tools are always considered driven tools Direction of rotation If you define a direction of rotation a switching command M3 or M4 is automatically generate
291. lt x lt te te 3 3 3 3 D D G G fee 00 N _ 6 DIN Programming il Recess turning cycle longitudinal G815 transverse G825 The cycles machine the contour area described by current tool position and the data defined in the subsequent blocks see Contour definition on page 310 Parameters X cutting limit diameter value Z cutting limit P maximum infeed The proportioning of cuts is calculated so that an abrasive cut is avoided and the infeed distance is lt P I oversize X default 0 K oversize Z default 0 Q roughing finishing default O O 0 The recess is first rough machined with consideration of the oversizes and then finish machined at finishing feed E Q 1 Only roughing Q 2 Finishing only l K defines the material to be machined ce unidirectional turning default 0 U 0 bidirectional U 1 Unidirectional G815 In direction of spindle G825 In direction of contour definition offset width default 0 turning depth compensation default 0 recessing feed rate default Active feed rate finishing feed default Active feed rate m O 5 WwW HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 14 neces turd Cycles j il 6 14 Recess tur Mi Cycles m m x x 3 3 3 3 M G G 00 00 N O1 O1 Note on the execution of the cycle E Tool position at the end of the cycle Cycle starting point C t is absolutely necessary to define the oversizes
292. m The following input parameters refer to spindle 1 speed Off Constant cutting speed m min when a driven tool is active Spindle speed Constant cutting speed Maximum speed Feed per revolution in Set T S F nae HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 47 il 3 3 vadi Data CS If a driven tool is active the spindle speed and speed limitation refer to the tool Your machine documentation provides information on whether the driven tool can be operated with feed per revolution Tools with more than one cutting edge If you use special tools with more than one cutting edge different tool parameters apply set up dimensions cutting radius etc Enter more than one tool definition to define these tools If T is programmed with four digits Tddpp program a new dd pp remains the same when another cutting edge of the special tool is used Tools in different quadrants Example The principal tool carrier of your lathe is in front of the workpiece standard quadrant An additional tool holder is behind the workpiece When MANUALplus is configured it is defined for each tool holder whether the X dimensions and the direction of rotation of circular arcs must be mirrored In the above mentioned example the additional tool holder is assigned the attribute Mirrored If this method is used all machining operations are programmed as usual regardless of which tool holder executes the operation The simulation also shows
293. m elements AL JS Select thread undercut DIN 76 DIN 76 For thread undercut DIN 76 the diameter of the longitudinal element represents the thread diameter or with internal threads the core diameter Parameters XS ZS starting point in X Z Starting point of undercut X Z target point in X Z End point of undercut FP thread pitch default Value from standard table I undercut diameter default Value from standard table K undercut length default Value from standard table W undercut angle default Value from standard table R undercut radius default Value from standard table J element position default 1 J 1 Undercut starts with the longitudinal element and ends with the transverse element J 1 Undercut starts with the transverse element and ends with the longitudinal element F special feed Parameters that are not defined are automatically calculated from the standard table see DIN 76 undercut parameters on page 525 The thread pitch FP is determined from the diameter starting point XS The parameters I K W and R are calculated from the thread pitch FP GS If you are programming an internal thread it is advisable to preset the thread pitch FP since the diameter of the longitudinal element is not the thread diameter If you have MANUALplus calculate the thread pitch automatically slight deviations may occur The element position J cannot be entered when
294. maximum tool life remaining tool life and the maximum number of pieces remaining number of pieces are managed in the tool data The tool life monitoring data are also edited and displayed in the tool data see Tool Data Supplementary Parameters on page 426 Tool life monitoring is enabled and disabled in Current parameters Setup parameters Tool monitoring You must update the data on tool life and number of pieces in the Tool management mode when you replace the cutting edge of a tool HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Program run Tool adninistration 600 Tt l 2 000 az F E 0 400 mn r Tools S Oo 20 40 60 80 100120 S 180 m min e TUT LTH TT 0 1 100 955 r min CNC error display 1 a to K Ebene 6304 Chanal 1 12 18 05 fab aps aml 2 22 J 10 LO P 5 Th ap sfi80 F 0 4 PLC Logic Osc Iior Back diagnosis analyser Scope 3 6 Manual Mode With manual workpiece machining you move the axes with the handwheels or jog controls You can also use cycles for machining complex contours semi automatic mode The paths of traverse and the cycles however are not stored After switch on and traversing the reference marks MANUALoplus is always In Manual mode This mode remains active until you select Teach in or Program run You can return to Manual mode with the Menu key Machine displayed in the header indicates that you are in Manual mode Define the wo
295. menu and the soft key row to the main menu Whether a reference run is necessary depends on the encoders used EnDat encoder Reference run is not necessary Distance coded encoders The position of the axes is ascertained after a short reference run HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 3 2 Switch On a X 2 002 s T 1 ans Z Soo eee i qom 10 000 nm r 0O 20 40 60 80 100120 ae ee ee eee ee ee ee S winada 0 SO 185 m min D 5000 r min 1 Moos 0 043 degr Standard encoder The axes move to known machine based points As soon as a reference mark is traversed a Signal is transmitted to the control The control knows the distance between the reference mark and the machine zero point and can now establish the precise position of the axis Fi lt tE In case you traverse the reference marks separately for the X and Z axes you only traverse in either the X or the Z axis Monitoring EnDat encoders If EnDat encoders are used the control saves the axis positions during switch off During switch on the MANUALplus compares for each axis the position during switch on with the position saved during switch off If there is a difference one of the following messages appears 3 2 Switch On Axis was moved after the machine was switched off Check the current position and confirm it if the axis was in fact moved Saved encoder position of the axis is invalid This me
296. mitted as machining command only for G102 G103 Parameter Z 362 m x D 3 G oh N G om W 1 6 DIN Programming il Linear slot face G791 G791 mills a slot from the current tool position to the end point The slot width equals the diameter of the milling cutter Oversizes are not taken into account Parameters X diameter end point of slot C end angle end point of slot for angle direction see graphic support window XK end point of slot Cartesian coordinates YK end point of slot Cartesian coordinates K length of slot referenced to the cutter center gt A angle of slot reference see graphic support window Z milling floor J milling depth E J is defined The tool approaches to safety clearance and then mills the slot E Jis not defined The milling cycle starts from the tool position gt P maximum infeed default Total depth in one infeed F feed rate for infeed default Active feed rate Possible parameter combinations for definition of the end point E Diameter X end angle C E End point XK YK E Slot length K angle A Notes E Rotate the spindle to the desired angle position before calling G791 E f you use a spindle positioning device no C axis an axial slot is machined centrically to the rotary axis HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 a T Ti N Te m x O 3 gc D G SJ cmt j
297. n Direct error messages The MANUALoplus uses direct error messages whenever immediate error correction is possible and advisable for example if the input value of a cycle parameter exceeds the valid input range Confirm the message with ENTER and correct the error see figure to the upper right Information of direct error messages The error description explains the error that has occurred The error number is needed whenever you contact the machine manufacturer about a specific error message The time shows you when the indicated error occurred Error display The control temporarily stores any errors or messages that appear during system start operation or program run and sets the error symbol in the top line Using the Info key open the error window to view the messages If more error messages have occurred than can be shown in one screen page of the error window you can scroll through the error display with the arrow keys and PgUp PgDn to check all messages 36 Teach in Error 10 10 09 52 21 Incorrect input format or value range exceeded Valid range 0 90 5000 r min Recessing radial E xf 72 002 2 52 001 ap al 2 3 o zaja oo Pho a fs00 Uo PA B e N o TS Foo o ooo Start Warning Ihe program run operation continues MANUALplus points out the problem Error The program run operation is stopped You must correct the error before b
298. n C Oversizes An oversize programmed with G58 Is taken into account if is not defined in the cycle After the cycle has been executed the oversize is canceled 318 6 DIN Programming il 6 12 Simple Turning Cycles Roughing longitudinal G81 G81 machines the contour area defined by the current tool position and X Z in longitudinal direction Parameters X starting point of contour section diameter value Z end point of contour section I maximum infeed in X The proportioning of cuts is calculated so that an abrasive cut is avoided and the calculated infeed distance is lt E gt 0 With machining contour outline E lt 0 Without machining contour outline gt K offset Infeed in Z default 0 Q G function infeed Infeed is executed through G function Q 0 Infeed with GO E Q 1 Infeed with G1 gt V type of retraction default 0 E V 0 Return to cycle starting point in Z and last retraction diameter in X E V 1 Return to starting point of cycle Note on the execution of the cycle E f you wish to machine an oblique cut you can define the angle with and K MANUALplus automatically determines the cutting and infeed directions from the current tool position relative to the starting point end point of the contour area CS Cutter radius compensation is not carried out Oversizes Oversizes programmed with G57 are taken into account The oversizes remain
299. n transverse direction from X Z to X1 Z1 2 Finish contour area from X1 Z1 to X2 Z2 taking optional contour elements into account T O 4 4 Roughin 108 4 Cycle Programming il Plunge longitudinal transverse Call the Roughing longitudinal transverse cycles OO EE EE EEE EE EEE ee Select Plunge longitudinal see figures at right Select Plunge transverse see figures on the following page This cycle machines the area defined by X1 Z1 X2 Z2 and plunging angle A IE The steeper the tool plunges into the material the greater the feed rate decrease max 50 Pay attention to the dimensions of facing tools see Facing tools on page 419 att Danger of collision If the tool angle and the tool point angle have not been defined the tool plunge cuts at the plunging angle If the tool and point angles have been defined the tool plunge cuts at the maximum possible plunging angle In this case the resulting contour will not be completely finished and may need to be reworked Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour starting point X2 Z2 contour end point P infeed depth Maximum infeed depth P gt 0 Machine contour outline P lt 0 Retract by 1 mm at 45 plunging angle default 0 Range 0 lt A lt 90 end angle Oblique cut at contour end Range 0 lt W lt 90 tool number spindle speed cutting speed nA SH YS feed per revol
300. nction is that these entries are required each time you start the system and that you can only use numbers for your user name and password 442 8 Organization Mode of Operation il Access control for networks Passwords for read write access to directories can be assigned by the remote system WINDOWS Access control to shared levels In this case the Enter network password dialog box appears when you try to access directories of the remote system In Diagnosis mode the MANUALHplus Tiles can be assigned passwords for read access or write access see Diagnosis on page 455 Enter network password dialog box he dialog box is displayed by the WINDOWS operating system The following rules apply gt gt soft key moves the cursor to the next input field or to the next button Store key edits the entry in the Save this password in your password list input field ENTER key confirms and concludes the dialog box Please note Only use numbers for your password If only one password is used it can be saved This dialog box will then only appear once or for changing the password The password saved is checked each time you try to access further directories If the password for read permission differs from the one for write permission the Enter network password dialog box appears each time you try to access a directory after having restarted the MANUALplus HEIDENHAIN recommends Configuration of the Win
301. nd contour area up to position just before end point X2 Z2 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path Finish second side then finish remainder of contour valley Return to starting point on paraxial path HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 Recessinggycles k i 4 5 Recessinffv cles Undercut type H Call the recessing menu ST EE Eee Select the Undercut H cycle The contour depends on the parameters defined If you do not define an undercut radius R the oblique cut will be executed up to contour corner Z1 tool radius undercut radius If you do not define plunging angle W it is calculated from undercut length K and undercut radius R The final point of the undercut is then located at the contour corner The end point of the undercut is determined from the plunging angle in accordance with Undercut type H Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour corner gt K undercut length gt R undercut radius default No circular element gt W plunging angle default W is calculated T tool number gt S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Cycle run 1 Pre position to safety clearance from X Z 2 Machine undercut according to cycle parameters 3 Return to starting point on diagonal path 156 4 Cycle Programming il Undercut type K Call the recessing menu T Select the Undercut K cycle Thi
302. nder cuts default 0 E B 0 The last cut is divided into four partial cuts 1 2 1 4 1 8 and 1 8 m B 1 Without distribution of remaining cut Infeeds If the division U I provides a remainder the first feed is reduced The last cut is divided into four partial cuts 1 2 1 4 1 8 and 1 8 CS E Cycle STOP becomes effective at the end of a thread cue The feed rate and spindle speed overrides are not effective during cycle execution If you are programming an internal thread it is advisable to preset the thread pitch F since the diameter of the longitudinal element is not the thread diameter If you have MANUALplus calculate the thread pitch automatically slight deviations may occur Feed forward control is switched on HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 15 Phr Cycles i i Simple longitudinal single start thread G350 G350 cuts a longitudinal thread internal or external thread The thread starts at the current tool position and ends at the end point X Z Cycles Parameters Z end point of thread F thread pitch U thread depth E U gt 0 Internal thread E U lt 0 External thread lateral surface or front face U 999 or 999 Thread depth is calculated 6 15 Threac I maximum infeed no input is calculated from the thread pitch and the thread depth Internal or external threads See algebraic sign of U Handwheel superposition provided that your machine is equipped a
303. ndercut describes the preceding cylinder the actual undercut and the subsequent plane surface The part of the contour you have entered up to now is unambiguously defined MANUALplus draws the contour elements and clears the symbol for the unsolved chamfer element To define the undercut the thread pitch is programmed in addition to the target point MANUALplus automatically determines all other undercut parameters from the standard tables HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in eT I x 62 000 4 eas l 2 000 Az FE Cle 9 400 mar 150 m min 3 688 degr s i zs o x 20 amp 2i 30 PeR PO ki Oat RO O SSN S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S ol UINNNUNGNNQNGNNQQNQNQQQNNNNNNN 0 all 00x Thread pitch U0 ese FA 0 400 mmr 20 40 60 80 100 120 S o 150 m min AAOOAOAORAOARRARR Ri OO oo 3 888 degr i il O Y O O ho io F x LLI Example Threaded Stud Contour element 3 The next connecting contour element is an oblique cut After you have entered the target point X Z the line is unambiguously defined MANUALplus draws the contour elements in the graphics window 474 x 62 000 1 Z 2 000 ao Oo 20 40 60 80 100120 Caman N N N a N T1 feon Jo 0 400 nnr 100 3 ry 150 m min 100 3 686 degr 0 l Target pt in Z
304. ne Tool management Organization operations are grouped under the menu item i aie rent are tieters 1 El cur Para 2 contig 2 pelete file Set up menu 2 machi ne parameter Feedrates Selecting this menu item calls the following Setup menu 1 B nc switches 2 speeas Machine parameters 2 4 pLc paraneters NC switches 3 S eraphic parameters PLC parameters 4 6 Macnining Graphics parameters 5 Machining 6 A small arrow to the right of the menu line indicates thata menu item has a submenu see figure to the top right After you have selected a parameter the input window is opened Alternately some parameters can be set in the Machine mode of operation F ae You can call the Config uration parameters 2 menu Item only with system manager authorization see Access authorization on page 453 Displaying and editing parameters A parameter consists of a number of parameter cur rara LJeonrig nerete rite Machine Parameters Editing values The parameter values are displayed and edited EES in one or several inout windows dan ai ntact eae Eee AE OEN a Rapid t path speed manual ctrl mm min The title bar of the input window indicates the e A Ped Sana anai 1000 CARCAN parameter designation and the number of windows kev tedd rate manibi cantroi i0 OO Each parameter value is explained by the text next to t
305. ne contour outline P lt 0 Retract by the safety clearance at 45 Return and approach for next pass Repeat 3 to 6 until the defined area has been machined Return to starting point on paraxial path IE The steeper the tool plunges into the material the 122 greater the feed rate decrease max 50 Pay attention to the dimensions of facing tools see Facing tools on page 419 4 Cycle Programming il ICP finishing longitudinal or transverse Call the Roughing longitudinal transverse cycles Select ICP cut longitudinal see figures at upper and center right Select ICP cut transverse see figures on the following page Finishing Press the Finishing run soft key run The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position alt Danger of collision If the tool angle and the tool point angle have not been defined the tool plunge cuts at the plunging angle If the tool and point angles have been defined the tool plunge cuts at the maximum possible plunging angle In this case the resulting contour will not be completely finished and may need to be reworked Cycle parameters X Z starting point I K oversize X Z N ICP contour number T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 4 Roughin k il Cycle run 1 M
306. ng 3 Move in circular arc to end point of rounding at programmed feed rate 4 Retract and return to starting point on paraxial path 96 4 Cycle Programming il M functions Machine commands M functions are not executed until Cycle START has been pressed For the meaning of the M functions refer to your machine manual see M Functions on page 408 Call the single cut menu Select M function Enter the number of the M function Input Conclude entry finished Press Cycle START Call the single cut menu Select M function Spindle Switch M19 on Stop M19 Enter the stopping angle Input Conclude entry finished Press Cycle START 1 lt lt HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 3 Single ares T O 4 4 Roughin 4 4 Roughing Cycles Roughing cycles rough and finish simple contours in basic mode and complex contours in expanded mode With ICP cutting cycles you can machine contours defined with ICP see Editing ICP Contours on page 243 Proportioning of cuts MANUALplus calculates an infeed that is lt infeed depth P An abrasive cut is avoided Oversizes In expanded mode Cutter radius compensation Active Safety clearance after each step Basic mode 1 mm Expanded mode The safety clearance is set separately for internal and external machining under Current parameters Machin
307. ng Cycle programming 223 DIN cycle G798 379 Help graphics 81 278 Index j il I ICP contour elements Face 268 Lateral surface 272 Turning contour 260 ICP cycles Figure milling axial 208 Figure milling radial 220 Finishing contour parallel 119 Finishing longitudinal transverse 123 Fundamentals 83 Recess turning radial axial finishing 154 Recess turning radial axial 152 Recessing radial axial 139 Recessing radial axial finishing 141 Roughing contour parallel 117 Roughing longitudinal transverse 121 Index ICP example Matrix 483 Milling 507 Recessing cycle 495 Threaded stud 470 ICP programming Absolute or incremental dimensions 244 Contour direction 249 Contour editing 254 Contour elements face 268 Contour elements lateral surface 272 Contour elements turning contour 260 Contour graphics 246 Contour programming and adding to 244 Contours editing 243 Fundamentals 242 Selection of solutions 248 Superimposing form elements 259 Transitions between contour elements 245 IF command DIN programming 401 Inch Mode information 78 Inch mode setting the 434 Incremental coordinates 26 Indexable insert drills 413 Information output DIN programming 395 Input box 32 INPUT command DIN programming 393 Input fields 34 536 Input
308. ng cut transverse cycle T O 1 Move in transverse direction from X Z to contour starting point Z1 2 Finish first in transverse direction then in longitudinal direction 3 Return in transverse direction to starting point 4 4 Roughin 106 4 Cycle Programming il Finishing cut longitudinal transverse Expanded Call the Roughing longitudinal transverse cycles Select Cut longitudinal see figures at right Select Cut transverse see figures on the following page Press the Expanded soft key Press the Finishing run soft key Finishing run The cycle finishes the contour area from X1 Z1 to X2 Z2 When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour starting point X2 Z2 contour end point A starting angle Range 0 lt A lt 90 W end angle Range 0 lt W lt 90 R rounding B B1 chamfer rounding B contour end B1 contour start B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution By setting the following optional parameters you can define additional contour elements A Oblique cut at contour start W Oblique cut at contour end R Rounding B Chamfer Rounding at contour end B1 Chamfer Rounding at contour start HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 r D 5 O oc x lt i il Cycle run 1 Move i
309. ng cycles Cycle programming 190 DIN programming 354 Drilling pattern Cycle programming Pattern circular face 230 Pattern circular lateral surface 234 Pattern linear face 228 Pattern linear lateral surface 232 DIN programming Circular pattern face G745 385 Circular pattern lateral surface G746 389 Linear pattern face G743 383 Linear pattern lateral surface G744 387 Drilling tools 423 Driven tool 426 E Editing 39 Editing address parameters 283 Element position of undercuts ICP 263 End milling cutter 413 End of cycle G80 310 End point of ICP contour 243 Equidistant line MCRC 29 Equidistant line TRC 28 Error display 36 Error messages 36 Index il Ethernet 442 Examples Cycle program creating 461 DIN example Milling 519 Threaded stud 516 ICP example Matrix 483 Milling 507 Recessing cycle 495 Threaded stud 470 Machine setting up 459 Selecting a cycle program 460 Extension 39 F F display 47 Face ICP contour elements 268 Face milling cycle programming 211 Face view simulation 70 Facing 419 Facing tools 419 Feed per minute Cycle mode 48 DIN cycle G94 298 Feed per revolution for manual control parameter 432 Feed per revolution driven tools 47 Feed rate Cycle mode 48 DIN programming Constant feed rate G94 298
310. ng of cuts infeeds to the milling planes infeeds in the milling planes Contour milling 3 Depending on R approach the workpiece and plunge to the first milling plane Mill the first plane Plunge to the next milling plane Repeat 5 to 6 until the milling depth is reached Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis Pocket milling Roughing 3 4 5 6 7 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling plane Depending on J machine the milling plane either from the inside towards the outside or vice versa Plunge to the next milling plane Repeat 4 to 5 until the milling depth is reached Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis Pocket milling Finishing 3 Depending on R approach the workpiece and plunge to the first milling plane 4 Finish machine the edge of the pocket one working plane after the other 5 Depending on J finish machine the milling floor either from the inside towards the outside or vice versa 6 Finish machine the pocket at the programmed feed rate 7 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis 210 4 Cycle Programming il Face milling Call the milling menu Select the Face milling cycle Depending on the parameters the cycle mills the following contours on the face One or two surfaces Q 1 or O 2 B gt 0 Rectangle Q 4 L lt gt B Square O 4 L B Triangle or polygon Q 3 or O gt 4 L gt 0
311. ng speed F feed per revolution MANUALplus also interrogates the parameters that are required for machining the respective elements Use the following parameter combinations to define the Starting point of pattern X1 C1 or XK YK Pattern positions li Ji and Q Jand Q Cycle run 1 Positioning depending on the machine configuration Without C axis Position to spindle angle C With C axis Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid traverse Manual mode Machining starts from current spindle angle Calculate the pattern positions Position to starting point of pattern Execute drilling milling operation Position for next machining operation Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been completed 7 Return to starting point X Z Oo ol AOUN HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 9 Drilling Milling i a j il Drilling milling pattern circular axial Call the drilling menu Select Drilling axial see figure at upper right 4 9 Drilling Milling l Al Select Deep hole drilling axial see figure at center E right F Select Tapping axial see figure at lower right Select Slot axial see figure at top of next page amp 2n Select ICP contour axial see middle figure on next page Pattern Press the Pattern circular soft key circular Press Pattern circular to machine hole patterns or figure patterns in whic
312. nsation DIN cycle G149 303 Inout during program execution 65 Parameters 432 Address letters 279 Alphanumeric keyboard 35 Angle of infeed thread cycle 163 API thread Cycle programming 170 DIN cycle G352 342 Arcs menu calling ICP 244 Area milling face G797 366 Auto logon 444 Axial holes 355 Axis designations 25 B Backup name 442 Base block mode Display during program execution 64 In the simulation 71 Baud rate serial data transfer 445 Block functions 285 Block functions DIN programming 281 Block number Cycle programming 62 DIN programming 279 Button 420 Button tools 412 420 Bytes 39 C C axis Coordinate system 25 Fundamentals 20 Rapid traverse face G100 360 Rapid traverse lateral surface G110 372 Reference diameter G120 371 Standardize C axis G15 359 Zero point shift G152 359 Calculation of contour geometry DIN programming 283 ICP programming 242 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 C Axis commands 359 Centering tools 413 Chamfer Cycle programming 95 DIN cycle G88 323 ICP face 271 ICP lateral surface 275 ICP turning contour 264 Circular arc DIN programming Circular path G12 G13 295 Circular path G2 G3 293 Face G102 G103 362 Lateral surface G112 G113 374 ICP contour Face 2 0 Lateral surface 274 Turning contour 262 Circular e
313. nsation controller speed override allows you to change the spindle speed range 50 to 150 The subscript number after the identification letter S indicates the gear range ce If you are machining with a constant cutting speed MANUALplus calculates the spindle speed from the position of the tool tio The smaller the diameter of the tip the higher the spindle speed The maximum spindle speed however is never exceeded The spindle symbols indicate the direction of spindle rotation as seen from the point of view of the machinist HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Direction of spindle rotation M3 Direction of spindle rotation M4 Spindle stopped Spindle position controlled M19 3 3 Hi i Data 3 4 Mac Setup 3 4 Machine Setup The machine always requires a few preparations regardless of whether you are machining a workpiece manually or automatically In Manual mode the following functions are subitems of the Setup menu item Setting the axis values defining workpiece zero point Setting the protection zone Defining the tool change position Setting C axis values Defining the workpiece zero point Select Setup Select Set axis values Touch the workpiece zero point end face 7 0 Define this point as the workpiece zero point Z Enter the distance between the tool and the workpiece zero point as measuring point coordinate Z Bate MANUALplus calculates the workpiece zero
314. nt on the shortest path without colliding with the workpiece you must define an auxiliary position with the Rapid traverse positioning cycle Cycle transitions Finishing cycles in expanded mode are interrupted at the contour end point This enables you to sequentially link several finishing cycles and thus finish a selected part of the contour in a single uninterrupted cut MANUALplus however knows only the contour area of the cycle that is presently being machined After finishing this contour area the tool is positioned for a subsequent horizontal contour element If the subsequent element is not horizontal the tool is positioned to the contour starting point before the defined contour area is finished All positioning is done at feed rate speed 80 4 Cycle Programming il Help graphics The functionalities and parameters of the cycles are illustrated in the graphic support window These graphics usually show an external machining operation The Circle key allows you to switch to the help graphics for internal machining and a to switch between the help graphics for internal and tJ external machining Elements used in the graphic support window Broken line Rapid traverse path Continuous line Feed path Dimension line with arrow head on one side Directional dimension the algebraic sign defines the direction Dimension line with arrow head on both sides Absolute dimension the algebraic sign has no effect
315. nter point the radius is not requested XS ZS starting point in X Z end point of last element X Z target point in X Z End point of circular arc Xi Zi target point in X Z incremental Distance from starting point to target point I K center point in X Z Center of circular arc Ii Ki center point in X Z incremental Distance from starting point to center point R radius F special feed 262 5 ICP Programming Entering form elements Chamfer rounding Chamfers roundings are defined on contour corners A contour corner is the point of intersection between the approaching and departing contour elements MANUALplus cannot calculate a chamfer or rounding until the departing contour element is known During the parameter input for the chamfer rounding the coordinates of the corner are shown in starting point KLE If an ICP contour starts with a chamfer rounding the approaching contour element is missing You can then use the parameter element position J to clearly define the position of the chamfer rounding MANUALplus converts a chamfer or rounding at the start of the contour to a linear or circular element Undercut The form element undercut consists of a longitudinal element the actual undercut and a transverse element An undercut can start with a longitudinal or transverse element If the undercut corner is not known the parameter Element position J defines whether the undercut start
316. ntour elements selected contour corners and remaining contours are depicted in different colors The selection of contour elements contour corners and remaining contours Is important when you are editing ICP contours Colors Yellow For solved elements Gray For unsolved or incorrect elements Red Selected solution selected element Blue Remaining contour 246 Teach in X 12 002 x Z 52 001 AZ i F fel 10 000 mn r S ee ee ee ee ee O 0 Sua D 5000 r min 1 100 Tool management Organization T 1 a 0 000 0 000 185 m min 0 043 degr Ee 2 Teach in X 12 002 ox Z 52 001 AZ i F fe 10 000 mm r S a ee ee 0 Sg 5000 r min 1 100 Tool management Organization T 1 dx 0 000 dz 0 000 185 m min 0 043 degr a e 5 ICP Programming Changing the ICP contour graphics MANUALplus selects the area to be represented such that all entered contour elements are displayed You can magnify reduce the displayed graphics with the PgUp PgDn keys and pan the detail with the arrow keys These functions are available when the contour is displayed but is not being edited To isolate and display a precise detail proceed as follows When you press Zoom a red frame appears on the screen with which you can select the detail you wish to isolate Red frame To move the red frame use the arrow keys To enlarge the red frame use the PgDn k
317. ntour milling and J 1 From the outside towards the inside 0 roughing finishing Milling sequence only for pocket milling default O O 0 Roughing O 1 Finishing R approaching radius Radius of approaching departing arc default O R 0 Contour element is approached directly feed to starting point above the milling plane then vertical plunge R gt 0 Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0 for inside corners Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0 for outside corners Length of linear approaching departing element contour element is approached departed tangentially 218 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run 1 2 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid traverse only in Teach in mode Calculate the proportioning of cuts infeeds to the milling planes infeeds in the milling planes Contour milling 3 o1 f Depending on Approaching radius R approach the workpiece and plunge to the first milling plane Mill the first plane Plunge to the next milling plane Repeat 5 to 6 until the milling depth is reached Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis Pocket milling Roughing 3 4 5 6 7 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling plane Depending on J machine the milling plane either from the inside towards the outs
318. o 6 times Nesting means that another subprogram is called from within a subprogram Recursion should be avoided Machine 18 G1 X60 19 680 20 T1 21 L 999908 A 30 LB il GO X62 22 23 GO 250 24 696 220 G95 FO 2 T2 E LG EEZ ZZZZZ Z N N 26 GO X62 22 E L 999908 ay tit t t s Lef oE oo W o E LF O WA ll W o wW foo Pe O CM Transmiss value Machine 999906 ncs UP Hut stechen Toot management organization 1 256 _ 1la __1b 50 N H 3 GO X 35 Z 256 H 4 6862 10 2 KO 2 QO H 5 GO X60 20 H 6 61 2 5 H G3 X5 4 2229 2 9 5323 RS I 5 KO B1 5 N 8 G1 349 5 2 32 B1 5 gt Variable assignment 256 la _1b 50 Addition prog Y mach Math Calcul Comparis Free Save Back variable variable function operation operator entry term 6 DIN Programming E You can add up to 20 transfer values to a subprogram These are LA to LF LH J K O P R S U W X Y Z The transfer values are available as variables within the subprogram The identification code is __ followed by the parameter designation in lowercase letters for example __la You can use these transfer values when programming with variables within the subprogram see figure to the bottom right The transfer parameter LN is reserved for transferring integer values from O to 9999 E The variables 256 285 are available in any subprogram for internal calculations lo
319. of line has been entered HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in Toor management organization X 139 871 400 ao Z 49 713 i FE 10 000 mm r 20 40 60 80 100 140 0 m min AANOUOORROOUOORRRODOOORM MNM 5 B 2 72 773 degr Vertical line line xsfio vsjo ki K ioo MESS Special feed Teach in Toot management Organization X 139 871 T 400 E orecs Z 49 713 az F fel ae S minivans B 2 0 m min T i100 72 773 degr _ Example Milling Cycle i il Mcp Example Milling Cycle Contour element 4 A circular arc follows The target point and the radius must be defined Now the milling contour is closed This is the precondition for milling pockets Since there are two solutions MANUALplus asks which solution is to be used 512 Teach in Toot nanagenent organization X 139 87 T4 Som 0 000 F fol 10 000 mmr a gt Ommin 1 100 72 773 degr Arc with radius Z 49 713 42 0 20 40 60 80 100120 rn a a ee a a ee Se E Special feed Teach in Toot management organization X 139 871 s T 40 ae 000 Z 49 713 ar aS F fel 10 000 mm r S SE Ets o eE g 0 m min iiini 0 ioo 72 773 degr aaa iei 4 LA aT ieee Erango Seal nn 9 Examples il Rounding the corners The rounding a
320. of the cylinder default 0 Note Parameters that are not programmed are automatically calculated trom the diameter of the cylinder in the standard table see DIN 509 E DIN 509 F undercut parameters on page 527 Blocks following the cycle call tE Undercuts can only be executed in orthogonal paraxial contour corners along the longitudinal axis Cutting radius compensation Active Oversizes are not taken into account HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 m x O 3 D G 00 o oh 34 6 16 ndei Cycles 6 16 Unde A Cycles Undercut according to DIN 509 F with cylinder machining G852 The cycle machines the adjoining cylinder the undercut and finishes with the plane surface It also machines a cylinder start chamfer when you enter at least one of the parameters B or RB Parameters I undercut depth default Value from standard table K undercut length default Value from standard table W undercut angle default Value from standard table gt R undercut radius default Value from standard table P transverse depth default Value from standard table A transverse angle default Value from standard table B cylinder 1st cut length no input No chamfer machined at start of cylinder gt RB 1st cut radius no input No chamfer radius is machined gt WB Ist cut angle default 45 E reduced feed rate default Active feed rate For th
321. ogramming il Cycle run Calculate the proportioning of cuts Approach workpiece for first pass from X Z Execute the first cut recessing ona fF WN Return to starting point on paraxial path HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Machine perpendicularly to recessing direction turning Repeat 3 to 4 until the defined area has been machined 45 Nevessinggye es k i 4 5 Recessiniffvcles ICP recess turning radial axial finishing Call the recessing menu Select the Recess turning cycle Select ICP recess turning radial see figures at upper and center right Select ICP recess turning axial see figures on the following page pars Press the Finishing run soft key The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour see also Recess turning on page 143 At the end of cycle the tool returns to the starting point Cycle parameters X Z starting point RB depth compensation I K workpiece blank oversize X Z N ICP contour number T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution C With oversizes K for the workpiece blank you define the material to be machined during the finishing cycle It is therefore absolutely necessary to define the oversizes for recess turning finishing 154 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run 1 2 3 A Approach contour area from X Z on paraxial path Finish first side a
322. oint is outside the coordinate datum the distance between contour starting point and coordinate datum is added to the pattern position see ICP Example Milling Cycle on page 507 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 9 Drilling Milling j il 4 9 Drilling Milling l Drilling milling pattern linear axial Call the drilling menu Select Drilling axial see figure at upper right Al Select Deep hole drilling axial see figure at center a right Select Tapping axial see figure at lower right Pattern Press the Pattern linear soft key linear Call the milling menu Select Slot axial see figure at top of next page E a Select ICP contour axial see middle figure on next Z2 1 21 page Pattern Press the Pattern linear soft key linear Press Pattern linear to machine hole patterns or figure patterns in which the individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a Straight line on the face 228 4 Cycle Programming Cycle parameters X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle X1 Cl starting point of pattern Position starting angle polar coordinates XK YK starting point of pattern Cartesian coordinates I J end point of pattern Cartesian coordinates Ii Ji pattern spacing incremental Q number of holes slots default 1 T tool number S spindle speed cutti
323. ol change with DIN programs 10 Tables and Overviews Electronic handwheels E For moving the axes as on a manual lathe a maximum of two electronic handwheels can be connected E In addition the portable handwheel HR410 can be connected DataPilot Control software on PCs for Programming and program test E Program management Management of operating resource data m Data backup E Training 10 3 Technical Information HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 531 il 1 2 OO 10 4 Peripheral Interface m i 532 10 4 Peripheral Interface Connector 9 pin D sub pins Do not assign RxD TxD DTR GND DSR RTS Cis Do not assign Receive Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground Data Set Ready Request to Send Clear to Send The interface is linked to the external PC by direct electrical connection This may lead to interference in the interface resulting from different power supply reference levels Precautions If possible use the service jack on the machine for the mee Engage disengage the connection only when the machine and PC are switched off The cable length must not exceed 20 m 66 ft Use even shorter cables if there is strong electromagnetic interference Recommendation Use an adapter with electrical isolation 10 Tables and Overviews il Index A Absolute coordinates 26 Access authorization 453 Access control for networks 443 Additive compe
324. ols Select lathe tools Tool parameters X setup dimension in X Z setup dimension in Z R cutting radius WO tool orientation For code number see graphic support window A tool angle Range 0 lt A lt 180 B point angle Range 0 lt B lt 180 DX wear compensation in X Range 100mm lt DX lt 100mm DZ wear compensation in Z Range 100mm lt DZ lt 100mm Q tool text Reference to tool text MD direction of rotation default Not defined 3 M3 4 M4 TS cutting spindle speed default Not defined TF feed rate default Not defined PT tool 1ife default Not defined RT Display field for remaining tool life PZ quantity default Not defined RZ Display field for remaining quantity Facing tools The figure at right explains how to dimension these tools taking facing tools with the tool orientations WO 1 and WO 7 as an example HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 ie Data Neutral tools The tool orientation values WO z2 4 6 8 are used for neutral tools Neutral means the cutting edge is perpendicular to the X or Z axis see figure at right Button tools The following aspects are important when dimensioning button tools Nose angle B 0 identifies the tool as button tool Tool angle is used for plunge cycles to check or calculate the plunging angle MANUALoplus needs the tool angle during simulation for calculating the tool position Reference point depends on the tool orientation see
325. on For code number see graphic support window DX wear compensation in X Range 100mm lt DX lt 100mm DZ wear compensation in Z Range 100mm lt DZ lt 100mm Q tool text Reference to tool text MD direction of rotation default Not defined 3 M3 4 M4 TS cutting spindle speed default Not defined TF feed rate default Not defined PT tool 1ife default Not defined RT Display field for remaining tool life PZ quantity default Not defined RZ Display field for remaining quantity 422 7 Tool Management Mode il Drilling tools Select drilling tools i Tool parameters X setup dimension in X Z setup dimension in Z I hole diameter WO tool orientation For code number see graphic support window B point angle Range 0 lt B lt 180 DX wear compensation in X Range 100mm lt DX lt 100mm DZ wear compensation in Z Range 100mm lt DZ lt 100mm Q tool text Reference to tool text H tool driven default O 0 Not driven 1 Driven MD direction of rotation default Not defined 3 M3 4 M4 TS cutting spindle speed default Not defined TF feed rate default Not defined PT tool 1ife default Not defined RT Display field for remaining tool life PZ quantity default Not defined RZ Display field for remaining quantity GF For drilling operations with constant cutting speed drilling diameter is used to calculate the spindle speed The parameters and B a
326. on displayed during transfer is described in Transferring programs files on page 446 F You can only print out DIN programs and DIN macros 450 8 Organization Mode of Operation Transferring parameters van Press Parameter Miva Press Transmit parameter PENA Press Receive parameter The transmitted parameter files receive the file name that was entered for Backup name in the Settings menu MANUALplus appends the following extension to the file name m BEA machining parameters E MAS machine parameters E PRO production parameters E Transfer Tawe J o o o E PLC PLC parameters E STD control data The information displayed during transfer is described in Transferring programs files on page 446 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 451 il B Transfer Transferring tool data Eag Press Tool Press Transmit tool Eaa Press Receive tool The transmitted tool files receive the file name that was entered for Backup name in the Settings menu MANUALplus appends the following extension to the file name E TXT tool texts E WKZ tool parameters The information displayed during transfer is described in Transferring programs files on page 446 452 Trot 8 Organization Mode of Operation il 8 4 Service and Diagnosis When you select Service 3 MANUALplus offers the following functions or function grou
327. on the cycle you can have the MANUALplus display ICP contours for the face or the lateral surface by calling the selection of ICP contours with the Contour list soft key When defining the first element for lateral surface contours specify unrolled diameter XS The linear dimensions of all subsequent contour elements are referenced to this diameter 272 5 ICP Programming il Entering lines on the lateral surface 2 om ft Select the line direction You enter the dimensions of the line and then define the transition to the next contour element Parameters ZS YS starting point YS as linear dimension reference diameter XS CS starting point as angular dimension gt XS unrolled diameter Z target point CY target point as linear dimension reference diameter XS C target point as angular dimension L length of line F special feed Wd Select the line direction 5 7 ICP Contour Elements on the Later You enter the dimensions of the line and then define the transition to the next contour element Parameters ZS YS starting point YS as linear dimension reference diameter XS CS starting point as angular dimension gt XS unrolled diameter Z target point CY target point as linear dimension reference diameter XS C target point as angular dimension A angle to Z axis for direction of angle see graphic support window L leng
328. one G60 391 Wait for moment G204 391 6 24 Set T S F 392 Tool number spindle speed cutting speed and feed rate 392 6 25 Data Input and Data Output 393 INPUT 393 WINDOW 394 PRINT J35 6 26 Programming Variables 396 Fundamentals 396 variables 397 V variables 399 6 27 Program Branches Program Repeats 401 IF conditional program branch 401 WHILE program repeat 402 6 28 Variables as Address Parameters 403 6 29 Subprograms 406 6 30 M Functions 408 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 7 1 Tool Management Mode of Operation 412 Tool types 412 Tool life management 413 7 2 Tool Organization 414 7 3 Tool Texts 416 7 4 Tool Data 418 Tool orientation 418 Reference point 418 Editing tool data 418 Lathe tools 419 Recessing and recess turning tools 421 Thread cutting tools 422 Drilling tools A23 Tapping tools 424 Milling tools A25 7 5 Tool Data Supplementary Parameters 426 Driven tool A26 Direction of rotation 426 Cutting data 426 Tool life management 427 16 8 1 Organization Mode of Operation 430 8 2 Parameters 431 Current parameters 432 Configuration parameters 435 8 3 Transfer 441 Data backup 441 Data exchange with DataPilot 4110 441 Printer 441 In
329. operation once the error has been cleared Emergency stop An error condition has caused all traverse to be stopped and the abortion of cycle program and DIN program execution You can resume operation once the error has been cleared Reset An error condition has caused all traverse to be stopped and the abortion of cycle program and DIN program execution Switch off the control for a moment then restart Contact your machine manufacturer if the error occurs again System error internal error In the unlikely event that a system error or an internal error occurs write down all information on the displayed message and inform your machine manufacturer You cannot correct these errors Switch off the control and restart PLC error PLC status display Using the soft keys PLC diagnosis and CNC diagnosis you can switch between the error information and the PLC window The PLC window is used for PLC messages and the PLC diagnosis Please refer to your machine manual for more information HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 37 2 3 Error i i ges om TT o N Warnings during simulation If during simulation of a cycle an entire cycle program or a DIN program MANUALplus detects problems it displays a warning in the soft key to the extreme left see figure to the lower right Press the soft key to call these messages 38 X 72 002 T 1 a ooo Z 52 001 az po F fe oe R F Q 20 40 60 80 1
330. or new tool Position the cursor on a free space Press Add Select tool tyoe MANUALplus opens the input window and illustrates the individual parameters in the graphic support window Edit entry Place the cursor on the desired entry Press Change The tool parameters are displayed in a dialog box and can be edited the tool type cannot be edited Copy entry Place the cursor on the desired entry Press Copy Position the cursor on a free space Retrieve the copied tool data by pressing Insert Relocate entry Place the cursor on the desired entry Press Cut out the tool data are deleted Position the cursor on a free space Retrieve the tool data by pressing Insert Delete entry Place the cursor on the entry to be deleted Press Delete 414 Tool management Machine X 12 002 s Z 92 001 e 0 20 40 60 80 100120 Fibs meat ii St Sls fv a T 1 0 000 F fal 10 000 mn r S D 5000 r min A95 B80 A93 B55 A93 B35 A S B35 A63 B55 A45 B90 A60 B60 A105 B90 A90 BO A B A95 B80 A93 B55 A93 B35 A 3 B35 A75 B90 H H H hd hd H Lal nN T10 R5 E F E y 0 m min 0 043 degr SE 1 100 List List Cut Copy Insert Delete Change Search start end out 7 Tool Management Mode il Find entries Press Search Select the tool type with the menu key T MANUALplus scrolls through the list and stops at the ne
331. ore execution of the program Mathematical operations For calculating address parameters or variables Simplified programming Values coordinates which have not been dimensioned in the workpiece drawing are calculated by MANUALoplus if mathematically possible Operator communication Via input of variable values and output of texts and variables 6 1 DIN Pr Not all of these functions are performed by NC commands G commands M commands etc Some of these functions such as simplified programming variable functions or mathematical operations can be used for programming with variables working with simplified geometry etc Instead of a fixed value you then enter a variable mathematical expression or question mark for the address parameter 280 6 DIN Programming 6 2 Editing DIN Programs Edit Call the DIN editor DIH Program Call the program list list DIH Select DIN programs DIN Select DIN macros macros Select a DIN program DIN macro or define a new program number Select Call the DIN program DIN macro Block functions With the arrow keys and paging keys you move the cursor within the DIN program to the position you wish to delete change or add to Place the cursor at the beginning of a block NC word or parameter The soft keys or menu keys enable you to select the desired function MANUALplus then asks you to enter additional parameters When you
332. osition of the tool tip see figure at upper right Tool compensation The tool tip is subjected to wear during machining processes To compensate for this wear MANUALplus uses compensation values which are managed independent of the values for length The system automatically adds the compensation values to the values for length Tool tip radius compensation TRC The tip of a lathe tool has a certain radius When machining tapers chamfers and radii this results in inaccuracies which MANUALplus compensates with its cutting radius compensation function Programmed paths of traverse are referenced to the theoretical tool tip S see figure at center right With non paraxial contours this will lead to inaccuracies during machining The TRC function compensates this error by calculating a new path of traverse the equidistant line see figure at bottom right MANUALplus calculates the TRC for cycle programming The DIN programming feature also takes the TRC for clearance cycles into account During DIN programming with single paths you can also enable disable TRC 28 1 Introduction and Fundamentals il Milling cutter radius compensation MCRC In milling operations the outside diameter of the milling cutter determines the contour When the MCRC function is not active the system defines the center of the cutter as reference point The MCRC function compensates for this error by calculating a new path of traverse the e
333. ough boring E 2 Feed reduction for pre drilling E 3 Feed reduction for pre drilling and through boring 6 18 Cycles K drilling depth radial holes radius E K is defined The starting point of the hole is calculated from the hole end point and K E K is not defined K is calculated from the hole end point and the current tool position D retreat default 0 m 0 Rapid traverse E 1 Feed rate Notes E The control starts execution of the cycle at the current tool and spindle position The starting point is approached at rapid traverse E Axial hole E Do not program xX E Define Z Radial hole E Define X E Do not program Z E X and Z are programmed The control uses the tool orientation to decide whether a radial or an axial hole is machined see Drilling tools on page 423 354 6 DIN Programming il Deep hole drilling cycle G74 You can use cycle G74 with stationary tools for drilling axial holes in the turning center and with driven tools for drilling axial and radial holes The hole is drilled in several passes After each pass the drill retracts and advances again to the first drilling depth minus the safety clearance The drilling depth is reduced with each subsequent pass Parameters X end point of axial hole diameter value gt Z end point of radial hole R safety clearance no input Value from Current parameters Machining Safety distances
334. our definition GO defines the starting point of the contour section The contour section is described with G1 G2 G3 G12 and G13 commands G80 concludes the contour definition End of cycle G80 G80 concludes the contour definition after roughing recessing and undercut cycles A block with G80 must not contain any other commands 310 6 DIN Programming il Longitudinal contour roughing G817 G818 The cycles machine the contour area described by the current tool position and the data defined in the subsequent blocks in longitudinal direction without recessing see Contour definition on page 310 Parameters G817 G818 X cutting limit diameter value The control machines up to the cutting limit P maximum infeed The proportioning of cuts is calculated so that an abrasive cut is avoided and the infeed distance is lt P H type of departure default 1 0 Machine contour outline after each pass 1 Retract at 45 machine contour outline after last pass 2 Retract at 45 do not machine contour outline I oversize X diameter value default 0 K oversize Z default 0 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 11 Contour Based ie Cycles i il 6 11 Contour Based un Cycles m x O G C a N G 00 oh co Note on the execution of the cycle MANUALplus automatically determines the cutting and infeed directions from the current tool position relative to the starting point end
335. ove on paraxial path from X Z to contour starting point 6 2 Finish defined contour area cles 4 4 Roughin 124 4 Cycle Programming il Examples of roughing cycles Roughing and finishing an outside contour The shaded area trom AP starting point of contour to EP contour end point is first rough machined with the cycle Cut longitudinal Expanded taking oversizes into account see figure at upper right This contour area Is to be finished subsequently with the cycle Finishing cut longitudinal Expanded see figure at lower right The rounding and the oblique cut at the contour end are also machined in expanded mode The parameters for contour starting point X1 Z1 and contour end point X2 Z2 determine the cutting and infeed directions in this example external machining and infeed in negative X axis direction Tool data Lathe tool for external machining WO 1 Tool orientation A 93 Tool angle B 55 Point angle HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in Toot nanagenent organization X 12 002 s T1 aooo Zi 52 001 2 10 000 omn r i to ga raed 100 RRNA 20 40 60 CNAE i Sn Sor D 5000 r min Gl 0 043 degr mMm B2 O x1f60 zajo o x280 zaF30o Pfa af ujo TRS SSS Bf Pos oOo ko 2 o mo o ooo shao roa o Start point Teach in Toor managenent organization X t2 00 AX T 1
336. paths are shown as a continuous green line On Program execution without any interruption They describe the path of the theoretical tool tip Off Stop before command M01 also called wire frame graphics Rapid traverse paths Single On MANUALoplus stops after each traverse To These paths are shown as a broken white line start the simulation of the next path press Graphic Continue Recommendation Single Tool tip cutting edge block should be used together with the basic block Instead of the light dot MANUALplus shows the cutting edge of the tool as a continuous yellow line display In this case you can see the real cutting radius Off Cycles DIN commands are simulated without cutting width and tool tip position any Interruption With many machining operations like recessing or a machining an oblique surface or a rounding you can Graphic Tne simulation is interrupted check the machining sequence a lot more precisely Stop by showing the tool tip instead of the light dot This graphic display is based on the tool data If the control does not have enough data on the tool it can only represent the tool tip as a light dot Cutting path In the cutting path display MANUALplus shades the area traversed by the cutting edge of the tool You can see the area that will actually be machined with the cutting radius cutting width and tool tip position already accounted for This graphic display L is based on the tool
337. pensation of left hand tool nose G151 With recessing tools the tool orientation function defines whether the tool reference point is set at the left or the right side of the tool tip see Recessing and recess turning tools on page 421 G150 G151 switches the reference point G150 Reference point on right tip G151 Reference point on left tip G150 G151 is effective from the block in which it is programmed and remains in effect up to the Next tool change Program end 304 Mmi x 9 3 2 D G g1 O G O1 _ 1 6 DIN Programming il 6 9 Zero Point Shifts Zero point shift G51 G51 shifts the workpiece zero point by Z or X The shift is referenced to the workpiece zero point defined in setup mode see Defining the workpiece zero point on page 50 Even if you shift the zero point several times with G51 it is still always referenced to the workpiece zero point defined in setup mode The workpiece zero point defined with G51 remains in effect up to the end of the program or until it is canceled by another zero point shift Parameters X shift diameter value gt Z shift att Danger of collision Cycle programming With DIN macros the zero point shift is reset at the end of the cycle Therefore do not use any DIN macros with zero point shifts in cycle programming HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 30 m x 9 3 2 D G O1 _ Ol a
338. per revolution by E Internal or external threads See algebraic sign of U Proportioning of cuts The first cut is performed at the cutting depth defined for I and is reduced with each cut until the tool reaches the remaining cutting depth J Handwheel superposition provided that your machine is equipped accordingly The superposition is limited to the following range X direction Depends on the current cutting depth the starting and end points of the thread are not exceeded Z direction No more than one turn the starting and end points of the thread are not exceeded GF E Cycle STOP becomes effective at the end of a thread c t The feed rate and spindle speed overrides are not effective during cycle execution Handwheel superposition is activated with a switch located on the machine operating panel Feedforward control is switched off HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 o i Cycles 6 15 Threac Tapered API thread G352 This cycle cuts a tapered single or multi start API thread The depth of thread decreases at the overrun at the end of thread Parameters gt X end point of thread diameter value Z end point of thread XS starting point of thread diameter value ZS starting point of thread F thread pitch U thread depth U gt 0 Internal thread U lt 0 External thread lateral surface or front face U 999 or 999 Thread depth is calculated gt I maximum infeed default is calculat
339. plementary Parameters on page 426 Machine data display iE The machine data display is configurable The machine data that appear on your screen may therefore deviate from the example shown Select Set T S F only available in Manual mode m Define the parameters Conclude data input 46 Z 32 001 X 72 002 TEE ae Fas 10 000 mmr o 20 40 60 80 100120 185 m min 100 0 043 degr S D 5000 r min Set T S F TE sfs5 Ffo D 5000 afo Tool number Tool Neasure Tool S F from Minute Constant Save Back offset tool list tool feedrate speed Position display X Z Distance between tool tip and workpiece zero point Letter designating the axis appears in white Axis disabled Position display C Position of the C axis Empty box C axis is not active Letter designating the axis appears in white Axis disabled Distance to go display X Z C The distance remaining trom the current position to the target position of the active traversing command Distance to go Z and protection zone status Distance to go display and display of status of protective zone monitoring Spindle utilization Utilization of the spindle motor relative to the rated torque Spindle utilization and maximum speed Utilization of the spindle motor and additional display of valid maximum speed 3 Machine Mode of Operation il T display T number of the inserted
340. plus 4110 Teach in Toot managenent organization X t2 00 ax eT T 1 0 000 Z 52 001 E Famm Stic 185 m min 0 043 degr Ssa D 5000 r min o Fe Teach in X 12 ie ax T 1 az 0 000 Z 52 00 2c i F fel fel 10 000 mn r o 185 m min Ern D 5000 r min so o 0 043 degr Start point drill Pattern Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back linear list position tool speed finished 237 4 9 Drilling Milling me Linear hole pattern on lateral surface Referenz 0120 O O 4 9 Drilling Milling ems A linear hole pattern is to be machined on the lateral surface of the workpiece with the Drilling axial cycle This machining operation requires a traversable spindle and driven tools The drilling pattern is defined by the coordinates of the first hole the number of holes and the spacing between the holes see figure to the upper right Only the depth is indicated for the drilling cycle see figure at lower right Tool data WO 2 Tool orientation 8 Drilling diameter B 90 Point angle H 1 The tool Is a driven tool 238 X 22 s o T1 az 0 000 gt 0 200 mmr Z 0 000 E Fre ann 20 40 60 80 100120 S Minti 0 So 185 m min D 5000 r min D 5000 r min r min ci 0 045 degr Start point Pattern Tool Take over S F from Input Back circular li
341. plus 4110 T O 4 4 Roughin b il Cycle run 1 Move in transverse direction from X Z to contour starting point X1 Z1 2 Finish defined contour area 3 Return to starting point on paraxial path T O 4 4 Roughin 114 4 Cycle Programming il Finishing plunge longitudinal transverse Expanded Call the Roughing longitudinal transverse cycles Select Plunge longitudinal see figures at right Select Plunge transverse see figures on the following page lt D 5 O oc x lt Press the Expanded soft key Press the Finishing run soft key Finishing run The cycle finishes the contour area from X1 Z1 to X2 Z2 When the cycle is completed the tool remains at the cycle end position CS The steeper the tool plunges into the material the greater the feed rate decrease max 50 Pay attention to the dimensions of facing tools see Facing tools on page 419 att Danger of collision If the tool angle and the tool point angle have not been defined the tool plunge cuts at the plunging angle If the tool and point angles have been defined the tool plunge cuts at the maximum possible plunging angle In this case the resulting contour will not be completely finished and may need to be reworked Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour starting point X2 Z2 contour end point A plunging angle default 0 Range 0 lt A
342. point Z Delete 7 Machine zero point Z workpiece zero point Z offset offset 0 Delete Machine zero point X workpiece zero point X offset offset 0 In the graphic support window MANUALplus illustrates the distance between the machine zero point and the workpiece zero point also referred to as offset If the workpiece zero point is changed the display values will be changed accordingly ce If you want to change the workpiece zero point in X enter the diameter value as Meas pt coordin X The graphic display shows the distance Machine zero point X to workpiece zero point as a radius value Ol 0 3 Machine Mode of Operation il Setting the protection zone Whenever the tool is moved MANUALplus checks whether the protection zone is violated in the negative Z direction If it detects such a violation it stops the axis movement and generates an error message The graphic support window shows the current setting for the protection zone Distance between machine zero point and protection zone 99999 000 means Protection zone in the negative Z direction is not monitored Select Setup Select the function for setting the protection zone Move the tool with the jog keys or handwheel until it reaches the protection zone Take over Define this position as protection zone position Enter the position of the protection zone relative to the workpiece zero point fie
343. posing form elements select the corner to be superimposed and then insert the desired form element I Press Superimpose form i aA elements e Hext Select the corner to be changed corner Previous Corer _ Select the desired form element Define the form element Superimposing on contours with unsolved contour areas You can superimpose form elements even if the contour still contains unsolved contour areas Exit the input mode with Back and call Superimpose form elements HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in Se X 2 002 T 1 tz 0 000 Z 92 001 12 fe Fie RO aan D 5000 r min 100 0 043 degr Form elements EN DnE Chamfer 5 4 Programming Changes to ICP i j il 5 5 ICP Contour Elements Turning Contour S Oo Par C Entering lines turning contour Use the menu symbol to select the direction of the contour element and assign it a dimension When defining horizontal and vertical linear elements it is not necessary to enter the X and Z coordinates respectively MANUALplus inhibits the corresponding input field if no unsolved elements exist Select the line direction S L I A You enter the dimensions of the line and then define the transition to the next contour element Parameters for vertical line XS ZS starting point in X Z end point of last element
344. programmed quantity is reached the system interrupts machining and asks you to replace the tool or cutting edge The machining operation however is not interrupted until the workpiece that is currently being produced is finished Depending on the status of the Tool life soft key MANUALplus enables either the Tool life input field or the No pieces input field The fields Rem dwell RT Rem pieces RZ show either the remaining life of your tool or the remaining number of pieces that can be produced When you insert a new cutting edge you must reset the tool life quantity parameter with Reset RT RZ The parameter is set back to the initially programmed tool life or number of pieces F Tool life monitoring is activated deactivated in Current parameters lool monitoring The quantity is counted when the end of the program has been reached Tool life quantity monitoring is also continued after a change of program HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 7 5 Tool Data Supplementany grameters K il 8 1 Organization Modda Operation 8 1 Organization Mode of Operation This mode of operation offers various functions for communication with other systems data security setting of parameters and diagnosis The following functions are available Parameter settings Parameters enable you to adapt MANUALplus to your specific requirements The Parameter menu provides functions to display and edit parameters Transf
345. ps Logon 1 Logoff 2 Usr Srv 3 user service Sys srv 4 system service Diag nosis 6 IE Some service and diagnostic functions are not accessible reserved for service and commissioning personnel Access authorization The functions logon logoff and user service are provided for managing access authorization Certain parameter changes and specific functions from service diagnosis may only be performed by authorized personnel The control permits access when the correct password is entered This access authorization is canceled again during logoff In the user service functions you can enter and delete users and assign and change passwords Each user is assigned a password consisting of a four digit number that has to be memorized The password is entered masked not visible HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 M Log on 2 Log ort 3 lUser sry 4 sys srv L e piag 2 jaggr a Log on SS i Organization iagnosis Log on Applying user PASSWORT 1234 Passuord entry E 8 4 Service 1 D j il 2 T e O m e 8 4 Service MANUALplus differentiates between the following user groups Without protection class NC programmers System managers Service personnel of the machine tool builder ce MANUALoplus is delivered with a preset authorization for the user password 1234 The password is 1234 After you have logged on as the user Password 1234 yo
346. quidistant line HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 1 6 Tool D Basics of Operation 2 1 The MANUALplus Screen MANUALplus shows the data to be displayed in 2 windows Some windows only appear when they are di Toot management organization needed for example for typing in entries dx 0 000 i X 72 002 E u In addition MANUALplus shows the type of EF operation and the soft key display on the screen Z 52 001 az F fl 5 Each function that appears in a field of the soft key S nnn Ox sE TEIN gt row is activated by pressing the soft key directly D 5000 o 0 043 degr below it lt i i ICP Beispiel Gewind fen gt Screen windows displayed N1 TO eREaaTER EEG Bank contour eiu a H2 TO ICP kpi blank t H112 Machine window N3 T2 Rap trav positioning el Position display display of machine data machine poet EUr TODE MU ald status etc N6 T2 Rap trav positioning N T2 ICP cut longitud W111 1 j H8 T2 Rap t z t Sr ana Programi WINROW N9 T6 ICP finish longit N11 ae Display of program lists tool lists parameter lists H10 T6 Rap trav positioning N etc To select specific elements from the list simply iz T18 Rap trav positionin ZN g move the highlight to the desired element with the N13 TO ICP workpiece blank contour N112 arrow keys Menu window Display of men
347. r spindle speed cutting speed feed per revolution undercut diameter default Value from standard table undercut length default Value from standard table undercut angle default Value from standard table R undercut radius on both sides of the undercut default Value from standard table P undercut oversize P gt 0 Division into pre turning and finish turning P is the longitudinal oversize the transverse oversize Is always 0 1 mm No input Machining in one cut Z A mT V B cylinder start chamfer default No start chamfer WB 1st cut angle default 45 RB chamfer radius default No chamfer radius 180 4 Cycle Programming il All parameters that you enter will be accounted for even if the standard table prescribes other values Undercut parameters that are not defined are automatically calculated from the standard table see DIN 76 undercut parameters on page 525 Thread pitch FP is calculated from the diameter X1 The parameters I K W and R are calculated from FP Cycle run 1 Approach workpiece from X Z to starting point X1 or for the thread chamfer Machine thread chamfer if defined Finish cylinder up to beginning of undercut Pre machine undercut if defined Machine undercut Finish to end point X2 0 BP W KN Without return Tool remains at the end point X2 With return Return to starting point on diagonal path HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110
348. r Machining of contour or pocket default 0 E U 0 Contour milling E U gt 0 Pocket milling minimum overlap of milling paths U milling diameter 6 21 Lateral Surface Ma gt R approaching radius Radius of approaching departing arc default 0 m R 0 Contour element is approached directly feed to starting point above the milling plane then vertical plunge R gt 0 Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0O for inside corners Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0O for outside corners Length of linear approaching departing element contour element is approached departed tangentially K oversize contour parallel I oversize X in infeed direction F feed rate for infeed default Active feed rate E reduced feed rate for circular elements default Active feed rate gt H cutting direction default 0 The cutting direction see graphic support window can be changed with H and the direction of tool rotation H 0 Up cut milling E H 1 Climb milling m x D 3 lt 3 G J HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 37 od S thom hom Y k oes _ q N lt o Q cycle type default 0 Depending on U the following applies Contour milling U 0 Q 0 Milling center on the contour Q 1
349. r circular elements default Active feed rate gt H cutting direction default 0 The cutting direction see graphic support window can be changed with H and the direction of tool rotation E H 0 Up cut milling E H 1 Climb milling 364 m x D 3 poe D G J co W 6 DIN Programming il Q cycle type default 0 Depending on U the following applies Contour milling U 0 Q 0 Milling center on the contour Q 1 closed contour Inside milling Q 1 open contour Left in machining direction Q 2 closed contour Outside milling Q 2 open contour Right in machining direction Q 3 open contour Milling location depends on H and the direction of tool rotation see graphic support window Pocket milling U gt 0 Q 0 From the inside toward the outside Q 1 From the outside toward the inside O roughing Tinishing default O O 0 Roughing O 1 Finishing first the edge of the pocket is machined then the pocket floor is machined Notes Milling depth The cycle calculates the depth from Z and ZE taking the oversizes into account Milling cutter radius compensation effective except for contour milling with Q 0 Approach and departure For closed contours the point of the Surface normal from the tool position to the first contour element is the point of approach and departure If no surface normal intersects the tool position the starting point of the first element
350. r coordinates 26 Position display 46 Positioning C axis cycle programming 202 Cycle M19 cycle programming 97 Spindle positioning in cycle mode 46 Precision stop G9 391 Principal axes arrangement 25 PRINT command DIN programming 395 ICP recess turning 152 Printer 441 Recess turning 144 Process key 33 Recess turning expanded 146 Program branches DIN programming 401 Recessing turning finishing expanded 150 Program information 75 Recess turning finishing 148 Program list 76 DIN programming Program management 75 Fundamentals 331 Recess turning cycle longitudinal simple G811 332 Recess turning cycles G815 G825 333 Recess turning cycles simple G811 G821 332 Recessing Cycle programming ICP recessing cycle 139 ICP recessing cycle finishing 141 Program repeat DIN programming 402 Program run 63 Program transfer network 448 Program transfer serial 449 Programming variables 396 Programming with variables if variables 397 Recessing finishing expanded 137 Calculating variables 405 Recessing finishing simple 135 Fundamentals 396 Recessing expanded 133 V variables 399 Recessing simple 131 Variables as address parameters 403 DIN programming Programs transferring 446 Contour recessing G861 G862 324 Proportioning of cuts 163 Contour recessing finishing G
351. r point Angle to center for angle direction see graphic support window Q point of intersection default Q 0 If entered data permit two possible solutions for the end point O defines the end point B chamfer rounding arc Transition to the next contour element When entering a chamfer rounding program the theoretical end point of the contour element B no input Tangential transition B 0 No tangential transition B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer X end point infeed diameter value default Current X position 374 6 DIN Programming il r O GF Define the center or end point either with C W or CY D e Program either center or radius r f you do not program the center MANUALplus 4 automatically calculates the possible solutions for the center and chooses that point as the center which results in the shortest arc Permitted as geometry command only for G112 G113 Parameters O B Permitted as machining command only for G112 G113 Parameter X a hom V C i q4 ol q N fe mi x 9 3 2 D G _ N G ou HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 375 il 6 21 Lateral Surface ME ining m x D 3 gcd o G SJ O N Linear slot lateral surface G792 G792 mills a slot from the current tool position to the end point The slot width equals the diameter of the milling cutter Oversizes
352. r systems integrated in the network have access to read from and write to shared directories independent of MANUALplus s activities att Danger of collision Other computer systems in the network may overwrite MANUALplus programs When organizing the network and granting access rights ensure that only authorized persons have access to MANUALoplus Serial data transfer It is important to ensure that the interface parameters baud rate word length etc comply with those of the remote station Printer The interface parameters baud rate word length etc must also comply with those of the printer Basics of data transfer MANUALplus and DataPilot manage DIN programs DIN macros cycle programs and ICP contours in different directories When you select Program group MANUALplus and DataPilot automatically switch to the applicable directories Parameters and tool data are stored in the remote station under the file name entered for Backup name The Backup name is displayed for your information It can be changed by service personnel only Automatic logon It Auto logon Yes has been selected you are automatically logged on to the network by MANUALplus Enter your user name and password required for logon into the Settings dialog box If you do not use the automatic logon function you must enter your user name and password when starting the system The disadvantage of working without the automatic logon fu
353. r the path of traverse has been executed Parameters gt F dwell time Range O sec lt F lt 999 sec Precision stop G9 If you program G9 in conjunction with a traverse command G1 G2 G3 G12 or G13 in a block the feed rate is reduced to zero at the end of the path of traverse The tool tip stops exactly at the programmed position before executing the next movement This results in a square edged corner Deactivate protection zone G60 G60 is used to cancel protective zone monitoring G60 is programmed before the traversing command to be monitored or not monitored G60 is a modal function Application example With G60 you can temporarily deactivate a programmed monitoring of the protective zone in order to machine a centric through hole Parameters Activate deactivate Q E Q 0 Activate protective zone monitoring m Q 1 Deactivate protective zone monitoring Wait for moment G204 The execution of a DIN program is interrupted up to the defined point in time You can use this function for example for a warm up program The parameter day D refers to the next possible date If D is not defined the parameters hour H minute O refer to the next possible point in time Parameters gt D day 1 31 gt H hour 0 23 gt Q minute 0 59 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 23 Other A aiii Example G60 TS F 6 24 Set T S F Tool number spindle speed cutting speed and
354. rapid traverse Manual mode Machining starts from current spindle angle Calculate the pattern positions Position to starting point of pattern Execute drilling milling operation Position for next machining operation Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been completed Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 9 Drilling Milling ia j il 4 9 Drilling Milling ems Drilling milling pattern circular radial Call the drilling menu Select Drilling radial see figure at upper right Select Deep hole drilling radial See figure at center right Select Tapping radial see figure at lower right ees Press the Pattern circular soft key circular Call the milling menu Select Slot radial see figure at top of next page Select ICP contour radial see middle figure on next page Pattern Press the Pattern circular soft key circular Press Pattern circular to machine hole patterns or figure patterns in which the individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a circle or circular arc on the lateral surface 234 Lhe ete 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle parameters X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle ZM CM pattern center Position angle polar coordinates K KD pattern diameter default Starting point X is the pattern
355. raws the contour element in the graphics window HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 X 139 871 s T 40 fe aes Z a 49 _ 713 ee F ie 10 000 mn r Q 20 40 60 80 190120 0 m min S mnnn 5 B oer degr XS 20 S 10 ki w k 30 ir l Special feed 0 000 X 139 871 a T40 1 Z 49 13 42 F ol emoe emr S n 2p 40 60 80 100120 g 0 m min DOOUANOOAOOODONOOOTa OR 100x 72 773 degr M _ Example Milling Cycle j il Mcp Example Milling Cycle Contour element 2 The next connecting contour element Is a circular arc The target point and the radius must be defined Since there are two solutions MANUALplus asks which solution is to be used 510 Teach in Toot nanagenent organization X 139 87 T4 Som Z 49 713 AZ F fal 10 000 aart S Q 20 40 60 80 100120 o 0 m min HAUUUNAUUGNAUUGOOGGONUNONUUA 0 i 100 72 773 degr Arc with radius XDI 107 96 s 10 skf 10 ykf 50 nf50 i Special feed Teach in Toot managenent organization X 139 871 a T40 Z TOE Se or eee 10 000 nn r ol n 100 0 20 40 60 80 100120 a ee ee ee ee ee Gp S Muninininininnininit 0 g 0 m min 100 72 773 degr 9 Examples il Contour element 3 A vertical line follows The element is defined Unambiguously after the length
356. rcs are superimposed on the existing contour Then select the corner Next corner Previous corner Following that define the rounding radius B MANUALoplus inserts the rounding in the existing ICP contour and draws the perfected contour MANUALplus offers the next contour corner for selection In this example all existing corners need to be rounded The ICP contour is completely programmed see figure at lower right Baek concludes ICP programming and Input finished concludes the ICP cycle HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Teach in Toot management organization T40 ooo X 139 871 a e Z 49 713 x S Oo 20 40 60 80 100120 o Ommin 1 100 72 773 degr xS 20 ys 10 JE A P ee a ee a ee ee ee l Special feed Teach in Toot management organization XI 139 871 T 40 foao Z 49 13 42 F ol emoe emr S wl g 0 m min AUAOAOROOOORnAon dnin 0 S Aoo 72 773 degr FARAPI _ Example Milling Cycle i il Milling cycle finishing The workpiece is machined with ICP contour pattern ee Toot management Cn circular axial and the generated ICP contour 0 000 O 1 defines the finishing cycle with J 0 the X 133 87 ee T 40 0 000 ket floor is finished f the inside t ds th 10 000 mn r seas oor is finished from the inside towards the Z 49 713 F 0 20 40 60 80 100120 0 m min S L S 100 72
357. re used to depict the cutting edge during simulation Using the parameter driven tool H MANUALplus determines whether a driven tool is being used HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 i g Data f il Tapping tools Select tapping tools ool Data Tool parameters X setup dimension in X Z setup dimension in Z I diameter of thread WO tool orientation For code number see graphic support window F thread pitch DX wear compensation in X Range 100mm lt DX lt 100mm DZ wear compensation in Z Range 100mm lt DZ lt 100mm Q tool text Reference to tool text H tool driven default O 0 Not driven 1 Driven MD direction of rotation default Not defined 3 M3 4 M4 TS cutting spindle speed default Not defined TF feed rate default Not defined PT tool 1ife default Not defined RT Display field for remaining tool life PZ quantity default Not defined RZ Display field for remaining quantity ec The thread pitch K is evaluated if the corresponding parameter is not defined in the tapping cycle Using the parameter driven tool H MANUALplus determines whether a driven tool is being used 424 7 Tool Management Mode il Milling tools Select milling tools Tool parameters X setup dimension in X Z setup dimension in Z I cutter diameter WO tool orientation For code number see graphic support window K number of teeth DX wear compensation in X Range 100mm
358. read F1 negative Left hand thread Z2 end point of thread P run in length Ramp at the beginning of the slot K run out length Ramp at the end of the slot U thread depth I maximum infeed The infeed movements are reduced down to gt 0 5 mm according to the following calculation Following that each infeed movement will amount to 0 5 mm Infeed 1 I Infeed n 1 n 1 E cutting depth reduction tool number N m spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Cycle run 1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid traverse only in Teach in mode 2 Calculate current infeed Position the tool for the first pass 4 Machine up to end point Z2 at the programmed feed rate taking the ramps at the beginning and end of the slot into account 5 Return on paraxial path and approach for next pass 6 Repeat 4 to 5 until the slot depth is reached oS HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 8 Millin f il 4 8 vinindlll cles Cutting direction for contour milling and pocket milling Inside J 1 Inside Inside Inside Outside J 2 Outside Outside Outside Right J 3 Left J 3 224 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Climb milling H 1 Climb milling H 1 Up cut milling H 0 Up cut milling H 0 Mx03 Mx04 Mx03 Mx04 Mx03
359. resolution 528 Interfaces for data transfer 442 Intermittent feed G64 297 Internal error 37 Interpreter stop G909 400 Interrupted feed G64 297 J Jog operation 60 Joystick 60 K Keyboard 23 L Language switching 455 Last cut thread machining 162 Lateral surface ICP contour elements 272 Lateral surface machining DIN programming 371 Lathe tools 419 Lathe view simulation 70 Light dot simulation 71 Line DIN programming Linear path G1 292 Linear segment face G101 361 Linear segment lateral surface G111 373 ICP contour Face 269 Lateral surface 273 Turning contour 260 Linear machining cycle programming At angle 93 Longitudinal 91 Transverse 92 Lines menu calling ICP 244 List of G functions GO Rapid traverse 290 G1 Linear path 292 G100 Rapid traverse face 360 G101 Linear segment face 361 G102 G103 Circular arc face 362 G103 G103 Circular arc face 362 G110 Rapid traverse lateral surface 372 G111 Linear segment lateral surface 373 G112 Circular arc lateral surface 374 G113 Circular arc lateral surface 374 G12 Circular path 295 G120 Reference diameter 371 G126 Speed limitation 297 G13 Circular path 295 Index il G14 Tool change point 291 G148 Tool edge compensation 302 G149 Additive compensation 303 G150 Compensation of right h
360. riable for request HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Program run Toot managenent organization X 72 02 E Z 92 001 i F fel 10 000 mn r E 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 a a ee ee a 185 m min 0 043 degr Durchmesser eingeben Interpretation The NC program is interpreted 999902 Lare Toot management organization H 1T1 4 H 2 GO X100 2100 if NH 3 GO X62 22 N 4 GJNPUTC Durchmesser eingeben 30 H 5 696 5150 G95 FO 4 H 6T1 H GO X62 22 NH 86 6819 P4 HO 10 3 KO 1 NH 9 GO X13 20 gt INPUT Durchmesser eingeben 20 Input text pied 7 a Text Save Cancel 393 6 25 Data Input and Output Output 6 25 Data Input and Data WINDOW ES Press Program variable function Select the size of the output window with lines for output Close the output window with lines for output 0 Select WINDOW see figure to the top right With the WINDOW command you can define a specific size for the output window that is to be used for output of information to the machinist If you do not program WINDOW the control uses an output window with three lines for the output of information The output window is displayed in the lower part of the list and program window It appears on the screen during the first output of information and is displayed until you close it or until the
361. right o n D 5000 r min anes El 0 043 degr ie Kf Slt lt i lt i lt s rT PY BDO wll kl 4 6 Thread and Undercull MANUALplus determines the undercut parameters from the standard table For the thread chamfer you only need to enter the chamfer width The angle of 45 is the default value for the 1st cut angle WB Tool data Lathe tool for internal machining WO 7 Tool orientation A 93 Tool angle Undercut diameter L o Poi With Re Tool ee eal SF Hal Input Back B 55 Point angle return cut list position tool speed finished 188 4 Cycle Programming il Second step The Thread cycle longitudinal cuts the thread The thread pitch is defined MANUALplus automatically determines all other values from the standard table see figure at right You must pay attention to the setting of the Inner thread soft key Tool data Threading tool for internal machining WO 7 Tool orientation HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 EE Toot management organization X 72 002 s T1 Som Zi 5201 Fa aia 20 40 60 80 100120 5 Se D 5000 r min pens zsa E 0 E T r A z 3 x2 22 29 F1fi 5 uj 10 25 Tia 5 1200 F Start point Expanded Re Tool Take over S F from Input Back cut list position tool finished 4 6 Thread and i i il 4 7 Drilling Cycles T O The drilling cycles allow you to machine rean Toot management organ
362. ription for roughing cycle G819 Move to tool change point insert finishing tool Call finishing tool program spindle speed and feed rate Approach the workpiece Contour finishing cycle Tool is to the left of the contour Starting point of contour description for finishing cycle G89 Contour definition Undercut contour an element of the contour description End of contour description for finishing cycle G89 Move to tool change point insert threading tool Call threading tool program constant spindle speed Move to thread starting point Simple longitudinal single start thread cycle 517 9 6 DIN Programming Example Threaded Stud Example Threaded Stud pe O pe am Z O Checking the DIN program After you have written the DIN program Threaded stud switch to the Program run mode to test the program see figure at upper right The simulation shows the contour of the threaded stud and each individual tool movement see figure at lower right 518 Retract the tool approach the tool change position End of program Program run Toot aaninistration organisation x 62 000 T4 Zoom 0 000 YA 2 a 000 Az F fell 2 200 por S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 o 180 m min L ioox 356 121 degr 1 888 nc DIN Beispiel Gewindezapfen N2 696 5150 G95 F0 4 Ti H4 GO X62 22 H5 6819 P4 HO I0 3 KO 1 H6 GO amp
363. rkpiece zero point see Machine Setup on page 50 and enter the machine data see Machine Data on page 46 before you start machining Tool change Enter the T number and check the tool parameters TO does not define a tool This also means that TO does not contain any data on tool length cutting radius etc Spindle The spindle speed is entered in Set T S F To start and stop spindle rotation press the buttons on the machine operating panel Position the spindle by defining the Stopping angle A in the Set T S F menu GF Pay attention to the maximum speed can be defined with eto T Handwheel operation You set the traverse per handwheel increment with the handwheel resolution selector switch on the machine operating panel Jog operation joystick With the jog controls you can move the axes at the programmed feed rate or at rapid traverse The feed rate is programmed in Set T S F The rapid traverse speed is set in Current parameters Machine parameters Feeds 60 3 Machine Mode of Operation il Cycles in Manual mode Set the spindle speed Set the feed rate Insert tool define T number and check tool data TO is not permitted Approach cycle start point Select the cycle and enter cycle parameters Graphic control of cycle run Run the cycle HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 3 6 a Mode 3 7 reana Mode 3 7 Teach In Mode In Teach in mode cycle mode you machine a workpi
364. rror internal error ST PLC error PLC status display 37 Warnings during simulation 38 2 4 Explanation of Terms 39 3 1 Machine Mode of Operation 42 3 2 Switch On Switch Oft 43 Switch on 43 Traversing the reference marks 43 Monitoring EnDat encoders 44 Switch oft 45 3 3 Machine Data 46 Input and display of machine data 46 Tool call 47 Tools in different quadrants 48 Feed rate 48 Spindle 49 3 4 Machine Setup 50 Defining the workpiece zero point 50 Setting the protection zone 51 Defining the tool change position 52 Setting C axis values 53 3 5 Setting up Tools 54 Tool compensation 58 Tool life monitoring 59 3 6 Manual Mode 60 Tool change 60 Spindle 60 Handwheel operation 60 Jog operation joystick 60 Cycles in Manual mode 61 3 7 Teach In Mode 62 3 8 Program Run Mode 63 Faulty programs 63 Before executing a program 63 Start block search and program execution 64 Entering compensation values during program execution 65 Setting compensation values with the handwheel 66 Program execution in dry run mode 67 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 7 il Graphic elements 71 Warnings 72 Magnify Reduce 73 3 10 Time Calculation 74 3 11 Program Management 75 Program information
365. s ol 0 20 40 60 80 100120 180 m min The rough contour has been completely defined You S niin 0 0 356 121 degr can now exit the input mode with Back xS 60 zsa LL l E WW o O gt Q D T N Q O D o Q x Lu x 62 000 T 4 ae 0 000 l 2 000 e E FA 0 200 mn r S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 S o 180 m min T 100 356 121 degr HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 503 il Example Recessing Cycle Rounding the corners The rounding arcs are superimposed on the existing contour Then select the corner Next corner Previous corner Following that define the rounding radius B MANUALplus inserts the rounding in the existing ICP contour and draws the perfected contour MANUALplus offers the next contour corner for selection In this example all existing corners need to be rounded The ICP contour is completely programmed see figure at lower right Back concludes ICP programming and Input finished concludes the ICP cycle 504 x 62 000 1 T 4 feon Z 2 00 Fas 180 m min 1004 356 121 degr S Oo 20 40 60 80 100120 F fol 0 200 mn r a eels ar E eUa g 180 m min l O 100 356 121 degr aaa Raa L 44 Q ieee Erango Seal nn 9 Examples il Checking the ICP recessing radial cycle With the graphic simulation function you can che
366. s the workpiece zero point HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 rochine Toot administration Organisation x 70 000 ss T 1 az 0 000 l 52 000 ol Fi S O0 20 40 60 80 100120 150 m min inntinii 0 S 100 2273 r min Rf 2 aoo th MANUALplus ing wi w a O machine Toot adninistration Organisation x 70 000 T 1 eooo l 52 000 Az E F fel S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 Si 150 m min 0 B 2273 r min sE az R 0 8 Meas pt coordin o il melgerng acy cle program teach in TER TRGTSGERERENN NLC aATZAETERIN S 0 000 A new cycle program with the number 999 is X 72 00 aD 0 000 created 7 52 001 ig e mar C 1 EREA 20 40 60 80 saa a Sinai 0x o 0 m min i i o ioo 0 043 degr Tarain Switch to Teach in mode D 5000 r min select ci Humber Beispielwerkstueck Beispiel Fraesen Stirnflaeche th MANUALplus Press Program list list Enter 999 as program number ICP Excample Beispiel Stechzyklus Beispielwerkstueck ICP Excample Beispiel Matrize Beispielwerkstueck ICP Excample Beispiel ing wi Cycle progran E Select Activate program 999 Size 1640 Last change 16 06 2003 14 10 _ _ ork Change Press Change text hi E a x z X 70 00 T14 ecm l 52 000 Fig 0a m Enter the program designation here Example 5 ninbninnbninninininininni 0 S uo o E 357 Se workpiece
367. s cycle performs only one cut at an angle of 45 The resulting contour geometry therefore depends on the tool that is used Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour corner I undercut depth T tool number gt S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Cycle run 1 Pre position at an angle of 45 to safety clearance above contour corner point X1 Z1 in rapid traverse 2 Plunge by undercut depth I 3 Retract to starting point X Z on same path HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 Nevessinggye es o i 4 5 Recessinifvcles Undercut type U Call the recessing menu Select the Undercut U cycle This cycle machines an Undercut type U and if programmed finishes the adjoining plane surface The undercut is executed In several passes if the undercut width is greater than the cutting width of the tool If the cutting width of the tool is not defined the control assumes that the tool s cutting width equals K A chamfer or rounding optional is machined Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour corner X2 end point on plane surface I undercut diameter K width of undercut B chamfer rounding B gt 0 Radius of rounding B lt 0 Width of chamfer T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution Cycle run 1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts 2 Pre position to safety clearance from X Z 3 Move at feed rate to undercut diam
368. s transition to the next contour element is machined Reduced feed rate feed rate offset radius original radius Milling cutter radius compensation MCRC When the MCRC function is not active the system defines the center of the cutter as the zero point for the paths of traverse With the MCRC function MANUALplus accounts for the outside cutting radius when moving along the programmed paths of traverse see Milling cutter radius compensation MCRC on page 29 Recessing roughing and milling cycles already include TRC MCRC calls You must therefore ensure that TRC MCRC is disabled before you call these cycles There are a few exceptions to this rule that will be described where concerned C If tool radii gt contour radii the TRC MCRC might cause abrasive cuts Recommendation Use the finishing cycle G89 milling cycles G793 G794 Never select MCRC during a perpendicular approach to the machining plane Note on calling subroutines Switch the TRC MCRC off in the subprogram in which it was switched on in the main program if it was switched on there Function of the TRC MCRC OO 00 6 DIN Programming il G40 Switch off TRC MCRC E The TRC MCRC remains in effect until a block with G40 is reached E The block containing G40 or the block after G40 only permits a linear path of traverse G14 is not permissible G41 G42 Switch on TRC MCRC A straight line segment GO G1 must
369. s with the longitudinal or transverse element see figure at upper right Example External chamfer at contour start If you program element position J 1 the imaginary approaching reference element is a transverse element in the positive X axis direction see figure to the bottom right HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 ntour Z Teach in Toot management organization 72 002 52 001 T 1 dx 0 000 dz 0 000 10 000 mmr F fel S ry 185 m min 1 100 0 043 degr C 5 n J LLI Se O J am Q Q 0 O a LO Delete Change Back last last j il ntour S j a J eb 2 LLI Oo ad c Oo Q 0 S L LO Chamfer rounding turning contour 2 Ay Select form elements or chamfer rounding L Choose chamfer A Choose rounding The corner is predefined by the starting point You need only enter the chamfer width B or rounding radius B Parameters B chamfer width or B rounding radius J element position imaginary approaching reference element E J 1 Transverse element in the positive X axis direction E J 1 Transverse element in the negative X axis direction E J 2 Longitudinal element in the positive Z axis direction E J 2 Longitudinal element in the negative Z axis direction F special feed 264 5 ICP Programming il Undercuts turning contour Select for
370. sed ri Cycles 6 11 Contour Based until Cycles m x O 3 D G 00 Contour finishing G89 G89 finishes the contour area defined in the subsequent blocks see Contour definition on page 310 In the NC block after G89 the tool tip radius compensation TRC is called with G41 G42 without parameters and allows you to define the position of the tool reference contour direction E G41 Tool moves to the right of the contour E G42 Tool moves to the left of the contour MANUALplus switches off the TRC at the end of the cycle If you do not define G41 G42 the TRC function does not become effective Parameters B chamfer rounding at start of contour B gt 0 Radius of rounding m B lt 0 Width of chamfer I oversize Equidistant oversize a negative oversize is permitted gt K retraction mode at the end of cycle detfines the tool position at the end of the cycle E No input Return to starting point of cycle K 0 Tool remains at cycle end position K gt 0 Tool retracts by K J element position When the contour section begins with a chamfer rounding J defines the position of the imaginary reference element default 1 Reference element E J 1 Transverse element in the positive X axis direction J 1 Transverse element in the negative X axis direction E J 2 Longitudinal element in the positive Z axis direction E J 2 Longitudinal element in the negative Z axis directio
371. sed by the following NC program E 46 50 variables only for expert programs Do not use these variables in your NC program E 256 285 local variables These variables are effective only within a subprogram Reading in parameter values Syntax 1 PARA x y z x Parameter group pe 11 Machine parameters 2 Control parameters 3 Setup parameters 4 Machining parameters 5 PLC parameters E E E E y Parameter number z Sub parameter number Information contained in variables The following variable information on tool data and your NC program can be read out see the tables to the right and on the next page E Positions and dimensions are always indicated in metric form This also applies when an NC program is run in inches HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Example variables 68 771 74 776 78 785 787 791 793 794 796 797 6 26 rrogramminggenabies 770 786 792 195 Last programmed position X radius value Z Last programmed position C TRC MCRC status 40 G40 active 41 G41 active 42 G42 active Active wear compensation G148 0 DX DZ 1 DS DZ 2 DX DS Unit of measure O metric 1 Inch Distance between tool tip and slide zero point Z X Reference diameter for lateral surface machining G120 G57 oversizes X Z G58 oversize P Cutting width in X Z by which the tool reference point is
372. situation The thread cut cycle has been performed and the thread depth is not correct Perform the tool compensation Press Last cut Last cut Activate Cycle Start 1 Check the thread C The tool compensation and the last cut can be repeated as often as necessary until the thread is correct 164 4 Cycle Programming il Thread cycle longitudinal Call the thread cutting menu Select the Thread cycle Inner Inner thread soft key thread On Internal thread Off External thread This cycle cuts a single external or internal thread with a thread angle of 30 Tool infeed is performed in the X axis only Cycle parameters X Z starting point of thread Z2 end point of thread Fl thread pitch feed rate U thread depth No input Depth is calculated External thread U 0 6134 F1 Internal thread U 0 5413 F1 I 1st cutting depth I lt U First cut with cutting depth I further cuts Reduction of cutting depth I U One cut No input Calculation from U and F1 T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed Cycle run 1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts Start first pass at Z Move to end point Z2 at programmed feed rate Return on paraxial path and approach for next pass Repeat 3 and 4 until depth U has been reached o1 fF W N HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 6 Thread and vneereumagre es o il 4 6 Thread and Undercullfilctes Thread cycle longitudinal Expande
373. sk on which all cycle programs ICP contours and DIN programs that you enter are stored This allows you to save a vast number of programs For data exchange and data backup you can use the serial data interface RS 232 C or the Ethernet interface Lathe design MANUALplus is configured by the machine manufacturer as a vertical boring and turning mill or to machine with tools in front of or behind the workpiece depending on the design of the lathe or the position of the tool carrier The menu symbols the graphic support windows as well as the graphic representation during ICP and graphic simulation all reflect the configuration of the lathe The representations in this User s Manual assume a lathe with tool carrier in front of the workpiece 22 1 Introduction and Fundamentals il Menu Call the main menu Process Select a new mode of operation Backspace Delete the character to the left of the Cursor Switching key Switch between help graphics for internal external machining Clear Delete error messages Numbers 0 to 9 For entering values and selecting soft keys Decimal point Minus Enter the algebraic sign o DO ODE HEIDENHAIN 3 OD ENTER Confirm the entered value Store Conclude data input and transfer values Arrow keys Move the cursor in the indicated direction by one position character field line etc Page up Page down PgUp PgDn Show the information o
374. ssage is correct if the control has been switched on for the first time or if the encoder or other control components involved were exchanged Parameters were changed Saved encoder position of the axis is invalid This message is correct if configuration parameters were changed The cause for one of the above listed messages can also be a defect in the encoder or control Please contact your machine supplier if the problem recurs 44 3 Machine Mode of Operation Switch off GF Proper switch off is recorded in the error log file Go to the main level of the Machine mode of operation Press the Switch off soft key off MANUALplus displays a confirmation request Press ENTER to terminate the control Wait until MANUALplus requests you to switch off the machine HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Exit MANUALpIus Do you really want to exit 3 2 Switch On a 3 3 Madi Data 3 3 Machine Data Input and display of machine data In Manual mode the machine data for tool spindle speed and feed rate are entered in Set T S F In cycle programs the machine data are Included in the cycle parameters and in DIN programs they are part of the NC program In Set T S F you also define the maximum speed and the stopping angle You can store the cutting data spindle speed feed rate together with the tool data and transfer them with the S F from tool soft key see Tool Data Sup
375. ssing cycle The cutting width is not entered MANUALplus automatically calculates the proportioning of cuts such that the infeed per pass is lt 80 of the cutting width defined in the tool data see figure to the top right After defining the cycle parameters press Edit ICP to call the ICP programming function You can now switch to the input mode by pressing Add element First you enter the rough contour Then you use the superimposition function to define the roundings Example Recessing Cycle gt 0 496 Teach in Toot adninistration organisation x 62 000 T 4 az 0 000 l 2 00 i Figen om S 0 20 40 60 80 B o J o ELL ICP cut radial d 62 m Pf 2 k 0 2 n 666 th shao o F 0 2 Start pt Edit Finishing Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back ICP run list position tool speed finished 9 Examples il Contour element 1 The contour starts with a horizontal line which is ee Toot adninistration organisation connected tangentially to the subsequent circular ax ooi arc x 62 000 a T 4 dz 0 000 The starting point of the ICP contour is defined in XS I nnn ee ror 0 200 mmn r ZS when programming the first contour element l i 2 000 SEN F ho n i bees S Q 20 49 60 80 100 120 S o 180 m min After you have entered the target point Z the line is AAANOOUOOAORRUONOAtaa 0 2 joo 356 121 degr unambiguously defined MANUALplus draws the
376. st position tool finished X 22 wo ax T1 az 0 000 Z 0 00 P O F ie fel 0 200 mmr ERA 20 40 60 80 100120 S T O so 185 m min D 5000 r min o 0 043 oox 0 043 degr Drill patt linear radial O x27 105 2f Ee k w C OC Start point drill Pattern Tool Take over S F from Input Back circular list position tool finished 4 Cycle Programming il 4 10 DIN Cycles Select DIN cycle This function allows you to select a DIN cycle DIN macro and integrate it in a MANUALplus cycle program The machine data that are programmed in the DIN cycle in Manual mode the currently active machine data become effective as soon as you start the DIN macro You can change the machine data T S F at any time by editing the DIN macro att Danger of collision Cycle programming With DIN macros the zero point shift is reset at the end of the cycle Therefore do not use any DIN macros with zero point shifts in cycle programming In this cycle no starting point is defined Please keep in mind that the tool moves on a diagonal path from the current position to the first position that is programmed in the DIN macro Cycle parameters N DIN macro number T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 10 DI j il ICP Programming N i gt Oo Pwr 0 S S LO 5 1 ICP Contours The Interactive Con
377. t CY center point as linear value reference G120 reference diameter C center point Angle to center for angle direction see graphic support window gt Q number of edges Range 3 lt Q lt 127 A angle reference see graphic support window K width across flats SW length m K lt 0 Width across flats inside diameter E K gt 0 Edge length R chamfer rounding E R lt 0 Chamfer length R gt 0 Rounding arc 382 6 DIN Programming il 6 22 Pattern Machining Linear pattern face G743 With cycle G743 you can machine linear hole patterns or figure patterns in which the individual features are arranged at a regular Spacing on the face If ZE has not been defined the drilling milling cycle of the next NC block is used as a reference Using this principle you can combine pattern definitions with Drilling cycles G71 G74 G36 The milling cycle for a linear slot G791 E The contour milling cycle with independent contour G793 Parameters XK starting point of pattern Cartesian coordinates YK starting point of pattern Cartesian coordinates Z starting point of drilling milling operation ZE end point of drilling milling operation gt X diameter polar coordinates C starting angle polar coordinates A pattern angle I end point of pattern Cartesian coordinates J end point of pattern Cartesian coordinates Ii end point Pattern distance Cartesi
378. t diagnostic Tiles The creation and evaluation of diagnostic files is intended for service purposes only Data exchange with DataPilot 4110 HEIDENHAIN offers the PC program package DataPilot 4110 to complement the MANUALoplus control The DataPilot provides the same programming and test functions as MANUALoplus This offers you the advantage of defining cycle programs DIN programs or ICP contours with DataPilot running a graphic simulation of the created programs and contours and then transferring them to the control DataPilot is suited for data backup Of course you can alSo use alternative Windows operating system functions or other PC programs available on the market for data backup Printer MANUALplus supports the output of DIN programs and DIN macros to a printer over the serial interface Cycle programs and ICP contour descriptions cannot be printed The data are processed for printout in size A4 format HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 E Transfer o il E Transfer Interfaces Data transfer is carried out over the Ethernet or the serial interface We recommend using transfer modes via Ethernet interface since the transmission rate and transmission security are higher than with serial interfaces WINDOWS networks via Ethernet With a WINDOWS network you can integrate your lathe in a LAN network MANUALplus supports the networks provided by WINDOWS MANUALplus allows you to send receive files Other compute
379. t 0 J workpiece blank oversize the cycle machines J 0 From the current tool position E J gt 0 The area defined by the workpiece blank oversize Q transverse roughing default 0 Longitudinal or transverse machining Q 0 Longitudinal machining E Q 1 Transverse machining Note on the execution of the cycle MANUALplus automatically determines the cutting and infeed directions from the current tool position relative to the starting point end point of the contour area Tool position at the end of the cycle Cycle starting point GF At the start of the cycle the tool must be located outside the defined contour area Cutting radius compensation Active G57 G58 oversizes are taken into account if I K is not programmed After the cycle has been executed the oversizes are canceled Safety clearance after each step Parameter Current parameters Machining Safety distances For workpiece blank oversize J gt 0 Set the infeed depth P to the smaller infeed if the maximum infeed differs for the longitudinal and transverse directions due to the cutting geometry The cycle parameter workpiece blank oversize Jis available as of NC software versions 507 807 16 and 526 488 08 With earlier software versions the cycle starts the machining operation from the current tool position HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 31 m x lt 3 3 D G 00 Ww 6 11 Contour Ba
380. t K center point incremental distance from starting point to center point Q point of intersection default Q 0 Specifies the end point if two solutions are possible see graphic support window gt B chamfer rounding At the end of the circular arc you can program a chamfer rounding or a tangential transition to the next contour element No entry Tangential transition B 0 No tangential transition E B gt 0 Radius of rounding E B lt 0 Width of chamfer E special feed rate for chamfer rounding default Active feed rate GF f you do not program the center MANUALplus automatically calculates the possible solutions for the center and chooses that point as the center which results in the shortest arc The direction of rotation of G2 G3 is shown in the graphic support window 294 m x O D G N G Ww L 6 DIN Programming il Circular path G12 G13 absolute center coordinates Geometry command G12 G13 defines a circular arc in a contour Machining command The tool moves on a circular arc at feed rate to the end point The direction of rotation is shown in the graphic support window e i Q a ol V I HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 295 il 6 5 Simple Linear and Circular M ments Parameters G12 G13 X end point diameter value Z end point gt R radius gt I center point absolute diameter value
381. t Mode il Drilling tools this group comprises Centering tools NC center drills Twist drills Indexable insert drills Countersinks counterbores Reamers Taps All kind of tapping tools Milling tools this group comprises Twist drill cutter End milling cutter Thread cutter You will certainly use more than these tool types Special care has been taken to clearly structure the tool types available on the MANUALplus Tool life management In Tool Organization you can set the life for the cutting edge or define the number of workpieces that will be machined with each cutting edge The system monitors use of the tool and displays a message as soon as the programmed tool life expires or the programmed number of parts is reached see Tool life monitoring on page 59 and Tool Data Supplementary Parameters on page 426 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 7 1 Tool Management Mode j pai i il ion t 7 2 Tool 7 2 Tool Organization The entries in the tool list are designated T1 T99 The tool tip in the graphic display shows the tool type and the tool orientation In the tool list the MANUALplus displays important parameters and the tool description The input window shows additional data on the tool that is highlighted in the tool list You can navigate within the tool list with the arrow keys and PgUp PgDn to check the entries You can also search entries of a particular tool type Enter data f
382. t cut length no input No chamfer machined at start of cylinder gt RB 1st cut radius no input No chamfer radius is machined gt WB Ist cut angle default 45 E reduced feed rate default Active feed rate For the plunge cut and the thread chamfer gt H type of departure default 0 H 0 Tool returns to the starting point E H 1 Tool remains at the end of the plane surface Note Parameters that are not programmed are automatically calculated trom the standard table see DIN 76 undercut parameters on page 525 E FP from the diameter E K W and R from FP thread pitch Blocks following the cycle call tE Undercuts can only be executed in orthogonal paraxial contour corners along the longitudinal axis Cutting radius compensation Active Oversizes are not taken into account HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 m x O 3 D G 00 a W 6 16 ndei Cycles S i 6 16 Unde Cycles Undercut type U G856 Cycle G856 machines an undercut and finishes the adjoining plane surface A chamfer or rounding optional can be machined Parameters I undercut diameter diameter value K undercut length B chamfer rounding E B gt 0 Radius of rounding m B lt 0 Width of chamfer Note on the execution of the cycle E At the end of cycle the tool returns to the starting point E f the cutting width of the tool is not defined the control assumes that th
383. t is marked selected highlighted in color a NOONE Hext Select the reference element element Previous element T Press Shift contour a Enter the new starting point of the reference element EYEE OOOO OOOO Over Assume the new starting point write new position The MANUALplus shows the shifted contour lt Select Assume the new position for the solution contour 256 X Z Teach in Toot management _ Organization 200 000 TO Sones 100 000 Fi S Q 20 40 60 80 100120 S o 0 m min EOOOOCCRRROOOOOCRRRIIMIMIII 0 i 100x 0 000 degr Vertical line Teach in Tool management Z Organization 200 000 TAO ee 100 000 Fe S OORCOOCROOODOOCRIOORIMINIMIIN 0 S E nin Enter lines Ni ZAIN Lines m A Fa 5 ICP Programming il Adding a contour element 5 4 Programming Changes to ICP _ Insert Press Insert element element Append additional contour elements to the existing contour Deleting a contour element Delete Press Delete element a contour element is marked element selected highlighted in color Next Select the contour element to be deleted element Previous element Delete Delete the contour element You can delete several successive contour elements F If the element to be deleted is an unsolved element the associated symbol is marked selected HEIDENHAIN MANUALpl
384. t on diagonal path HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 4 6 Thread and Undercugiycies o i 4 6 Thread and Underculllllcles Examples of thread and undercut cycles External thread and thread undercut The machining operation is to be performed in two steps Thread undercut DIN 76 produces the undercut and thread chamfer In the second step the thread cycle cuts the thread First step The parameters for the undercut and thread chamfer are programmed in two superimposed Input windows see figure at right Tool data Lathe tool for external machining WO 1 Tool orientation A 93 Tool angle B 55 Point angle X 22 ax o T1 az 0 000 F mp rr 185 m min oox 0 043 degr Z 52 00 Af E ania 20 40 60 80 100120 eee D 5000 r min so E lt B2 O x1745 afo ooo 255 z400 FP Efo 3 tho sfa F 0 5 7 Start point 186 Teach in Toot managenent organization X 72 00 AX E Ton T 1 0 000 Z 52 00 A H F fe e rm eee D 5000 r min SE E a3 doar oox 0 043 degr Undercut DIN 76 E 43 6 af i30 P2 B5 oo uso O meoo Undercut diameter With Re Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back return cut list position tool speed finished 4 Cycle Programming il Second step The Thread cycle longitudinal Expanded cuts the thread The cycle parameters define the thread depth and th
385. tarting point of cylinder X2 Z2 end point on plane surface E reduced feed rate for the plunge cut and the thread chamfer default Feed rate F T tool number spindle speed cutting speed feed per revolution undercut depth default Value from standard table undercut length default Value from standard table undercut angle default Value from standard table R undercut radius on both sides of the undercut default Value from standard table P transverse depth default Value from standard table A transverse angle default Value from standard table B cylinder start chamfer default No start chamfer WB 1st cut angle default 45 RB chamfer radius default No chamfer radius U finishing oversize default O Z A mT V All parameters that you enter will be accounted for even if the standard table prescribes other values If the parameters K W R P and A are not defined MANUALplus determines these values from the cylinder diameter in the standard table see DIN 509 E DIN 509 F undercut parameters on page 527 184 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle run 1 ow AOUN Approach workpiece trom X Z to cylinder starting point X1 or E for the thread chamfer Machine thread chamfer if defined Finish cylinder up to beginning of undercut Machine undercut Finish to end point X2 on plane surface E Without return Tool remains at the end point X2 E With return Return to starting poin
386. ted with the menu key Insert Press Insert element element Select the element type Direction of line Enter lines menu Direction of rotation and type of dimensioning of circular arcs Enter arcs menu Type of form element Define the parameters You can add to an ICP contour by entering additional contour elements that are appended to the existing contour A newly entered contour element is always linked to the last contour element MANUALplus identifies the last contour element by a small square at the end of the contour when the contour is being displayed but not machined Absolute or incremental dimensions The setting of the Increment soft key determines which type of coordinate is active Incremental parameters will have the appendix Xi Zi etc 244 Call the arcs menu Call the lines menu 5 ICP Programming il Transitions between contour elements A transition between two contour elements is called tangential when one contour element makes a smooth and continuous transition to the next There is no visible kink or corner at the intersection With geometrically complex contours tangential transitions are useful for reducing the input of dimensional data to a minimum and eliminating the possibility of mathematically contradictory entries To be able to calculate unsolved contour elements MANUALplus must know the type of transition that connects the contour elements The transit
387. tep Interpolation Feed rate Spindle Axis control Spindle speed Error compensation Integral PLC Data interface Operating temperature 528 Contouring control with integrated motor control 2 controlled axes X Z controlled spindle and 1 driven tool Integrated 10 4 inch TFT color flat panel display Highlighted actual value and status displays Load display for spindle Error messages in plain language Hard disk gt 4 5 GB X axis 0 5 um diameter 1 um Z axis 1 um C axis 0 001 Straight line in 3 principal axes max 10 m Circle in 2 axes max 100 m Max 9 999 m min or max 9 999 mm rev Constant cutting speed Maximum threading feed rate up to 99 999 m rev Feed rate with chip breaking Maximum rate of rapid traverse 99 999 m min O to 9 999 rom Integrated digital drive control for synchronous and asynchronous motors Position control clock pulse lt 3 ms Speed control lt 0 6 ms Current control lt 0 1 ms Speed 0 to 9999 rom Backlash reversal error Screw pitch error Slope angle of an oblique axis Temperature 512 KB program memory 124 KB data memory RS 232 C max 38 4 kilobaud RS 422 C max 38 4 kilobaud Ethernet 10 Mb 0 C to 45 C 10 Tables and Overviews il Manual operation Teach in mode Manually controlled slide movement via intermediate switch or electronic handwheels Graphically supported entry and execution of cycles in conjunction with manual mac
388. ter according to the following table 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 6 1 8 2 2 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 4 5 524 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 3 0 35 0 35 0 4 0 45 0 45 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 75 0 8 14 16 18 20 22 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 52 56 60 64 68 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 10 Tables and Overviews il 10 2 Undercut Parameters DIN 76 undercut parameters MANUALplus determines the parameters from the thread pitch according to the following table 0 2 0 25 0 3 0 35 0 4 0 45 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 75 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 D 0 3 D 0 4 D 0 5 D 0 6 D 0 7 D 0 7 D 0 8 D 1 D 1 1 D 1 2 D 1 3 D 1 6 D 2 D 2 3 D 2 6 D 3 D 3 6 0 7 0 9 1 05 1 4 1 6 1 75 2l 2 45 2 6 2 8 3 5 4 4 5 2 6 1 8 7 0 1 0 12 0 16 0 16 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 6 0 6 0 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 Designations undercut diameter K undercut length R undercut radius W undercut angle 0 2 0 25 0 3 0 35 0 4 0 45 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 75 0 8 1 25 1 75 2 5 D 0 1 D 0 1 D 0 1 D 0 2 D 0 2 D 0 3 D 0 3 D 0 3 D 0 3 D 0 3 D 0 3 D 0 5 D 0 5 D 0 5 D 0 5 D 0 5 D 0 5 1 2 1 4 1 6 1 9 2 2 2 4 2 7 3 3 3 8 4 0 4 2 5 2 6 7 7 8 9 1 10 3 13 0 1 0 12 0 16 0 16 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 6 0 6 0 8 1 2 307 30 30 30
389. terfaces 442 Basics of data transfer 442 Configuring for data transfer 444 Transferring programs files 446 8 4 Service and Diagnosis 453 Access authorization 453 System service 455 Diagnosis 455 9 1 Working with MANUALplus 458 Setting up the machine 459 Selecting a cycle program 460 Creating a cycle program 461 9 2 ICP Example Threaded Stud 470 9 3 ICP Example Matrix 483 9 4 ICP Example Recessing Cycle 495 9 5 ICP Example Milling Cycle 507 9 6 DIN Programming Example Threaded Stud 516 9 7 DIN Programming Example Milling Cycle 519 10 1 Thread Pitch 524 10 2 Undercut Parameters 525 DIN 76 undercut parameters 525 DIN 509 E DIN 509 F undercut parameters 527 10 3 Technical Information 528 10 4 Peripheral Interface D32 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 1 1 The MANUALplus 1 1 The MANUALplus The MANUALplus control combines modern control and drive technology with the functional features of a hand operated machine tool You can run simple machining operations such as turning or facing on MANUALoplus just like on any conventional lathe The axes are moved as usual by handwheel or joystick For machining difficult contours such as tapers radii chamfers undercuts or threads MANUALplus offers fixed cycles These cycles enable you to work faster and produce a hig
390. th P and hole depth reduction value IB define the individual passes and Z 52 001 l F fel EIT niwinivninivninninivinnni ainnbninnaninni 0 0 So 185 m min D 5000 r min El oox 0 043 degr the minimum hole depth JB limits the hole EEE An reduction value As the return length B is not defined the drill therefore retracts to the starting point after each pass p aBjs remains there for the programmed dwell time and then advances again to the safety clearance for the next pass Since this example is to illustrate how you drill a through hole the hole end point Z2 is programmed such that the tool has to drill all the way through the workpiece before it reaches the end point The parameters AB and V define a feed reduction for both pre drilling and through boring Tool data WO 8 Tool orientation 12 Drilling diameter B 118 Point angle H 1 The tool is a driven tool Pattern Pattern Tool Take over S F from Input Back linear circular list position tool finished 200 4 Cycle Programming il 4 8 Milling Cycles Milling cycles for axial and radial slots contours pockets surfaces and polygons For pattern machining see Drilling Milling Patterns on page 227 In Teach in mode these cycles include the activation deactivation of the C axis and the positioning of the spindle In Manual mode you can activate the C axis with Rapid travers
391. th of line F special feed HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 273 il Q Entering circular arcs on the lateral surface mi thas WS with center and radius Ww ga Arc with radius You enter the dimensions of the arc and then define the transition to the next contour element Parameters for Arc with radius the center is not requested For Arc with center point the radius is not requested ZS YS starting point YS as linear dimension reference diameter XS CS starting point as angular dimension XS unrolled diameter Z target point CY target point as linear dimension reference diameter XS C target point as angular dimension K CJ center point CJ as linear dimension reference diameter XS CM center point as angular dimension R radius 5 7 ICP Contour Elements on the Later F special feed 274 5 ICP Programming il Entering chamfers roundings on the lateral surface 44 Select chamfer rounding L Choose chamfer d Choose rounding The corner is predefined by the starting point You need only enter the chamfer width B or rounding radius B 7 Parameters B chamfer width or B rounding radius F special feed 5 7 ICP Contour Elements on the Later HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 275 il z 6 1 DIN Pr 6 1 DIN Programming The structure of programs and program blocks follows the standard DIN 66025 ISO 6983 and is therefore
392. than lt Less or equal lt gt Not equal gt Greater than gt Greater or equal Equal AND Logical AND operation OR Logical OR operation 6 27 Program Branches rroaragrepeats i il 6 27 Program Branches gt rogralititepeats WHILE program repeat Ka Press Program variable function Select Program repeat WHILE Enter the variable condition see figure to the top right A program repeat consists of the elements WHILE followed by a condition comparison ENDWHILE concludes the conditional program branch The NC blocks that are programmed between WHILE and ENDWHILE are executed repeatedly for as long as the condition is fulfilled If the condition is not fulfilled MANUALplus continues execution of the program with the block programmed after ENDWHILE The condition includes a variable or mathematical expression on either side of the relational operator see figure to the top right After entering the program repeat program the NC blocks to be executed cc If the condition you program in the WHILE command is always true the program remains in an endless loop This is one of the most frequent causes of error when working with program repeats 402 75 T2 76 GO 76 GO 81 82 Variable 30 lt 58 74 696 S150 M3 4 862 250 G9 S600 G95 FO 4 T3 816 22 79 6350 2 29 F1 5 U 999 80 HILE 30 lt 5 L G1 Ki1 5 30
393. the simulation of a cycle program always starts from the cursor position DIN programs are simulated from the beginning of the program You can choose between wire frame graphics and cutting path graphics In addition the motion simulation graphics erasing graphics is available for displaying turning operations It is recommended to use this graphic check in the Program run mode since It provides a good overview of the machining process The wire frame graphics is particularly convenient if you only need a quick overview of the proportioning of cuts The path of the theoretical tool tip however is not identical with the contour of the workpiece This graphics is therefore not as suitable if you wish to run a thorough check on the machined contour In the CNC this falsification is compensated by the cutting radius compensation The cutting path graphics accounts for the exact geometry of the tool tip Here you can check whether the contour is machined completely or needs to be reworked whether the contour is damaged by the tool or overlaps are too large The cutting path graphics is especially useful for recessing drilling and milling operations where the tool shape has an essential influence on the accuracy of the resulting workpiece 68 Program run If Tool management Organization X 72 002 a es er Z 92 001 E Fe 0 20 40 60 80 100120 z on 0 S Eey LEEM D 5000 r min 100 0 043 degr ICP cut longi
394. the variable number Enter the mathematical expression Mathematical function function or Calcul Select the Calculating operation see figure to the operation lower right i m Cave Transfer the variable variable calculation as address term parameter The mathematical expression is calculated during the translation interpretation The result is assigned to the variable You can use both Mathematical functions and Calculating operations in the same mathematical expression The mathematical functions are arranged on two menu levels To switch to the next menu level press gt gt The following rules apply Multiplication division before addition subtraction You can form up to six levels using brackets HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 405 T 7 om OD D lt T E gt 00 N o Sen O 6 29 Su 6 29 Subprograms er DIH makro list Select the Subprogram call Select the DIN macro list Call the subprogram Take over Select Assume DIN macro DIH makro Enter transfer parameters Select the Subprogram call Enter the program name see figure at top right Enter transfer parameters General information on subprograms Subprograms are defined in a separate file They can be called from any main program or other subprogram DIN macros are subprograms Subroutines can be nested up t
395. tion With radial recess turning cycles unidirectional turning operations are always performed in the direction of the spindle With axial recess turning cycles the machining direction corresponds to the direction of contour definition Offset width B After the second infeed movement during the transition from turning to recessing the path to be machined is reduced by B Each time the system switches on this side the path is reduced by B in addition to the previous offset The total offset is limited to 80 of the effective cutting width effective cutting width cutting width 2 cutting radius If required the MANUALplus reduces the programmed offset width After precutting the remaining material is removed with a single cut Depth compensation R only with G815 G825 Depending on factors such as workpiece material or feed rate the tool tip is displaced during a turning operation You can correct the resulting infeed error with R during finish machining The depth compensation factor is usually determined empirically Roughing finishing Q Define whether the contour area is to be rough machined and or finish machined O can be programmed such that the workpiece is rough machined in the first cycle then insert another tool and finish machine the workpiece using a further cycle CEP These cycles require the use of recess turning tools HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 6 14 cess turd Cycles 7 il Simple recess turnin
396. to four partial cuts 1 2 1 4 1 8 and 1 8 V 3 If the division U I provides a remainder the first feed is reduced IE Transverse threads Are machined with recessing tools The difference in radii must be programmed Cycle STOP becomes effective at the end of a thread Cul Feed rate override is not effective during cycle execution Feed forward control is switched on 336 6 DIN Programming il Single thread G32 G32 cuts a simple thread in any desired direction and position longitudinal tapered or transverse thread internal or external thread The thread starts at the current tool position and ends at the end point X Z Parameters gt X end point of thread diameter value gt Z end point of thread gt F thread pitch gt U thread depth U gt 0 Internal thread U lt 0 External thread lateral surface or front face U 999 or 999 Thread depth is calculated maximum infeed 6 1 5 Th reac wo remainder cuts default O E B 0 The last cut is divided into four partial cuts 1 2 1 4 1 8 and 1 8 m B 1 Without distribution of remaining cut gt Q number of air cuts after the last cut default O gt K run out length at end point of thread default O gt W taper angle default 0 Position of the tapered thread with reference to longitudinal or transverse axis For cutting a descending tapered thread W must be programmed with a negative algebraic sign Range 45
397. tool Tool compensation values T highlighted in color Machining of mirrored contour active S display Symbol of spindle status Upper field Programmed value Lower field Setting of override control and actual spindle Speed with position control M19 spindle position Gear range figure beside S S highlighted in color Display applies to driven tool 3 3 ae Data F display Symbol of cycle status Upper field Programmed value Lower field Setting of override control and actual feed rate Tool call Depending on the tool carrier used T is followed by 2 or 4 characters Teal See Tool compensation on page 58 offset i One tool holder e g Multifix a Measure OCE Setting up Tools on page 54 More than one tool holder e g turret Call ool ddpp dd Position in the tool file tool list Saar Call the tool list Transtfer of T number from the tool op Position on the tool carrier turret location id ist list possible In Manual mode the T number is entered in Set T S F in Teach in mode T is a cycle parameter Transfer of spindle speed and feed rate from the tool S F from data tool Power driven tools On Feed per minute mm min Minut fai Off Feed per revolution mm rev Driven tools are defined in the tool description feedrate If the active tool is driven the displayed spindle data refer to the tool Constant On Constant speed rp
398. tool you must move it to a safe position dx 0 000 x 62 000 T 2 E o l 50 000 7 Figo am S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 150 m min 100 770 r min With Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back return list position tool speed finished HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 463 il th MANUALplus ing wi 9 1 Work Machining a thread chamfer and undercut tE The thread chamfer undercut and the following finishing cycles are programmed in such a way that the contour area is machined in a single uninterrupted cut MANUALplus approaches the starting point X Z in rapid traverse No further positioning movements therefore need to be programmed The thread chamfer and undercut are machined with the Undercut DIN 76 cycle With return is switched off This enables you to finish the contour area in a single uninterrupted cut 464 x 20 a T T 2 ED l 30 000 A F Bhan ee S 0 20 40 60 80 100120 220 m min ka GAHANNA 0 S i 3501 r min Undercut DIN 76 en z 2 1716 zafo 2720 amp 22j 30 i i 7 Ee gt oOo tR sW o Flo 2 Start pt With Re Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back return cut list position tool speed finished x 2 0 ey T 2 fom Z 30 000 F En S ivi 0 S Go 3501 r min Undercut DIH 76 iff K uU E Undercut diameter With Re Tool Take over S F from Constant Input Back return cut list position tool speed finished
399. tools for cycle G799 Danger of collision a2 Be sure to consider the hole diameter and the diameter of the milling cutter when programming approaching radius R 358 6 DIN Programming il 6 19 C Axis Commands Zero point shift C axis G152 G152 defines an absolute zero point for the C axis reference machine parameter 1005 Reference point C axis The zero point is valid until the end of the program Parameters gt C angle Spindle position of new C axis zero point Standardize C axis G153 G153 resets a traverse angle gt 360 or lt 0 to the corresponding angle modulo 360 without moving the C axis ce G153 is only used for lateral surface machining An automatic modulo 360 function is carried out on the face HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 N ce 6 19 C Axis m x D 3 J D G oh ol N i i 6 20 Face Machining Starting point of contour rapid traverse G100 Geometry command G100 defines the starting point of a contour on the face Machining command The tool moves at rapid traverse along the shortest path to the end point Parameters X end point diameter value C end angle for angle direction see graphic support window XK end point Cartesian coordinates YK end point Cartesian coordinates Z end point 6 20 Face ee ining Danger of collision tt During G100 the tool moves on a linear path even if you
400. top edge default Starting point X Z1 figure center X2 milling floor L rectangle length Rectangle Length of rectangle Square polygon Edge length Circle No input 4 8 Millin B rectangle width Rectangle Width of rectangle Square L B Polygon circle No input RE rounding radius default O Rectangle square polygon Rounding radius Circle Radius of circle A angle to Z axis default 0 Rectangle square polygon Position of figure Circle No input number of edges default O O 0 Circle Q 4 Rectangle square O 3 Triangle Q gt 4 Polygon tool number spindle speed cutting speed feed per revolution T N HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 217 il Cycle parameters second input window T O P infeed depth default Total depth in one infeed ET U overlap factor 0 r r7 No input Contour milling U gt 0 Pocket milling minimum overlap of milling paths U milling diameter I oversize in infeed direction K contour parallel oversize FZ infeed rate default Active feed rate E reduced feed rate for circular elements default Active feed rate H cutting direction default 0 H 0 Up cut milling H 1 Climb milling 4 8 Millin J contour milling default 0 depending on U the following applies Pocket milling and J 0 On the contour Pocket milling and J 1 Inside Pocket milling and J 2 Outside Contour milling and J 0 From the inside towards the outside Co
401. tour Programming ICP feature provides graphic support when you are defining the workpiece contours for ICP cycles ICP is the abbreviation of Interactive Contour Programming The contours are defined using linear and circular contour elements as well as form elements like chamfers roundings and undercuts CS For lathes used in the machining of ICP contours you need to define the tool angle and point angle Calculation of contour geometry MANUALplus automatically calculates all missing coordinates points of intersection center points etc that can be derived mathematically If the entered data permit several mathematically possible solutions you can inspect the individual solutions and select the proposal that matches the drawing Each unsolved contour element is represented by a small symbol below the graphic window MANUALplus displays all contour elements that can be drawn even if they are not yet fully defined Form elements You can insert chamfers and roundings at each corner of the contour Undercuts according to DIN 76 DIN 509 E DIN 509 F are only possible at paraxial orthogonal contour corners You have the following alternatives for entering form elements Enter all contour elements including the form elements in the sequence in which they are given in the workpiece drawing First define the rough contour without the form elements Then you superimpose the form elements see also Programmin
402. tours the contour Is shifted to the left or right depending on the cycle type With inside milling and closed contour The contour is contracted With outside milling and closed contour The contour is expanded With open contour and Q 1 Left in machining direction With open contour and O 2 Right in machining direction 378 6 DIN Programming il Helical slot milling G798 G798 mills a helical slot from the current tool position to end point X Z The slot width equals the diameter of the milling cutter For the first infeed l is effective MANUALplus then calculates all further infeed movements as follows Current infeed 1 n 1 E n nth infeed The infeed movement is reduced down to gt 0 5 mm Following that each infeed movement will amount to 0 5 mm Parameters X end point diameter value default Current X position Z end point of slot C starting angle Starting position of the slot default 0 gt F pitch E F positive Right hand thread E F negative Left hand thread gt F pitch gt P run in length Ramp at the beginning of the slot default O gt K run out length Ramp at the end of the slot default O U thread depth I maximum infeed default Total depth in one infeed gt E reduction value for infeed reduction default 1 CS You can mill a helical slot only on the outside HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 m X D 3 lt 3 D G J 00 6 21
403. transverse t23 Examples of roughing cycles 125 4 5 Recessing cycles 129 Recessing radial axial 131 Recessing radial axial Expanded 133 Recessing radial axial finishing 135 Recessing radial axial finishing Expanded 137 ICP recessing cycles 139 ICP recessing radial axial finishing 141 Recess turning 143 Recess turning radial axial 144 Recess turning radial axial Expanded 146 Recess turning radial axial finishing 148 Recess turning radial axial finishing Expanded 150 ICP recess turning radial axial 152 ICP recess turning radial axial finishing 154 Undercut type H 156 Undercut type K 157 Undercut type U 158 Parting 159 Examples of recessing cycles 160 HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 10 4 6 Thread and Undercut Cycles 162 Thread cycle longitudinal 165 Thread cycle longitudinal Expanded 166 Tapered thread 168 API thread 170 Recut longitudinal thread 172 Recut longitudinal thread Expanded 174 Recut tapered thread 176 Recut API thread 178 Undercut DIN 76 180 Undercut DIN 509 E 182 Undercut DIN 509 F 184 Examples of thread and undercut cycles 186 4 7 Drilling Cycles 190 Drilling axial radial 191 Deep hole drilling axial radial 193 Tapping axial radial 195 Thread milling axial 197
404. ts ont Face Entering circular arcs on the face Arc with center and radius Ly Arc with radius Arc with center Ao fs You enter the dimensions of the arc and then define the transition to the next contour element Parameters for Arc with radius the center is not requested For Arc with center point the radius is not requested XS YS starting point Cartesian coordinates XD CS starting point polar coordinates XK YK target point Cartesian coordinates X C target point polar coordinates I J center point Cartesian coordinates XM CM center point polar coordinates R radius F special feed 270 5 ICP Programming il Entering chamfers roundings on the face 44 Select chamfer rounding L Choose chamfer A Choose rounding The corner is predefined by the starting point You need only enter the chamfer width B or rounding radius B Parameters B chamfer width or B rounding radius F special feed HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 5 6 ICP Contour Elements a Face Q a im 5 7 ICP Contour Elements on the Later 5 7 ICP Contour Elements on the Lateral Surface You can use the linear dimension as an alternative to the angular dimension The setting of the Polar soft key determines which type of dimensioning is active MANUALplus distinguishes angular dimensions from linear dimensions by different address letters IE Depending
405. tud x 62 z 2 ma aaen ee Di o 2 shs roa Teach in Tool managenent Organization X 72 002 1 T1 foom Z 92 001 2 P Fe mMm a ESRC D 5000 r min 100 0 043 degr ICP cut radial 2 62 2 2 a kjo 2 wi3330 ooo 3 Machine Mode of Operation The motion simulation depicts the workpiece blank material as a filled surface and machines it during simulation by erasing the material erasing graphics The tools move at the programmed feed rate program run graphics If during running simulation you switch to the motion simulation it will not become effective until the simulation function is restarted You can interrupt the motion simulation at any time even during simulation of an NC block The display below the simulation window indicates the target position of the current path When using the motion simulation for checking individual cycles please note that in some cycles the workpiece blank is not known The tool movements will then be displayed but the machining process will not be displayed HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 Program run Reins Toot managenent Organization X 72 000 T 1 ax 0 000 Z 0 000 Pe mack 0 200 mn r 20 40 60 80 100 120 i 185 m min ee ee eee U 80 1901 4 r S sE D 5000 r min 100 0 043 degr Single Graphic Extra Back block Continue func 2 a amp 3 9 Graphic 2 a
406. u can program the users that operate the machine with system manager authorization You should then delete the user Password 1234 Logon 1 When Logon is selected a list of the entered users is displayed Select your name press Enter and then enter your password You are now logged on as an NC programmer or a system manager This logon remains effective until the logoff function is used or another user logs on with his password Logoff 2 The present user is logged off and authorization is reset to no protection class User service 3 User service functions are only available after log on as a system manager The following functions are available Enter user 1 Enter the name of the new user For typing in the names activate the alphanumeric keyboard with the gt gt key Then assign a password for each name The entered users are subsequently displayed in the user list Cancel user 2 Select the user to be deleted and confirm with OK Change password 3 Every user can change his or her password To safeguard against misuse the user must first enter the old password before assigning a new one 454 8 Organization Mode of Operation il System service iagnosis System service provides the following functions Date Time 1 Enter the date and or time Error messages are recorded together with the date and time they occurred You should therefore always ensure that the date and tim
407. u symbols This window only appears on the screen when menu selection is active aaa Toot managenent Organization Input box For entering the parameters of a cycle ICP X 72 002 T 1 element DIN command etc You can enter data check already programmed data and edit and Z 52 001 F fl 10 000 ener delete data as required This window is also used to ERICE 20 40 60 80 ne Tes Tai m min display data S vimivinnininn nvin nvininin D 5000 l So o 0 043 degr Graphic support window Input data such as cycle parameters tool data etc are explained with graphics The Circle key allows you to switch between the help graphics for internal and external machining Simulation window The simulation window shows a graphic representation of the contour elements and a simulation of the tool movements This enables you to check cycles entire cycle programs and DIN programs ICP contour graphics EAE 2 52 001 a 8 s he 22 amp 8 8 8 Poo Aa 185 Ffio ti Start point Display of the contour during ICP programming patel a ea Ea A arn eeh Back DIN editing window Display of the DIN program during DIN programming It is Superimposed on the machine window Error window Display of encountered errors and warnings 32 2 Basics of Operation il 2 2 Operation and Data Input Modes of operation The active mode of operation is highlighted
408. ult Active feed rate H cutting direction default 0 H 0 Up cut milling H 1 Climb milling J contour milling default 0 depending on U the following applies Pocket milling and J 0 On the contour Pocket milling and J 1 Inside Pocket milling and J 2 Outside Contour milling and J 0 From the inside towards the outside Contour milling and J 1 From the outside towards the inside 0 roughing finishing Milling sequence only for pocket milling default O O 0 Roughing O 1 Finishing R approaching radius Radius of approaching departing arc default O R 0 Contour element is approached directly feed to starting point above the milling plane then vertical plunge R gt 0 Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0 for inside corners Tool moves on approaching departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour element R lt 0 for outside corners Length of linear approaching departing element contour element is approached departed tangentially HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 221 il T O 4 8 Millin oO1 f Cycle run 1 2 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid traverse only in Teach in mode Calculate the proportioning of cuts infeeds to the milling planes infeeds in the milling planes Contour milling 3 Depending on R approach the workpiece and plunge to the first milling plane Mil
409. un mode or program DIN macros that are integrated in cycles The commands that you use in a DIN macro depend on the job at hand DIN macros support the complete range of commands that is available for DIN programs You can also convert cycle programs to DIN programs This enables you to make use of straightforward cycle programming and then convert the part program to DIN format for subsequent optimization or completion 42 3 Machine Mode of Operation 3 2 Switch On Switch Off Switch on In the screen headline MANUALplus displays the individual steps that are performed during system start When the system has completed all tests and initializations it switches to the Machine mode of operation The tool display shows the tool that was last used Whether a reference run is necessary depends on the encoders used If errors are encountered during system start MANUALplus displays the error symbol on the screen You can check these error messages as soon as the system Is ready see Error Messages on page 36 iE After system start MANUALplus assumes that the tool which was last used is still inserted in the tool holder If this is not the case you must inform MANUALplus of the tool change Traversing the reference marks y Select X reference 7 Select Z reference T Press Cycle START for the control to traverse the reference marks MANUALplus activates the position display and switches the
410. unctions Machining of contour or pocket defined in U Milling direction depends on definition in H and the direction of tool rotation see Cutting direction for contour milling and pocket milling on page 224 Milling cutter compensation effective except for contour milling with J 0 Approach and departure he point of the surface normal from the tool position to the first contour element is the point of approach and departure If no surface normal intersects the tool position the Starting point of the first element for rectangles the longer element is the point of approach and departure The tool approaches directly or on an arc according to approaching radius R Contour milling J defines whether the milling cutter is to machine on the contour center of milling cutter on the contour or on the inside outside of the contour Pocket milling roughing O 0 Contour milling J defines whether a pocket is machined from the inside towards the outside or vice versa Pocket milling finishing O 1 First the edge of the pocket is machined then the pocket floor is machined J defines whether a pocket floor is finished from the inside towards the outside or vice versa 216 4 Cycle Programming il Cycle parameters first inout window T O X Z starting point C spindle angle C axis position default Current spindle angle C1 angle of figure center default Spindle angle C X1 milling
411. ur definition on page 310 Parameters Z cutting limit he control machines up to the cutting limit P maximum infeed he proportioning of cuts is calculated so that an abrasive cut is avoided and the infeed distance is lt P H type of departure default 1 H 0 Machine contour outline after each pass H 1 Retract at 45 machine contour outline after last pass H 2 Retract at 45 do not machine contour outline I oversize X diameter value default 0 K oversize Z default 0 314 6 DIN Programming il Note on the execution of the cycle MANUALplus automatically determines the cutting and infeed directions from the current tool position relative to the starting point end point of the contour area Tool position at the end of the cycle m G827 Cycle starting point X last retraction diameter in Z m G828 Cycle starting point cc Descending contour elements are not machined The tool must be located outside the defined contour area Cutting radius compensation Active G57 G58 oversizes are taken into account if I K is not programmed After the cycle has been executed the oversizes are canceled Safety clearance after each step Parameter Current parameters Machining Safety distances HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 m x O 3 D G O0 N N o0 N C L 6 11 Contour Based ri Cycles o i 6 11 Contour B
412. ur end point P recessing width Infeeds lt P E No input P 0 8 cutting width of the tool E dwell time for chip breaking default length of time for two revolutions DX DZ distance to subsequent recess with respect to the preceding recess Q number of recess cycles default 1 T tool number S spindle speed cutting speed F feed per revolution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 45 Nevessinggye es j i 45 Rocessingfiljcles Cycle run 1 2 ON O1 PR W 132 Calculate the recess positions and the proportioning of cuts Approach workpiece for next recess from starting point or from last recess on paraxial path Move to end point X2 or end point Z2 at programmed feed rate Remain at this position for dwell time E Retract and approach for next pass Repeat 3 to 5 until the complete recess has been machined Repeat 2 to 6 until all recesses have been machined Return to starting point on paraxial path 4 Cycle Programming il Recessing radial axial Expanded Call the recessing menu Select the Recessing radial cycle see figures at right Select Recessing axial See figures on the following page Press the Expanded soft key The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in Q The parameters X1 Z1 to X2 Z2 define the first recess position recess depth and recess width Cycle parameters X Z starting point X1 Z1 contour starting point
413. ur parallel oversize K oversize in infeed direction FZ infeed rate default Active feed rate E reduced feed rate for circular elements default Active feed rate H cutting direction default 0 H 0 Up cut milling H 1 Climb milling 4 8 Millin J milling direction For surfaces or polygons with RE 0 J defines whether a unidirectional or bidirectional milling operation is to be executed J 0 Unidirectional J 1 Bidirectional 0 roughing finishing Milling sequence only for pocket milling default O O 0 Roughing O 1 Finishing HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 213 il Cycle run 1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid traverse only in Teach in mode 2 Calculate the proportioning of cuts infeeds to the milling planes infeeds in the milling planes 3 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling plane T O Roughing 4 Machine the milling plane taking J unidirectional or bidirectional into account 5 Plunge to the next milling plane 6 Repeat 4 to 5 until the milling depth is reached 7 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis 4 8 Millin Finishing 4 Finish machine the edge of the island one working plane after the other 5 Finish machine the floor from the outside towards the inside 6 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis 214 4 Cycle Programming il Slot radial Call the milling menu Select the Slot rad
414. urface Figure definition rectangle lateral surface Figure definition polygon lateral surface Linear pattern lateral surface Circular pattern lateral surface Linear slot lateral surface Contour milling cycle lateral surface Helical slot milling HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 360 361 362 362 368 369 370 383 385 363 364 366 358 372 378 374 374 371 380 381 382 387 389 376 377 3 9 G4 G9 G60 G204 Dwell time Block precision stop Deactivate protection zone Waiting for time 391 391 391 391 Overview of G functions i il Overview of Cycles Overview 85 Standard blank 86 ICP blank 87 Overview 88 Rapid traverse positioning 89 R Approach the tool change position 90 Longitudinal linear machining 91 m Single longitudinal cut Transverse linear machining 92 E Single transverse cut Linear machining at angle 93 Single oblique cut Circular machining 94 Single circular cut Circular machining 94 Single circular cut Chamfer 95 For machining a chamfer Rounding For machining a rounding 96 M functions 97 Pm For entering an M function Overview Cut longitudinal Roughing and finishing cycle for simple contours Cut transverse Roughing and finishing cycle for simple contours Plunge longitudinal Roughing and finishing cycle for simple contours Plunge transverse Roughing and finishing cycle for simple contours ICP contour
415. us 2yklenprog 4242 001 ok02069 yyy Beispielwerkstueck 0011 5361 002 bis auf n55 ok020697 555 Beispiel Fraesen Stirnflae 0026 FH Mannheim Huelse Mat POM 5552 003 Schlichten funktioniert ni 959595399 004 ok 10 07 97 666 ICP Excample Beispiel Ste 005 6666 Beispielwerkstueck 006 727 ICP Excample Beispiel M 007 Manualplus Zyklenprog 7777 Beispielwerkstueck 008 Manualplus Zyklenprog 888 ICP Excample Beispiel 009 Manualplus Zyklenprog 8888 0090 SINTEF T NR 202 06 KOMPLET 900 0091 SINTEF T NR 202 06 KOMPLET Example Beispiel 01 9999 Beispiel Gewinde 010 Manualplus Zyklenprog 999999 abspani 1 011 Manualplus 2yklenprog Size 8856 Byte Last change 08 07 2003 12 26 Transmit Receive Program Program Mark file file selection yiew all 8 Organization Mode of Operation Program transfer Serial mode MANUALplus displays its own directory see figure at right Transfer program ycle pr i Nunber 61 Marked 0 020 Manualplus zyklenprog ES 0208 035 P90 GETRIEBEWELLE 2 SEITE 040 Gewinde und Freistich Highlight the program or 0408 Cag aC Ene Pregio 040802 05 Mark Select and Mark programs or 050900 050901 0556 0701 Plan Einstich Mark Press Mark all Manualplus Zyklenprog Manualplus 2yklenprog 1 all Manualplus 2yklenprog 1 Manualplus Z2yklenprog Manualplus 2yklenprog Manualplus 2yklenprog Beispiel Example ICP Beispiel Gewindezapfen n
416. us 4110 j i 5 4 Programming Changes to ICP Co Splitting a contour If you delete a contour element which is located between preceding and subsequent elements the contour is split into a basic contour and a remaining contour see figure at upper right The remaining contour cannot be edited you can however change the basic contour and link it to the remaining contour This is usually done by inserting new contour elements Linking the last contour element to the remaining contour is also permitted if such a link is possible MANUALplus supports this possibility by taking over the starting point coordinates of the remaining contour You simply press Set X Z see figure at right 258 Teach in Toot management X 72 002 Z 52 001 2 S Q 20 40 60 80 100120 4 a F fl sacr i 185 m mi SE iar 0 043 degr a _p__f__p__i_s__i_s_i__s_j D 5000 r min Contour hum Delete Change Insert Back list contour t 4 J s element element element Teach in Teaccin UTS RSGERETENY I NOFaaRT za ORIN X 72 002 T 1 oie Z 52 001 2 Fie O 20 40 60 80 100120 S a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 0 S o 185 m min D 5000 r min 1 100 0 043 degr 25 17 afn4 994 2 11 395 al L FI a5 90 Target pt in amp 5 ICP Programming il Superimposing form elements When superim
417. ution HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 4 Roughin o il T O 4 4 Roughin Cycle run 1 2 3 4 110 Calculate the proportioning of cuts infeed Approach workpiece on paraxial path for first pass from X Z Plunge cut at plunging angle A with reduced feed Move to contour end point Z2 or X2 or if programmed to oblique contour element defined by W at programmed feed rate Depending on algebraic sign of P E P gt 0 Machine contour outline m P lt O Retract at angle of 45 Return and approach again for next pass Repeat steps 3 to 5 until X2 or Z2 is reached Return to starting point on paraxial path 4 Cycle Programming il Plunge longitudinal transverse Expanded Call the Roughing longitudinal transverse cycles Select Plunge longitudinal see figures at right Select Plunge transverse see figures on the following page Press the Expanded soft key This cycle machines the area defined by X1 Z1 X2 Z2 and plunging angle A taking the oversizes into account The steeper the tool plunges into the material the greater the feed rate decrease max 50 Pay attention to the dimensions of facing tools see Facing tools on page 419 alt Danger of collision If the tool angle and the tool point angle have not been defined the tool plunge cuts at the plunging angle If the tool and point angles have been defined the tool plung
418. utter radius compensation is not carried out Oversizes Oversizes programmed with G57 are taken into account The oversizes remain in effect after execution of the cycle Safety clearance after a pass is 1 mm 320 6 DIN Programming il Simple contour repeat cycle G83 G83 repeatedly executes the machining cycle programmed in the sub sequent blocks The machining cycle may contain simple traverse paths or cycles without contour definition G80 ends the machining cycle X Z define the starting point of the contour G83 starts the cycle execution from the current tool position Before each pass the tool advances by the infeed distance defined in I K The control then executes the machining operation which is programmed in the blocks after G83 taking the distance from the tool position to the contour starting point as an oversize G83 repeats this operation until the starting point is reached G83 is used for E Machining contour parallel workpiece sections roughing of pre shaped workpiece blanks Repeating machining operations for example for slot cutting Parameters X starting point diameter value Z starting point gt I maximum infeed in X direction I is entered without the algebraic sign gt K maximum infeed in Z direction K is entered without the algebraic sign Note on the execution of the cycle If the number of infeeds differs for the X and Z axes the tool first advances
419. w one If the cursor is located in the program number field you can enter the number of the desired program If you do not know the exact program number simply enter the incomplete number and switch into the program list with ENTER The cursor is then located on the first program number that matches your entry When the cursor is in the program list window you can scroll through the list to find the desired program Enter the first character of the program number for the highlight to jump to the next program that starts with this number You can switch from Program number to Program list with ENTER or the vertical arrow keys And ENTER or the horizontal arrow keys will take you back to Program number again C If you wish to change a program number you must copy the program assign It anew program number and then erase the original program 76 3 Machine Mode of Operation il 3 12 Conversion into DIN Format The Convert to DIN function enables you to convert a cycle program to a DIN program with the same functionality You can then optimize expand such a DIN program etc Cyc prog Press Cye prog gt DIN gt DIH Select the program to be converted mee Press Create DIN prog DIH prog The generated DIN program has the same program number as the cycle program Should MANUALplus encounter any errors during conversion it generates an error message and aborts conversion HEIDENHAIN MA
420. xial contour corners along the longitudinal axis HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 X 5 100 AX Z 52 001 2 Nniunvntsniniiniit 20 40 60 80 inn 0 eee D 5000 a Recessing radial axial Recessing and finishing cycles for simple contours ICP recessing radial axial Recessing and finishing cycles for any type of contour Recess turning radial axial Recess turning and finishing cycles for simple contours and any type of contour Undercut H Undercut type H Undercut K Undercut type K Undercut U Undercut type U Parting Cycle for parting the workpiece 10 000 on r 185 m min 0 043 degr 45 ng Contour elements Basic mode Machining a rectangular area T Expanded mode Oblique cut at contour start 4 5 Recessinc Expanded mode Oblique cut at contour end Expanded mode Rounding arc in both corners of contour valley Expanded mode Chamfer or rounding at contour start Expanded mode Chamfer or rounding at contour end 1133323 130 4 Cycle Programming il Recessing radial axial Call the recessing menu Select the Recessing radial cycle see figures at right Select Recessing axial see figures on the following page The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in Q The parameters X Z to X2 Z2 define the first recess position recess depth and recess width Cycle parameters X Z starting point X2 Z2 conto
421. xt entry of N this type Press the tool type menu key again MANUALplus scrolls through the list and stops at the next entry of this type When MANUALplus has reached the last entry in the list for the selected tool type it displays the first entry for this type again Available functions Change MANUALplus opens the input window Back Return to tool list E N N GF The internal buffer can only store one entry at a time If you successively transfer several entries to the buffer with Cut out or Copy without inserting them again at another position with Insert all entries transferred to the buffer except the last one will be lost HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 415 il ool Texts 7 3 Tool Texts A description or designation makes It easier to find a specific tool whenever you need it again You can describe each tool by an identification number or a general designation depending on your method of organization Connections The descriptions are managed in the tool text list Each entry is preceded by a Q number The parameter Tool text O contains the reference number for the tool text list The text is then displayed in the tool list You can navigate within the tool list with the arrow keys and PgUp PgDn to check the entries Create entry Position the cursor on a free space Press Change text MANUALplus displays the alohanumeric keyboard for entering the text Edit entry Position the
422. y for all cutting and infeed directions as well as for roughing and finishing see examples of linear cycles in figures at right The starting point must not be located in the shaded area The area to be machined starts at the starting point X Z if the tool is positioned before the contour area MANUALplus will otherwise only machine the contour area defined If the starting point X Z for internal machining is located above the turning center only the contour area defined will be machined A contour starting point X1 Z1 E contour end point X2 Z2 Contour elements Basic mode Machining a rectangular area Expanded mode Oblique cut at contour start Expanded mode Oblique cut at contour end an Expanded mode Oblique cuts at contour start and end with angles gt 45 Expanded mode One obligue cut by entering the starting point of contour end point of contour and starting angle HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 T O 4 4 Roughin Expanded mode Rounding Expanded mode Chamfer or rounding at contour end 4 4 Roughing cies Basic mode Machining with descending contour Basic mode Oblique cut at contour end Expanded mode Rounding in contour valley in both corners Expanded mode Chamfer or rounding at contour start Expanded mode Chamfer or rounding at contour end 100 24311171 A Cycle Programming il Roughing longitudinal transverse Call the Roughing longitudinal
423. ycle Cycle starting point ce Cutting radius compensation Active m m x x D D 3 3 2 2 D R G G 00 00 or rs A HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 32 6 13 Neves Cycles Simple recessing cycle axial G865 radial G866 The cycles axially radially machine the rectangle described by the tool position and X Z Parameters X base corner X diameter value Z base corner Z P recessing width P is not defined Infeeds lt 0 8 cutting width of tool P is defined Infeeds lt P oversize X default 0 A oversize Z default 0 6 13 neces Cycles roughing finishing Q 0 Only roughing Q 1 The recess is first rough machined with consideration of the oversizes and then finish machined at finishing feed E m finishing feed rate or dwell time For Q 0 Dwell time for chip breaking default Time of two revolutions For Q 1 Finishing feed default Active feed rate Note on the execution of the cycle MANUALplus determines the cutting direction from the current tool position relative to the starting point end point of the contour area Tool position at the end of the cycle Cycle starting point KE Cutting radius compensation Active G57 G58 oversizes are taken into account if I K is not programmed After the cycle has been executed the oversizes are canceled m m x lt x lt 3 3 5 5 D O O Oo
424. ycle STOP becomes effective at the end of a thread Cul The feed rate and spindle speed overrides are not effective during cycle execution Handwheel superposition is activated with a switch located on the machine operating panel Feedforward control is switched off HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 i i 6 16 Unde A Cycles 6 16 Undercut Cycles Undercut contour G25 G25 generates an undercut form element DIN 509 E DIN 509 F DIN 76 that can then be integrated in roughing or finishing cycles The table in the graphic support window describes the parameters for undercuts Parameters H type of undercut default 0 H 0 5 DIN 509 E E H 6 DIN 509 F E H 7 DIN 76 I undercut depth default Value from standard table K undercut width default Value from standard table gt R undercut radius default Value from standard table P transverse depth default Value from standard table W undercut angle default Value from standard table A transverse angle default Value from standard table FP thread pitch no input FP is calculated from the thread diameter U finishing oversize default 0 gt E reduced feed rate for machining the undercut default Active teed rate Note If the parameters are not defined MANUALplus determines the following values from the diameter or the thread pitch undercut DIN 76 in the standard table see Thread Pitch on page 524 DIN 509 E
425. zation mode of operation The behavior of the MANUALplus system is controlled by parameters In the Organization mode you set the parameters to adapt the MANUALoplus to your situation Furthermore you can exchange and save cycles and DIN programs with other systems over a serial data line PC host computer etc This operating mode also provides diagnostic functions for commissioning and checking the system HEIDENHAIN MANUALplus 4110 21 il 1 3 MANUALplus bese 1 3 MANUALplus Design The dialog between machinist and control takes place via Screen Soft keys Data input keypad Machine operating panel The entered data can be displayed and checked on the screen With the function keys directly below the screen you can select functions capture position values confirm entries and a lot more With the information key also found beneath the screen you can call error and PLC information and activate the PLC diagnostic function The data input keyboard operating panel serves for the input of machine data positioning data etc The MANUALplus does not need an alphanumeric keyboard Tool descriptions program descriptions or comments in a DIN program are entered with an on screen alohanumeric keyboard The machine operating panel contains all necessary controls for manual operation of the lathe The actual control is not accessible to the machinist You should know however that your MANUALplus has an integrated hard di

354 267-24 - heidenhain

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents